Operator s Manual C-Class Sedan

Transcription

1 Operator s Manual C-Class Sedan

2 Ê4Ct4gZË Order No Part No USA Edton B 2005

3 C 230 Kompressor Sport C240 C 240 4MATIC C320 C 320 4MATIC C320Sport

4 Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz. Your selecton of our product s a demonstraton of your trust n our company name. Furthermore, t exemplfes your desre to own an automoble that wll be as easy as possble to operate and provde years of servce. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many sklled engneers and craftsmen. To help assure your drvng pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small nvestment of tme: Please read ths manual carefully, then return t to your vehcle where t wll be handy for your reference. Please follow the recommendatons contaned n ths manual. They are desgned to acquant you wth the operaton of your Mercedes-Benz. Please pay attenton to the warnngs and cautons contaned n ths manual. They are desgned to help mprove the safety of the vehcle operator and occupants. We extend our best wshes for many mles of safe, pleasurable drvng. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DamlerChrysler Company

5 Contents Introducton... 9 Product nformaton... 9 Operator s Manual Servce and warranty nformaton.. 10 Important notce for Calforna retal buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobles Mantenance Roadsde Assstance Change of address or ownershp Operatng your vehcle outsde the USA or Canada Where to fnd t Symbols Operatng safety Proper use of the vehcle Problems wth your vehcle Reportng safety defects Reportng Safety Defects Vehcle data recordng Informaton regardng electronc recordng devces At a glance Cockpt Instrument cluster Multfuncton steerng wheel Center console Upper part Lower part Overhead control panel Door control panel Gettng started Unlockng Unlockng wth the SmartKey Starter swtch postons Adjustng Seats Steerng wheel Mrrors Drvng Fastenng the seat belt Startng the engne Swtchng on headlamps Turn sgnals Wndsheld wpers Problems whle drvng Parkng and lockng Parkng brake Swtchng off headlamps Turnng off engne... 56

6 Contents Safety and Securty Occupant safety Ar bags Seat belts Chldren n the vehcle Blockng of rear door wndow operaton Panc alarm* Actvatng Deactvatng Drvng safety systems ABS BAS ESP Four wheel electronc tracton system (4MATIC) wth the ESP Ant-theft systems Immoblzer Ant-theft alarm system* Tow-away alarm* Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng SmartKey Openng the doors from the nsde Openng the trunk Closng the trunk Trunk ld emergency release Automatc central lockng Lockng and unlockng from the nsde Seats Easy-entry/ext feature* Removng and nstallng front seat head restrants Rear seat head restrants Multcontour seats* Seat heatng* Memory functon* Storng postons nto memory Recallng postons from memory. 115 Storng exteror rear vew mrror parkng poston Lghtng Exteror lamp swtch Combnaton swtch Cornerng fog lamps* (All models wth B-Xenon* headlamps, except C 230 Kompressor Sport and C 320 Sport) Hazard warnng flasher Interor lghtng Door entry lamps Trunk lamp Instrument cluster Instrument cluster llumnaton Coolant temperature gauge Trp odometer Tachometer Outsde temperature ndcator Control system Multfuncton dsplay Multfuncton steerng wheel Menus Standard dsplay menu AUDIO menu NAV* menu

7 Contents Vehcle status message memory menu Settngs menu Trp computer menu TEL menu* Manual transmsson Shftng nto reverse Automatc transmsson* One-touch gearshftng Gear ranges Gear selector lever poston Automatc shft program Drvng tps Emergency operaton (Lmp Home Mode) Good vsblty Headlamp cleanng system* Rear vew mrrors Sun vsors Rear wndow sunshade* Rear wndow defroster Clmate control Deactvatng the clmate control system Settng the temperature Adjustng ar dstrbuton and volume Defrostng Ar recrculaton mode Ar condtonng Rear passenger compartment adjustable ar vents Automatc clmate control* Deactvatng the automatc clmate control system Settng the temperature Adjustng ar dstrbuton Adjustng ar volume Defrostng Maxmum coolng MAXCOOL Ar recrculaton mode Charcoal flter Ar condtonng Resdual heat and ventlaton (avalable on automatc clmate control panel desgn A only) Rear passenger compartment adjustable ar vents Audo system Audo and telephone, operaton Operatng safety Operatng and dsplay elements Button and soft key operaton Operaton Rado operaton Introducton to satellte rado* (USA only) CD mode GSM network phones TDMA or CDMA network phones Emergency calls Power wndows Openng and closng the wndows Synchronzng power wndows Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Openng and closng the power tlt/sldng sunroof Synchronzng the power tlt/sldng sunroof

8 Contents Drvng systems Cruse control Loadng Roof rack* Sk sack* (Canada only) Splt rear bench seat* Loadng nstructons Cargo te-down rngs* Useful features Storage compartments Ashtrays Cgarette lghter Electrcal outlet n the rear passenger compartment Telephone* Tele Ad* Garage door opener* Operaton The frst 1000 mles (1500 km) Drvng nstructons Drve sensbly save fuel Drnkng and drvng Pedals Power assstance Brakes Drvng off Parkng Tres Hydroplanng Tre tracton Tre speed ratng Wnter drvng nstructons Standng water Passenger compartment Drvng abroad Control and operaton of rado transmtters Catalytc converter Emsson control Coolant temperature At the gas staton Refuelng Check regularly and before a long trp Engne compartment Hood Engne ol Transmsson flud level Coolant level Battery Wndsheld washer system and headlamp cleanng system* Tres and wheels Important gudelnes Tre care and mantenance Drecton of rotaton Loadng the vehcle Recommended tre nflaton pressure Checkng tre nflaton pressure Tre labelng Load dentfcaton DOT, Tre Identfcaton Number (TIN)

9 Contents Maxmum tre load Maxmum tre nflaton pressure Unform Tre Qualty Gradng Standards (U.S. vehcles) Tre ply materal Tre and loadng termnology Rotatng tres Wnter drvng Wnter tres Block heater (Canada only) Snow chans Mantenance Clearng the mantenance servce ndcator Mantenance servce term exceeded Callng up the mantenance servce ndcator Resettng the mantenance servce ndcator Vehcle care Cleanng and care of the vehcle Practcal hnts What to do f Lamps n nstrument cluster Lamp n center console Vehcle status messages n the multfuncton dsplay Where wll I fnd...? Frst ad kt Vehcle tool kt Mnspare wheel Spare wheel bolts Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Unlockng the vehcle Lockng the vehcle Fuel fller flap Manually unlockng the transmsson gear selector lever Openng/closng n an emergency Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Replacng SmartKey batteres SmartKey Replacng bulbs Bulbs Replacng bulbs for front lamps Replacng bulbs for rear lamps Replacng wper blades Removng wper blades Installng wper blades Flat tre Preparng the vehcle Mountng the Mnspare wheel Battery Dsconnectng the battery Removng the battery Chargng and renstallng the battery Reconnectng the battery Jump startng Towng the vehcle Installng towng eye bolt Fuses Ads for changng fuses Man fuse box n passenger compartment Fuse box n engne compartment Fuse box n trunk

10 Contents Techncal data Parts servce Warranty coverage Loss of Servce and Warranty Informaton Booklet Identfcaton labels Layout of poly-v-belt drve C 230 Kompressor (all models) C 240 (all models)/ C 320 (all models) Engne Rms and Tres Same sze tres Mxed sze tres Mnspare wheel Electrcal system Man dmensons Weghts Fuels, coolants, lubrcants, etc Capactes Engne ols Engne ol addtves Ar condtonng refrgerant Brake flud Premum unleaded gasolne Fuel requrements Gasolne addtves Flexble Fuel Vehcles Coolants Wndsheld washer and headlamp cleanng system* Techncal terms Index

11 Product nformaton Please observe the followng n your own best nterest: We recommend usng genune Mercedes-Benz parts as well as converson parts and accessores explctly approved by us for your vehcle model. We have tested these parts to determne ther relablty, safety and specal sutablty for Mercedes-Benz vehcles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsble for them, even f n ndvdual cases an offcal approval or authorzaton by governmental or other agences should exst. Use of such parts and accessores could adversely affect the safety, performance or relablty of your vehcle. Please do not use them. Introducton Product nformaton Genune Mercedes-Benz parts as well as converson parts and accessores approved by us are avalable at your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center where you wll receve comprehensve nformaton, also on permssble techncal modfcatons, and where proper nstallaton wll be performed. 9

12 Introducton Operator s Manual Ths Operator s Manual contans a great deal of useful nformaton. We urge you to read t carefully and famlarze yourself wth the vehcle before drvng. For your own safety and longer servce lfe of the vehcle, we urge you to follow the nstructons and warnngs contaned n ths manual. Ignorng them could result n damage to the vehcle or personal njury to you or others. Vehcle damage caused by falure to follow nstructons s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Your vehcle may have some or all of the equpment descrbed n ths manual. Therefore, you may fnd explanatons for optonal equpment not nstalled n your vehcle. If you have any questons about the operaton of any equpment, your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. We contnuously strve to mprove our product, and ask for your understandng that we reserve the rght to make changes n desgn and equpment. Therefore, nformaton, llustratons and descrptons n ths Operator s Manual mght dffer from your vehcle. Optonal equpment s also descrbed n ths manual, ncludng operatng nstructons wherever necessary. Snce they are specal-order tems, the descrptons and llustratons heren may vary slghtly from the actual equpment of your vehcle. If there are any equpment detals that are not shown or descrbed n ths Operator s Manual, your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll be glad to nform you of correct care and operatng procedures. The Operator s Manual and Mantenance Booklet are mportant documents and should be kept wth the vehcle. Servce and warranty nformaton The Servce and Warranty Informaton Booklet contans detaled nformaton about the warrantes coverng your Mercedes-Benz, ncludng: New Car Lmted Warranty Emsson System Warranty Emsson Performance Warranty Calforna, Mane, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emsson Control System Warranty (Calforna, Mane, Massachusetts, and Vermont only) State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) 10

13 Introducton Operator s Manual Important notce for Calforna retal buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobles Under Calforna law you may be enttled to a replacement of your vehcle or a refund of the purchase prce or lease prce, f Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or ts authorzed repar or servce facltes fal to fx one or more substantal defects or malfunctons n the vehcle that are covered by ts express warranty after a reasonable number of repar attempts. Durng the perod of 18 months from orgnal delvery of the vehcle or the accumulaton of mles (approx km) on the odometer of the vehcle, whchever occurs frst, a reasonable number of repar attempts s presumed for a retal buyer or lessee f one or more of the followng occurs: (1) the same substantal defect or malfuncton results n a condton that s lkely to cause death or serous bodly njury f the vehcle s drven, that defect or malfuncton has been subject to repar two or more tmes, and you have drectly notfed Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC n wrtng of the need for ts repar, (2) the same substantal defect or malfuncton of a less serous nature than category (1) has been subject to repar four or more tmes and you have drectly notfed us n wrtng of the need for ts repar, or (3) the vehcle s out of servce by reason of repar of the same or dfferent substantal defects or malfunctons for a cumulatve total of more than 30 calender days. Wrtten notfcaton should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assstance Center, One Mercedes Drve, Montvale, NJ

14 Introducton Operator s Manual Mantenance The Mantenance Booklet descrbes all the necessary mantenance work whch should be performed at regular ntervals. Always have the Mantenance Booklet wth you when you take the vehcle to your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for servce. The servce advsor wll record each servce n the booklet for you. Roadsde Assstance The Mercedes-Benz Roadsde Assstance Program provdes factory-traned techncal help n the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadsde Assstance number FOR-MERCedes (n the USA) (n Canada) wll be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assstance Representatves 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For addtonal nformaton refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadsde Assstance Program brochure n your vehcle lterature portfolo. Change of address or ownershp If you change your address, be sure to send n the Change of Address Notce found n the Servce and Warranty Informaton Booklet, or smply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assstance Center (n the USA) at FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Servce (n Canada) at It s n your own nterest that we can contact you should the need arse. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all lterature wth the vehcle to make t avalable to the next operator. If you bought ths vehcle used, be sure to send n the Notce of Purchase of Used Car found n the Servce and Warranty Informaton Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assstance Center (n the USA) at FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Servce (n Canada) at

15 Introducton Operator s Manual Operatng your vehcle outsde the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehcle n foregn countres, please be aware that servce facltes or replacement parts may not be readly avalable, unleaded gasolne for vehcles wth catalytc converters may not be avalable; the use of leaded fuels wll damage the catalysts, gasolne may have a consderably lower octane ratng, and mproper fuel can cause engne damage. Certan Mercedes-Benz models are avalable for delvery n Europe under our European Delvery Program. For detals, consult an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or wrte to: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delvery Department One Mercedes Drve Montvale, NJ In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delvery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontaro M4G 4C9 13

16 Introducton Where to fnd t Ths Operator s Manual s desgned to provde comprehensve support nformaton for you, the vehcle operator. Each secton has ts own reference color so you can fnd nformaton quckly. At a glance Here you wll fnd an overvew of all the controls that can be operated from the drver s seat. Gettng started Here you wll fnd all the nformaton you need for your frst drve. You should read ths secton frst f ths s your frst Mercedes-Benz vehcle or f you are rentng or borrowng ths vehcle. Safety and Securty Here you wll fnd descrptons of the safety features of your vehcle. Controls n detal Here you wll fnd detaled nformaton about the equpment nstalled n your vehcle. Ths secton expands on the Gettng started secton and also descrbes techncal nnovatons. If you are already famlar wth the basc functons of your vehcle, ths secton wll be of partcular nterest to you. Operaton Here you wll fnd all the nformaton you need for the proper operaton of your vehcle. Practcal hnts Ths secton provdes fast assstance for dealng wth problems you may encounter. Techncal data All mportant techncal data for your vehcle can be found n ths secton. Indexes The glossary provdes explanatons of the most mportant techncal terms. The table of contents and the ndex are desgned to help you fnd nformaton quckly and easly. The followng publcatons are part of your vehcle documentaton: ths Operator s Manual the Mantenance Booklet Separate operatng nstructons wll be provded as requred dependng on the equpment optons nstalled n your vehcle. 14

17 Symbols The followng symbols are found n ths Operator s Manual: * Optonal equpment s dentfed wth an astersk. Snce standard equpment vares between models, the descrptons and llustratons n ths manual may dffer slghtly from the actual equpment of your vehcle. Warnng! G Warnng notces draw your attenton to hazards that may endanger your health or lfe, or the health or lfe of others.! Hghlghts hazards that may result n damage to your vehcle. Helpful hnts or further nformaton you may fnd useful. Introducton Symbols Ths symbol ponts to nstructons for you to follow. A number of these symbols appearng n successon ndcates a multple-step procedure. Page Ths symbol tells you where to look for further nformaton on a topc. Ths contnuaton symbol marks an nterrupted procedure whch wll be contnued on the next page. -> In the glossary of techncal terms, ths symbol s used to ndcate cross-references to term defntons. Dsplay Words appearng n the multfuncton dsplay are prnted n the type shown here. 15

18 Introducton Operatng safety Warnng! G Work mproperly carred out on electronc components and assocated software could cause them to cease functonng. Because the vehcle s electronc components are nterconnected, any modfcatons made may produce an undesred effect on other systems. Electronc malfunctons could serously mpar the operatng safety of your vehcle. See an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for repars or modfcatons to electronc components. Other mproper work or modfcatons on the vehcle could also have a negatve mpact on the operatng safety of the vehcle. Some safety systems only functon whle the engne s runnng. You should therefore never turn off the engne whle drvng. Warnng! G Heavy blows aganst the vehcle underbody or tres/wheels, for example when runnng over an obstacle, road debrs or a pothole, may cause serous damage and mpar the operatng safety of your vehcle. If you feel a sudden sgnfcant vbraton or rde dsturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehcle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warnng flashers, carefully slow down, and drve wth cauton to an area whch s a safe dstance from the road. Inspect the vehcle underbody and tres/wheels for possble damage. If the vehcle appears unsafe, have t towed to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualfed mantenance or repar faclty for further nspecton or repars. Proper use of the vehcle Proper use of the vehcle requres that you are famlar wth the followng nformaton and rules: the safety precautons n ths manual the Techncal data secton n ths manual traffc rules and regulatons motor vehcle laws and safety standards Warnng! G Varous warnng labels are attached to your vehcle. These warnng labels are ntended to make you and others aware of varous rsks. You should not remove any of these warnng labels unless explctly nstructed to do so by nformaton on the label tself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certan rsks whch may result n an accdent and/or personal njury. 16

19 Problems wth your vehcle Introducton Problems wth your vehcle If you should experence a problem wth your vehcle, partcularly one that you beleve may affect ts safe operaton, we urge you to mmedately contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem dagnosed and corrected f requred. If the matter s not handled to your satsfacton, please dscuss the problem wth the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or f necessary contact us at one of the followng addresses: In the USA: Customer Assstance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drve Montvale, NJ In Canada: Customer Relatons Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontaro, M4G 4C9 17

20 Introducton Reportng safety defects For the USA only: The followng text s publshed as requred of manufacturers under Ttle 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulatons, Part 575 pursuant to the Natonal Traffc and Motor Vehcle Safety Act of Reportng Safety Defects If you beleve that your vehcle has a defect whch could cause a crash or could cause njury or death, you should mmedately nform the Natonal Hghway Traffc Safety Admnstraton (NHTSA) n addton to notfyng Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receves smlar complants, t may open an nvestgaton, and f t fnds that a safety defect exsts n a group of vehcles, t may order a recall and remedy campagn. However, NHTSA cannot become nvolved n ndvdual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may ether call the Auto Safety Hotlne toll-free at (or n Washngton, D.C. area) or wrte to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportaton, Washngton, D.C You can also obtan other nformaton about motor vehcle safety from the Hotlne. 18

21 Vehcle data recordng Informaton regardng electronc recordng devces Introducton Vehcle data recordng (Includng notce pursuant to Calforna Code 9951) Please note that your vehcle s equpped wth devces that can record vehcle systems data and, f equpped wth the Tele Ad system, may transmt some data n certan accdents. Ths nformaton helps, for example, to dagnose vehcle systems after a collson and to contnuously mprove vehcle safety. DamlerChrysler may access the nformaton and share t wth others for safety research or vehcle dagnoss purposes wth the consent of the vehcle owner or lessee n response to an offcal request by law enforcement or other government agency for use n dspute resoluton nvolvng DamlerChrysler, ts afflates or sales/servce organzaton and/or as otherwse requred or permtted by law. Please check the Tele Ad subscrpton servce agreement for detals regardng the nformaton that may be recorded or transmtted va that system. 19

22 20

23 At a glance Cockpt Instrument cluster Multfuncton steerng wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel 21

24 At a glance Cockpt 22

25 At a glance Cockpt Item Page 1 Cruse control lever Multfuncton steerng wheel 3 Horn 26, Instrument cluster 24, Overhead control panel 29 6 Glove box ld release Glove box lock Center console 27 Item Page 9 Starter swtch 33 a Hood lock release 296 b Steerng wheel adjustment 40 handle (manual) c Steerng wheel adjustment 40 stalk (electrcal)* d Parkng brake pedal 48, 54 e Remote trunk ld swtch 100 f Door control panel 30 g Parkng brake release 48 h Item Combnaton swtch Page Turn sgnals 50 Wndsheld wpers 51 Hgh beam 50 j Exteror lamp swtch 49, 117 k Exteror rear vew mrror adjustment 41, 116 l Headlamp washer swtch*

26 At a glance Instrument cluster 24

27 At a glance Instrument cluster Item 1 Speedometer wth: v Electronc Stablty Program (ESP) warnng lamp ; Brake warnng lamp, USA only 3 Brake warnng lamp, Canada only B Low beam headlamp ndcator lamp 2 L Left turn sgnal ndcator lamp 3 Multfuncton dsplay wth: Page 85, , 54, , 54, , Trp odometer 127 Man odometer 129 Gear selector lever poston 47, 129, 168 Item Page Program mode 169 Status ndcator (outsde temperature/dgtal speedometer 128, 144 Dgtal clock K Rght turn sgnal ndcator lamp 50 5 Tachometer wth: Antlock Brake System (ABS) ndcator lamp ú Engne malfuncton ndcator lamp, USA only ± Engne malfuncton ndcator lamp, Canada only 1 Supplemental restrant system ndcator lamp 83, , , , 349 Item Page < Seat belt telltale 64, 349 A Hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp 50, Fuel gauge wth: Fuel reserve warnng lamp Fuel fller cap locaton ndcator: The fuel fller cap s on the rear rght-hand sde. 7 Coolant temperature 127 gauge 8 Reset button for: 126 Resettng trp 127 odometer Resettng ndvdual 141 settngs Instrument cluster llumnaton

28 At a glance Multfuncton steerng wheel Item Page 1 Multfuncton dsplay 129 Operatng control 130 system 2 Selectng the submenu or settng the volume: Press button æ up/to ncrease ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call t to end a call Item 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for prevous menu 5 Movng wthn a menu: Press button j for next dsplay k for prevous dsplay Page C 230 Kompressor Sport, and C320Sport: Steerng wheel n these vehcles wll vary from steerng wheel shown. However, multfuncton steerng wheel symbols and feature descrpton apply to Sport models as well. 26

29 Center console Upper part Item Page 1 Seat heatng*, drver s sde Rear wndow sunshade 176 swtch* 3 ESP control swtch 85 4 Hazard warnng flasher 123 swtch swtchng on/off 5 Central lockng swtch 104 Central unlockng swtch Swtch for foldng back 110 rear seat head restrants 7 Tow-away alarm swtch* 91 Ant-theft alarm system ndcator lamp* 90 Item 8 Seat heatng*, passenger sde 9 Front passenger front ar bag off ndcator lamp At a glance Center console Page , 350, 351 a Audo system, 201 or COMAND* (see separate operatng nstructons) b Clmate control 178 Automatc clmate control* 188 Rear wndow defroster

30 At a glance Center console Lower part Item Page 1 Ashtray 263 Cgarette lghter Gear selector lever for automatc transmsson* Gearshft lever for manual transmsson 47, , Cup holders Armrest Program mode selector swtch for automatc transmsson*

31 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Item 1 Rear nteror lghtng on/off Page Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Rght readng lamp on/off Interor lghtng control Hands-free mcrophone for Tele Ad* (emergency call system) and telephone* 158, 226, 267 Item Page 6 Interor rear vew mrror 41, Garage door opener* Left readng lamp on/off Tele Ad* (emergency call system) button

32 At a glance Door control panel Item Page 1 Door handle 98 2 Memory functon* (for storng seat, exteror mrror and steerng wheel settngs) Swtches for seat adjustment* 4 Swtches for openng/closng front door wndows 5 Swtch for rear door wndow overrde 6 Swtches for openng/closng rear door wndows 35, Remote trunk ld swtch

33 Gettng started Unlockng Adjustng Drvng Parkng and lockng 31

34 Gettng started Unlockng The Gettng started secton provdes an overvew of the vehcle s most basc functons. Frst-tme Mercedes-Benz owners should pay specal attenton to the nformaton gven here. If you are already famlar wth the basc functons descrbed here, the Controls n detal secton wll provde you wth further nformaton. The correspondng page references are located at the end of each segment. Unlockng wth the SmartKey SmartKey wth remote control 1 Lock button 2 Š Openng button for the trunk ld 3 Œ Unlock button 4  Panc button* ( page 81) Canada only: Only vehcles equpped wth an ant-theft alarm system* have SmartKeys wth ntegrated panc button* 4. Warnng! Press unlock button Œ on the SmartKey. All turn sgnal lamps flash once. The lockng knobs n the doors move up. The ant-theft alarm system* s dsarmed. Get n the vehcle and nsert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. For more nformaton, see Lockng and unlockng ( page 94). 32

35 Gettng started Unlockng Starter swtch postons Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. SmartKey Starter swtch 0 For removng SmartKey The steerng s locked when the SmartKey s removed from the starter swtch. If necessary, move steerng wheel slghtly to allow the lockng mechansm to engage. 1 Power supply to some electrcal consumers, such as seat adjustment 2 Ignton (power supply for all electrcal consumers) and drvng poston. All lamps (except low beam headlamp ndcator lamp, hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp, and turn sgnal ndcator lamps unless actvated) n the nstrument cluster come on. If a lamp n the nstrument cluster fals to come on when the gnton s swtched on, have t checked and replaced f necessary. If a lamp n the nstrument cluster remans on after startng the engne or comes on whle drvng, refer to Lamps n nstrument cluster ( page 344). 3 Startng poston 33

36 Gettng started Unlockng When you swtch on the gnton, the ndcator and warnng lamps (except low beam headlamp ndcator lamp, hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp, and turn sgnal ndcator lamps unless actvated) n the nstrument cluster come on. Ths ndcates that the respectve systems are operatonal. The ndcator and warnng lamps (except low beam headlamp ndcator lamp, hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp, and turn sgnal ndcator lamps f actvated) should go out when the engne s runnng.! If the SmartKey cannot be turned n the starter swtch, the battery may not be suffcently charged. Check the battery and charge t f necessary ( page 404). Get a jump start ( page 407). To prevent accelerated battery dscharge and a possble dead battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch when the engne s not n operaton. Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter swtch wth the gear selector lever n poston P. 34

37 Adjustng Warnng! Seats G All seat, head restrant, steerng wheel, and rear vew mrror adjustments, as well as fastenng of seat belts, must be done before the vehcle s put nto moton. The seats can be adjusted ether manually or electrcally, dependng on the vehcle s equpment. Warnng! G Do not adjust the drver s seat whle drvng. Adjustng the seat whle drvng could cause the drver to lose control of the vehcle. Never rde n a movng vehcle wth the seat back n an excessvely reclned poston as ths can be dangerous. You could slde under the seat belt n a collson. If you slde under t, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serous or fatal njures. The seat back and seat belts provde the best restrant when the wearer s n a nearly uprght poston and belts are properly postoned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 43). Never place hands under the seat or near any movng parts whle a seat s beng adjusted. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Even wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch, the power seats* can be operated when the respectve door s open. Therefore, do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Warnng! Gettng started Adjustng G Accordng to accdent statstcs, chldren are safer when properly restraned n the rear seatng postons than n the front seatng poston. Thus, we strongly recommend that chldren be placed n the rear seats whenever possble. Regardless of seatng poston, chldren 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured n an approprate nfant, or toddler restrant, or booster seat recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. For addtonal nformaton, see Chldren n the vehcle ( page 68). A chld s rsk of serous or fatal njures s sgnfcantly ncreased f the chld restrants are not properly secured n the vehcle and/or the chld s not properly secured n the chld restrant. 35

38 Gettng started Adjustng Manual seat adjustment 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat cushon tlt 3 Seat backrest tlt 4 Seat heght Seat fore and aft adjustment Lft handle 1. Slde seat to the desred poston. Allow handle 1 to reengage. Check for proper engagement before drvng. Adjust seat to a comfortable seatng poston that stll allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The poston should be as far rearward as possble, consstent wth ablty to properly operate controls.! When movng the seat, make sure that there are no tems n the footwell or behnd the seat. Otherwse you could damage the seat. Seat cushon tlt Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward untl your upper legs are lghtly supported. Seat backrest tlt Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Press swtch 3 n drecton of arrow untl your arms are slghtly angled when holdng the steerng wheel. Seat heght Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Press swtch 4 n drecton of arrow untl your legs are lghtly supported. 36

39 Gettng started Adjustng Head restrant heght Warnng! G Head restrant tlt 1 Release button Rasng: Manually adjust the heght of the head restrant by pullng t upward. Lowerng: To lower head the restrant, push release button 1 and push down on the head restrant. For your protecton, drve only wth properly postoned head restrants. Adjust head restrant so that the center of the head restrant supports the back of the head at eye level. Ths wll reduce the potental for njury to the head and neck n the event of an accdent or smlar stuaton. Do not drve the vehcle wthout the seat head restrants. Head restrants are ntended to help reduce njures durng an accdent. Adjust the head restrant n such a way that t s as close to the head as possble. Manually adjust the angle of the head restrant. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restrant cushon. For more nformaton, see Seats ( page 106). 37

40 Gettng started Adjustng Power seat* adjustment The seat adjustment swtches are located n each front door. 1 Head restrant heght 2 Seat heght 3 Seat cushon tlt 4 Seat fore and aft adjustment 5 Seat backrest tlt Swtch on gnton ( page 33). or Open the respectve door. Seat fore and aft adjustment Press swtch forward or backward n drecton of arrow 4. Adjust seat to a comfortable seatng poston that stll allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The poston should be as far rearward as possble, consstent wth ablty to properly operate controls.! When movng the seat, make sure that there are no tems n the footwell or behnd the seat. Otherwse you could damage the seat. The memory functon* ( page 114) lets you store the settng for the seat poston together wth the settngs for the steerng wheel and exteror rear vew mrrors. Seat cushon tlt Press swtch up or down n drecton of arrow 3 untl your upper legs are lghtly supported. Seat backrest tlt Press swtch forward or backward n drecton of arrow 5 untl your arms are slghtly angled when holdng the steerng wheel. Seat heght Press swtch up or down n drecton of arrow 2. Head restrant heght Press swtch up or down n drecton of arrow 1. Adjust the head restrant n such a way that t s as close to the head as possble. 38

41 Gettng started Adjustng Warnng! G For your protecton, drve only wth properly postoned head restrants. Adjust head restrant so that the center of the head restrant supports the back of the head at eye level. Ths wll reduce the potental for njury to the head and neck n the event of an accdent or smlar stuaton. Do not drve the vehcle wthout the seat head restrants. Head restrants are ntended to help reduce njures durng an accdent. Head restrant tlt Manually adjust the angle of the head restrant. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restrant cushon. For more nformaton, see Seats ( page 106). Steerng wheel Warnng! G Do not adjust the steerng wheel whle drvng. Adjustng the steerng wheel whle drvng, or drvng wthout the adjustment locked could cause the drver to lose control of the vehcle. When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Even wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch, the electrcal steerng wheel adjustment feature* can be operated when the drver s door s open. Therefore, do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. 39

42 Gettng started Adjustng Steerng wheel adjustment, manual Make sure the steerng wheel s securely locked by tryng to move t up and down, and n and out before drvng off. Steerng wheel adjustment, electrcal* The stalk for steerng wheel adjustment s located on the steerng column (lower left). Warnng! G 1 Handle To unlock the steerng column, pull handle 1 out to ts stop lmt. Move steerng wheel to the desred poston. To lock the steerng column, push handle 1 all the way n untl t engages. The steerng wheel s once agan locked nto poston. Only adjust the steerng wheel wth the vehcle at a standstll and make sure the steerng wheel s securely locked n place before drvng off. Drvng wthout the steerng wheel adjustment locked may cause an unexpected steerng wheel movement whch could cause the drver to lose control of the vehcle. Make sure the steerng wheel s securely locked by tryng to move t up and down, and n and out before drvng off. 1 Adjustng steerng column, n or out 2 Adjustng steerng column, up or down Swtch on gnton ( page 33). or Open the drver s door. 40

43 Gettng started Adjustng Adjustng steerng column n or out Move stalk forward or back n the drecton of arrow 1 untl a comfortable steerng wheel poston s reached wth your arms slghtly bent at the elbow. Adjustng steerng column up or down Move stalk up or down n the drecton of arrow 2. Make sure your legs can move freely and that all the dsplays (ncl. malfuncton and ndcator lamps) on the nstrument cluster are clearly vsble. The memory functon* ( page 114) lets you store the settng for the steerng wheel together wth the settngs for the seat poston and exteror rear vew mrrors. Mrrors Adjust the nteror and exteror rear vew mrrors before drvng so that you have a good vew of the road and traffc condtons. Warnng! G In the case of an accdent, lqud electrolyte may escape the mrror housng f the mrror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an rrtatng effect. Do not allow the lqud to come nto contact wth eyes, skn, clothng, or respratory system. In case t does, mmedately flush affected area wth water, and seek medcal help f necessary.! Electrolyte drops comng nto contact wth the vehcle pant fnsh can only be completely removed whle n ther lqud state and by applyng plenty of water. Interor rear vew mrror Manually adjust the nteror rear vew mrror. For more nformaton, see Rear vew mrrors ( page 172). Exteror rear vew mrrors Warnng! G Exercse care when usng the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror. The mrror surface s convex (outwardly curved surface for a wder feld of vew). Objects n mrror are closer than they appear. Check your nteror rear vew mrror or glance over your shoulder before changng lanes. 41

44 Gettng started Adjustng The buttons are located above the exteror lamp swtch. 1 Adjustment button 2 Passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror button 3 Drver s sde exteror rear vew mrror button Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Press button 3 for the drver s sde exteror rear vew mrror or button 2 for passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror. Push adjustment button 1 up, down, left, or rght accordng to the desred settng.! If an exteror rear vew mrror was forcbly pushed forward (ht from the rear) or forcbly pushed rearward (ht from the front), reposton t by applyng frm pressure untl t snaps nto place. The mrror housng s now properly postoned and you can adjust the mrror normally. The memory functon* ( page 114) lets you store the settng for the exteror rear vew mrrors together wth the settngs for the steerng wheel and seat poston. At low ambent temperatures, the exteror rear vew mrrors wll be heated automatcally. For more nformaton, see Rear vew mrrors ( page 172). 42

45 Drvng Warnng! Fastenng the seat belt G Do not lay any objects n the drver s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets n the drver s footwell have suffcent clearance for the pedals. Durng sudden drvng or brakng maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. Warnng! G Always fasten your seat belt before drvng off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restraned, even those sttng n the rear and pregnant women. Falure to wear and properly fasten and poston your seat belt greatly ncreases your rsk of njures and ther lkely severty n an accdent. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever n an accdent, your njures can be consderably more severe wthout your seat belt properly buckled. Wthout your seat belt buckled, you are much more lkely to ht the nteror of the vehcle or be ejected from t. You can be serously njured or klled. In the same crash, the possblty of njury or death s lessened f you are wearng your seat belt. The ar bags can only provde the protecton they were desgned to afford f the occupants are usng ther seat belts ( page 64). Warnng! Gettng started Drvng G Accordng to accdent statstcs, chldren are safer when properly restraned n the rear seatng postons than n the front seatng poston. Thus, we strongly recommend that chldren be placed n the rear seats. Regardless of seatng poston, chldren 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured n an approprate nfant or toddler restrant, or booster seat recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. For addtonal nformaton, see Chldren n the vehcle ( page 68). A chld s rsk of serous or fatal njures s sgnfcantly ncreased f the chld restrants are not properly secured n the vehcle and/or the chld s not properly secured n the chld restrant. 43

46 Gettng started Drvng Warnng! G Warnng! G Wth a smooth moton, pull the belt from the belt outlet. Never let more people rde n the vehcle than there are seat belts avalable. Be sure everyone rdng n the vehcle s correctly restraned wth a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a tme. Warnng! G Read and observe the addtonal warnng notces prnted n the Safety and Securty secton ( page 62) and ( page 64). Place the shoulder porton of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap porton across your hps. Push latch plate 1 nto buckle 3 untl t clcks. If necessary, tghten the lap porton to a snug ft by pullng shoulder porton up. Never rde n a movng vehcle wth the seat backrest n an excessvely reclned poston as ths can be dangerous. You could slde under the seat belt n a collson. If you slde under t, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serous or even fatal njures. The seat backrest and seat belt provde the best restrant when the wearer s n a nearly uprght poston and the belt s properly postoned on the body. 1 Latch plate 2 Release button 3 Buckle 44

47 Gettng started Drvng Belt outlet heght adjustment Adjust seat belt so that shoulder porton s located as close as possble to the mddle of your shoulder (t should not touch the neck or pass under the arm). Belt outlet, front seats 4 Release button Rasng Slde belt outlet upward. Lowerng Press button 4 and slde belt outlet downward. Proper use of seat belts Do not twst the belt when fastenng. Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder porton s located as close as possble to the mddle of the shoulder (t should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder porton of the belt under your arm. For ths purpose, you can adjust the heght of the belt outlet. Poston the lap belt as low as possble on your hps (over hp jont) and not across the abdomen. Place the seat backrest n a nearly uprght poston. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a tme. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same tme. When usng a seat belt to secure nfant or toddler restrants or chldren n booster seats, always follow the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. Check your seat belt perodcally durng travel to make sure that t s properly postoned. Make sure that the seat belt s always ftted snugly. Take specal care of ths when wearng loose clothng. Warnng! G Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the belt to get caught n the door or n the seat adjustment mechansm. Ths could damage the belt. Never attempt to make modfcatons to seat belts. Ths could mpar the effectveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as ths may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provde adequate protecton. Damaged seat belts or belts that were hghly stressed n an accdent must be replaced. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 45

48 Gettng started Drvng Startng the engne Warnng! G Inhalaton of exhaust gas s hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contans carbon monoxde, and nhalng t can cause unconscousness and lead to death. Do not run the engne n confned areas (such as garage) whch are not properly ventlated. If you thnk that exhaust gas fumes are enterng the vehcle whle drvng, have the cause determned and corrected mmedately. If you must drve under these condtons, drve only wth at least one wndow fully open. Manual transmsson Gearshft pattern for manual transmsson For more nformaton, see Manual transmsson ( page 162). Startng Depress brake pedal. Make sure the gearshft lever s n neutral poston (no gear selected). Fully depress clutch pedal. Otherwse the engne cannot be started due to the ntegrated safety nterlock. Do not depress the accelerator. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 3 and hold untl the engne starts ( page 33). For nformaton on turnng off the engne, see Turnng off engne ( page 56). 46

49 Gettng started Drvng Automatc transmsson* Gearshft pattern for automatc transmsson P Park poston wth gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drve poston For more nformaton, see Automatc transmsson* ( page 164). Startng Make sure the gear selector lever s set to P. Do not depress the accelerator. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 3 and hold untl the engne starts ( page 33). You can also use the touch-start functon. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 3 and release t agan mmedately. The engne then starts automatcally. Depress the brake pedal. The gear selector lever lock s released. For nformaton on turnng off the engne, see Turnng off engne ( page 56). Startng dffcultes If the engne does not start as descrbed, carry out the followng steps: Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0 and repeat startng procedure ( page 46). Remember that extended startng attempts can dran the battery. Get a jump start ( page 407). If the engne does not start after several startng attempts, there could be a malfuncton n the engne electroncs or n the fuel supply system. Notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 47

50 Gettng started Drvng Parkng brake 1 Release handle 2 Parkng brake Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could release the parkng brake, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous njury. Release parkng brake by pullng on handle 1. The warnng lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) n the nstrument cluster goes out. Drvng Depress the brake pedal. Move gear selector lever to poston D or R (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: Wat for the gear selecton process to complete before settng the vehcle n moton. Release the brake pedal. Carefully depress the accelerator. Once the vehcle s n moton, the automatc central lockng system engages and the lockng knobs drop down. You can open a locked door from the nsde. Open door only when condtons are safe to do so. You can deactvate the automatc lockng usng the control system ( page 153).! Smultaneously depressng the accelerator pedal and applyng the brake reduces engne performance and causes premature brake and drvetran wear.! If you hear a warnng sgnal when drvng off, you have forgotten to release the parkng brake. Release the parkng brake. 48

51 Gettng started Drvng After a cold start, the automatc transmsson shfts at a hgher engne revoluton. Ths allows the catalytc converter to reach ts operatng temperature earler. Warnng! G On slppery road surfaces, never downshft n order to obtan brakng acton. Ths could result n drve wheel slp and reduced vehcle control. Your vehcle s ABS wll not prevent ths type of loss of control.! Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: Place the gear selector lever n poston P or R only when the vehcle s stopped n order to avod damagng the transmsson.! Do not run cold engne at hgh engne speeds. Runnng a cold engne at hgh engne speeds may shorten the servce lfe of the engne. Warnng! G Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: It s dangerous to shft the gear selector lever out of P or N f the engne speed s hgher than dle speed. If your foot s not frmly on the brake pedal, the vehcle could accelerate quckly forward or n reverse. You could lose control of the vehcle and ht someone or somethng. Only shft nto gear when the engne s dlng normally and when your rght foot s frmly on the brake pedal. For more nformaton on drvng, see Drvng nstructons ( page 283). Swtchng on headlamps For more nformaton on headlamps, see Lghtng ( page 117). Low beam headlamps The exteror lamp swtch s located on the dashboard to the left of the steerng wheel. Exteror lamp swtch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on 49

52 Gettng started Drvng Turn exteror lamp swtch to poston B. The low beam headlamp ndcator lamp B n the nstrument cluster comes on ( page 24). Hgh beam The combnaton swtch s located on the left of the steerng column. Push combnaton swtch n drecton of arrow 1. The hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp A n the nstrument cluster comes on ( page 24). Turn sgnals The combnaton swtch s located on the left of the steerng column. Press combnaton swtch n drecton of arrow 1 or 2. The correspondng turn sgnal ndcator lamp L or K n the nstrument cluster flashes ( page 24). The combnaton swtch resets automatcally after major steerng wheel movements. To sgnal mnor drectonal changes such as changng lanes, press combnaton swtch only to pont of resstance and release. The correspondng turn sgnals wll flash three tmes. Combnaton swtch 1 Hgh beam 2 Hgh beam flasher Combnaton swtch 1 Turn sgnals, rght 2 Turn sgnals, left 50

53 Gettng started Drvng Wndsheld wpers The combnaton swtch s located on the left of the steerng column. Combnaton swtch 1 Sngle wpe 2 Swtchng on wndsheld wpers Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Swtchng on wndsheld wpers Turn the combnaton swtch to the desred poston dependng on the ntensty of the ran. 0 Wndsheld wpers off I Intermttent wpng II Normal wper speed III Fast wper speed Vehcles wthout ran sensor: When the vehcle s standng stll, the wper speed returns to next lower settng. Vehcles wth ran sensor*: Intermttent wpng nterval s dependent on wetness of wndsheld. After the ntal wpe, pauses between wpes are automatcally controlled by the ran sensor.! Vehcles wth ran sensor*: Do not leave wndsheld wpers n ntermttent settng when the vehcle s taken to an automatc car wash or durng wndsheld cleanng. Wpers wll operate n the presence of water sprayed on the wndsheld, and wpers may be damaged as a result. The swtch should not be left n ntermttent settng as the wpers wll wpe the wndsheld once every tme the engne s started. Dust that accumulates on the wndsheld mght scratch the glass and/or damage the wper blades when wpng occurs on a dry wndsheld. 51

54 Gettng started Drvng Intermttent wpng Set the wper swtch to poston I. Sngle wpe Intermttent wpng s nterrupted when the vehcle s at a standstll and a front door s opened. Press combnaton swtch brefly n drecton of arrow 1. The wndsheld wpers wpe one tme wthout washer flud. Wpng wth wndsheld washer flud Push combnaton swtch n drecton of arrow 1 past the resstance pont. The wndsheld wpers operate wth washer flud. For nformaton on fllng up the washer reservor, see Wndsheld washer system and headlamp cleanng system* ( page 303).! If anythng blocks the wndsheld wpers (leaves, snow, etc.), swtch them off mmedately. For safety reasons, wthdraw SmartKey from starter swtch before attemptng to remove any blockage. Remove blockage. Turn the wndsheld wpers on agan. If wndsheld wpers fal to functon at all n swtch poston I, set the combnaton swtch to the next hghest wper speed have the wndsheld wpers checked at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center 52

55 Gettng started Drvng Problems whle drvng The engne runs erratcally and msfres An gnton cable may be damaged. The engne electroncs may not be operatng properly. Unburned gasolne may have entered the catalytc converter and damaged t. Gve very lttle gas. Have the problem repared by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. The coolant temperature s above 248 F (120 C) The coolant s too hot and s no longer coolng the engne. Stop the vehcle as soon as possble and turn off the engne. Allow engne and coolant to cool. Check the coolant level and add coolant f necessary ( page 301). In case of accdent If the vehcle s leakng gasolne: Do not start the engne under any crcumstances. Notfy local fre and/or polce authortes. If the extent of the damage cannot be determned: Notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. If no damage can be determned on the major assembles fuel system engne mount: Start the engne n the usual manner. 53

56 Gettng started Parkng and lockng You have now completed your frst drve. You have properly stopped and parked your vehcle. End your drve as follows. Warnng! G Vehcles wth manual transmsson: Wat untl the vehcle s statonary before removng the SmartKey from the starter swtch. The vehcle cannot be steered when the SmartKey s removed. Warnng! G Wth the engne not runnng, there s no power assstance for the brake and steerng system. In ths case, t s mportant to keep n mnd that a consderably hgher degree of effort s necessary to brake and steer the vehcle. Warnng! G Do not park ths vehcle n areas where combustble materals such as grass, hay or leaves can come nto contact wth the hot exhaust system, as these materals could be gnted and cause a vehcle fre. To reduce the rsk of personal njury as a result of vehcle movement, before turnng off the engne and leavng the vehcle always: Keep rght foot on brake pedal. Frmly depress parkng brake pedal. Move the gear selector lever to poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). Slowly release brake pedal. When parked on an nclne, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Take the SmartKey wth you and lock the vehcle when leavng. Parkng brake 1 Release handle 2 Parkng brake Step frmly on parkng brake pedal 2. When the engne s runnng, the warnng lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) n the nstrument cluster wll be llumnated. 54

57 Gettng started Parkng and lockng Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could release the parkng brake and/or move the gear selector lever from poston P, ether of whch could result n an accdent and/or serous njury. Warnng! G Gettng out of your vehcle wth the gear selector lever not fully engaged n poston P s dangerous. Also, when parked on an nclne, poston P alone may not prevent your vehcle from movng, possbly httng people or objects. Always set the parkng brake n addton to shftng to poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). When parked on an nclne, turn front wheel towards the road curb. Swtchng off headlamps Turn the exteror lamp swtch to M ( page 49). For more nformaton on headlamps, see Lghtng ( page 117). 55

58 Gettng started Parkng and lockng Turnng off engne Place the gear selector lever n poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). Always set the parkng brake n addton to shftng to poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. The mmoblzer s actvated. Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter swtch wth the gear selector lever n poston P. Press the seat belt release button ( page 44). Allow the retractor to completely rewnd the seat belt by gudng the latch plate. Wth the SmartKey removed and the drver s door open, a warnng sounds f the vehcle s exteror lamps are not swtched off. Warnng! G To prevent possble personal njury, always keep hands and fngers away from the door openngs when closng the doors. Be especally careful when small chldren are around. Before closng doors, make sure there s no possblty of someone gettng caught n a door durng closng. After extng the vehcle, press the lock button on the SmartKey ( page 32). All turn sgnal lamps flash three tmes. The lockng knobs n the doors move down. The ant-theft alarm system* s armed. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. For more nformaton, see Lockng and unlockng ( page 94). 56

59 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Panc alarm* Drvng safety systems Ant-theft systems 57

60 Safety and Securty Occupant safety In ths secton you wll learn the most mportant facts about the restrant system components of the vehcle. Seat belts ( page 64) Chld restrants ( page 77) Lower anchors and tethers for chldren (LATCH) ( page 78) Supplemental Restrant System (SRS) wth Ar bags ( page 59) Ar bag control unt (wth crash sensors) Emergency tensonng devce (ETD) for seat belts ( page 67) Ar bag system components wth 56 ndcator lamp ( page 75) Front passenger seat wth Occupant Classfcaton System (OCS) ( page 71) As ndependent systems, ther protectve functons work n conjuncton wth each other. For nformaton on nfants and chldren travelng wth you n the vehcle and restrant systems for nfants and chldren, see Chldren n the vehcle ( page 68). The SRS system conducts a self-test when the gnton s swtched on and n regular ntervals whle the engne s runnng. Ths facltates early detecton of malfunctons. The 1 ndcator lamp n the nstrument cluster comes on when the gnton s swtched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engne has been started. The SRS components are n operatonal readness f the 1 ndcator lamp s not lt when the engne s runnng. A malfuncton n the system has been detected f the 1 ndcator lamp: fals to go out after approxmately four seconds after the engne was started does not come on at all. comes on after the engne was started or whle drvng. 58

61 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G In the event that the 1 ndcator lamp comes on durng drvng or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfuncton. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center mmedately to have the system checked; otherwse the SRS may not deploy when needed n an accdent, whch could result n serous or fatal njury, or t mght deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarly whch could also result n njury. In addton, mproper work on the SRS creates a rsk of renderng the SRS noperatve or causng unntended ar bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualfed techncans. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. If t s necessary to modfy an ar bag system to accommodate a person wth dsabltes, contact your local authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assstance Center at FOR-MERCedes ( ) for detals. Ar bags Warnng! G Ar bags are desgned to reduce the potental of njury and fatalty n certan frontal mpacts (front ar bags) or sde mpacts (sde mpact ar bags and head protecton wndow curtan ar bags). However, no system avalable today can totally elmnate njures and fataltes. The deployment of the ar bags temporarly releases a small amount of dust from the ar bags. Ths dust, however, s nether njurous to your health, nor does t ndcate a fre n the vehcle. The dust mght cause some temporary breathng dffculty for people wth asthma or other breathng trouble. To avod ths, you may wsh to get out of the vehcle as soon as t s safe to do so. If you have any breathng dffculty but cannot get out of the vehcle after the ar bag nflates, then get fresh ar by openng a wndow or door. 59

62 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G To reduce the rsk of njury when the front ar bags nflate, t s very mportant for the drver and front passenger to always be n a properly seated poston and to wear ther respectve seat belts. For maxmum protecton n the event of a collson always be n normal seated poston wth your back aganst the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that t s properly postoned on your body. Snce the ar bag nflates wth consderable speed and force, a proper seatng and hands on steerng wheel poston wll help to keep you at a safe dstance from the ar bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of poston or too close to the ar bag can be serously njured by an ar bag as t nflates wth great force n the blnk of an eye: St properly belted n a nearly uprght poston wth your back aganst the seat backrest. Adjust the drver seat as far as possble rearward, stll permttng proper operaton of vehcle controls. The dstance from the center of the drver s breastbone to the center of the ar bag cover on the steerng wheel must be at least 10 n (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplsh ths by a combnaton of adjustments to the seat and steerng wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not lean your head or chest close to the steerng wheel or dashboard. Keep hands on the outsde of steerng wheel rm. Placng hands and arms nsde the rm can ncrease the rsk and potental severty of hand/arm njury when drver front ar bag nflates. Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possble rearward from the dashboard when the seat s occuped. Occupants, especally chldren, should never place ther bodes or lean ther heads n the area of the door where the sde mpact ar bag nflates. Ths could result n serous njures or death should the ar bag be trggered. Always st nearly uprght, properly use the seat belts and use an approprately szed nfant or toddler restrant or booster seat recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. Falure to follow these nstructons can result n severe njures to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehcle, t s mportant that you make the buyer aware of ths safety nformaton. Be sure to gve the buyer ths Operator s Manual. 60

63 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G Accdent research shows that the safest place for chldren n an automoble s n the rear seat. It should be noted that wth respect to both front and rear sde mpact ar bags there s a possblty for a sde mpact ar bag related njury f occupants, especally chldren, are not properly seated or restraned when next to a sde mpact ar bag whch needs to deploy rapdly n a sde mpact n order to do ts job. To help avod the possblty of njury, please follow these gudelnes: (1) Occupants, especally chldren, should never place ther bodes or lean ther heads n the area of the door where the sde mpact ar bag nflates. Ths could result n serous njures or death should the sde mpact ar bag be deployed. (2) Always st nearly uprght, properly use the seat belts and for chldren 12 years old and under, use an approprately szed nfant or toddler restrant or booster seat recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you beleve that, even wth the use of these gudelnes, t would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted sde mpact ar bags deactvated, then deactvaton can be accomplshed upon your wrtten request to do so at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center at an addtonal cost. Please contact your local authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assstance Center at FOR-MERCedes ( ) for detals. Ar bags are desgned to deploy only n certan frontal mpacts (front ar bags) and n sde mpacts (sde mpact and head protecton wndow curtan ar bags) whch exceed preset thresholds. Only durng these events wll they provde ther supplemental protecton. The drver and passengers should always wear ther seat belts. Otherwse t s not possble for ar bags to provde ther supplemental protecton. 61

64 Safety and Securty Occupant safety In case of other types of mpacts and mpacts below ar bag deployment thresholds, ar bags wll not deploy. The drver and passengers wll then be protected to the extent possble by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt s also needed to provde the best possble protecton n a rollover. We cauton you not to rely on the presence of the ar bags n order to avod wearng your seat belt. It s mportant to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed ar bags and repar any malfunctonng ar bags to make sure that the vehcle wll contnue to provde supplemental crash protecton for occupants. Safety gudelnes for the seat belt, emergency tensonng devce and ar bag Warnng! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were hghly stressed n an accdent must be replaced and ther anchorng ponts must also be checked. Only use belts nstalled or suppled by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Ar bags and emergency tensonng devces (ETDs) are desgned to functon on a one-tme-only bass. An ar bag or ETD that s deployed must be replaced. Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not make any modfcaton that could change the effectveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as ths may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provde adequate protecton. No modfcatons of any knd may be made to any components or wrng of the SRS. Ths ncludes changng or removng any component or part of the SRS, the nstallaton of addtonal trm materal, badges, etc. over the steerng wheel hub, passenger front ar bag cover, door trm panels, or door frame trms, and nstallaton of addtonal electrcal/electronc equpment on or near SRS components and wrng. Keep area between ar bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). Do not hang tems such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These tems may turn nto projectles and cause head and other njures when curtan ar bag s deployed. Never place your feet on the nstrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor n front of the seat. Ar bag system components wll be hot after an ar bag has nflated. Do not touch. 62

65 Safety and Securty Occupant safety In addton, mproper repar work on the SRS creates a rsk of renderng the SRS noperatve or causng unntended ar bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualfed techncans. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. For your protecton and the protecton of others, when scrappng the ar bag unt or emergency tensonng devce, our safety nstructons must be followed. These nstructons are avalable from your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Gven the consderable deployment speed, requred nflaton volume, and the textle structure of the ar bags, there s the possblty of abrasons or other more sgnfcant njures resultng from ar bag deployment. When you sell your vehcle we strongly urge you to gve notce to the subsequent owner that t s equpped wth an SRS by alertng them to the applcable secton n the Operator s Manual. Front ar bags 1 Drver s ar bag 2 Passenger front ar bag Drver and front passenger ar bags are deployed: n the event of certan frontal mpacts f mpact exceeds a preset deployment threshold ndependently of the sde mpact ar bags The front ar bags n ths vehcle have been desgned to nflate n two stages. Ths allows the ar bag to have dfferent rates of nflaton that are based on the rate of relevant vehcle deceleraton as assessed by the ar bag control unt. On the front passenger sde, the front ar bag deployment s addtonally nfluenced by the passenger s weght category as dentfed by the Occupant Classfcaton System (OCS) ( page 71). The lghter the front passenger sde occupant, the hgher the vehcle deceleraton rate requred for the second stage nflaton of the ar bag. 63

66 Safety and Securty Occupant safety The ar bags wll not deploy n mpacts whch do not exceed the system s deployment thresholds. You wll then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The passenger front ar bag wll only be deployed f: 64 the system, based on OCS weght sensor readngs, senses that the front passenger seat s occuped the 56 ndcator lamp n the center console s not lt ( page 75) the mpact exceeds a preset deployment treshold Sde mpact ar bags, wndow curtan ar bags 1 Wndow curtan ar bag 2 Sde mpact ar bags The sde mpact ar bags and wndow curtan ar bags are deployed: on the mpacted sde of the vehcle n mpacts exceedng a preset deployment threshold ndependently of the front ar bags The sde mpact ar bags and wndow curtan ar bags are not deployed n mpacts whch do not exceed the system s deployment threshold. Seat belts When the engne s started, the seat belt telltale < llumnates to remnd you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the drver s seat belt s not fastened before the engne s started, the seat belt telltale < llumnates and a warnng chme sounds for approxmately sx seconds when the engne s started. The use of seat belts and nfant and chld restrant systems s requred by law n all 50 states, the Dstrct of Columba, the U.S. terrtores and all Canadan provnces. Even where ths s not the case, all vehcle occupants should have ther seat belts fastened whenever the vehcle s n moton. For more nformaton, see Fastenng the seat belt ( page 43).

67 Safety and Securty Occupant safety For nformaton on nfants and chldren travelng wth you n the vehcle and restrant systems for nfants and chldren, see Chldren n the vehcle ( page 68). Warnng! G Always fasten your seat belt before drvng off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restraned, even those sttng n the rear and pregnant women. Falure to wear and properly fasten and poston your seat belt greatly ncreases your rsk of njures and ther lkely severty n an accdent. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever n an accdent, your njures can be consderably more severe wthout your seat belt properly buckled. Wthout your seat belt buckled, you are much more lkely to ht the nteror of the vehcle or be ejected from t. You can be serously njured or klled. In the same crash, the possblty of njury or death s lessened f you are properly wearng your seat belt. Ar bags can only protect as they are desgned f the occupants are properly wearng ther seat belts. Warnng! G Never rde n a movng vehcle wth the seat backrest n an excessvely reclned poston as ths can be dangerous. You could slde under the seat belt n a collson. If you slde under t, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serous or even fatal njures. The seat backrest and seat belt provde the best restrant when the wearer s n a nearly uprght poston and the belt s properly postoned on the body. Warnng! G Never let more people rde n the vehcle than there are seat belts avalable. Be sure everyone rdng n the vehcle s correctly restraned wth a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a tme. 65

68 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were hghly stressed n an accdent must be replaced and ther anchorng ponts must also be checked. Only use seat belts whch have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not make any modfcatons to the seat belts. Ths can lead to unntended actvaton of the ETDs or to falure. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as ths may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provde adequate protecton. Have all work carred out only by qualfed techncans. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY G Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts n any other way than as descrbed n ths secton, as that could result n serous njures n case of an accdent. Each occupant should wear ther seat belt at all tmes, because seat belts help reduce the lkelhood of and potental severty of njures n accdents, ncludng rollovers. The ntegrated restrant system ncludes SRS (drver ar bag, passenger front ar bag, sde mpact ar bags, head protecton wndow curtan ar bags for sde wndows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensonng devce), and front seat knee bolsters. The system s desgned to enhance the protecton offered to properly belted occupants n certan frontal (front ar bags and ETD) and sde (sde mpact and wndow curtan ar bags and ETD) mpacts whch exceed preset deployment thresholds. Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, aganst your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would ncrease the chance of head and neck njures. The belt would also apply too much force to the rbs or abdomen, whch could severely njure nternal organs such as your lver or spleen. 66

69 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Never wear belts over rgd or breakable objects n or on your clothng, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these mght cause njures. Poston the lap belt as low as possble on your hps and not across the abdomen. If the belt s postoned across your abdomen, t could cause serous njures n a crash. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a tme. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects. Belts should not be worn twsted. In a crash, you wouldn t have the full wdth of the belt to dstrbute mpact forces. The twsted belt aganst your body could cause njures. Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt porton should be postoned as low as possble on the hps to avod any possble pressure on the abdomen. Never place your feet on the nstrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor n front of the seat. When usng a seat belt to secure nfant or toddler restrants or chldren n booster seats, always follow the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. Emergency tensonng devce (ETD), seat belt force lmter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equpped wth emergency tensonng devces and belt force lmters. The ETD s desgned to actvate n the followng cases: n frontal or rear-end mpacts exceedng a preset severty level. f the restrant systems are operatonal and functonng correctly, see 1 ndcator lamp ( page 58).! The ETDs for the front seats wll only actvate f the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate properly nserted nto buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats wll actvate wth or wthout the respectve seat belts fastened. 67

70 Safety and Securty Occupant safety In an mpact, emergency tensonng devces remove slack from the belts. Belt force lmters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants durng a crash. Warnng! G An emergency tensonng devce (ETD) that was actvated must be replaced. When dsposng of the emergency tensonng devce, our safety nstructons must be followed. These are avalable at your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Chldren n the vehcle If an nfant or chld s travelng wth you n the vehcle: Secure the chld usng an nfant or chld restrant approprate to the age and sze of the chld. Make sure that the nfant or chld s properly secured at all tmes whle the vehcle s n moton. Infant and chld restrant seats and nformaton on choosng an approprate restrant system can be obtaned from any Mercedes-Benz Center. Infant and chld restrant systems We recommend all nfants and chldren be properly restraned at all tmes whle the vehcle s n moton. All lap-shoulder belts except the drver s seat belt have specal seat belt retractors for secure fastenng of chld restrants. To fasten a chld restrant, follow chld restrant nstructons for mountng. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let t retract. Durng seat belt retracton, a ratchetng sound can be heard to ndcate that the specal seat belt retractor s actvated. The belt s now locked. Push down on chld restrant to take up any slack. To deactvate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can agan be used n the usual manner. 68

71 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Informaton on chld seats wth mountng fttngs for tether anchorages ( page 77). For nformaton on LATCH-type chld seat mounts ( page 78).! The use of nfant or chld restrants s requred by law n all 50 states, the Dstrct of Columba, the U.S. terrtores and all Canadan provnces. Infants and small chldren should be seated n an approprate nfant or chld restrant system, properly secured by a lap/shoulder belt or, f so equpped, a top tether anchorage pont and a chld restrant lower anchorage system that comples wth U.S. Federal Motor Vehcle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadan Motor Vehcle Safety Standards 213 and Warnng! G Never release the seat belt buckle whle the vehcle s n moton, snce the specal seat belt retractor wll be deactvated.! A statement by the chld restrant manufacturer of complance wth ths standard can be found on the nstructon label on the restrant and n the nstructon manual provded wth the restrant. When usng any nfant, or toddler restrant, or booster seat, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s nstructons for nstallaton and use. Please read and observe warnng labels affxed to the nsde of the vehcle and to nfant or chld restrants. Warnng! G Accordng to accdent statstcs, chldren are safer when properly restraned n the rear seatng postons than n the front seatng poston. Thus, we strongly recommend that chldren be placed n the rear seats whenever possble. Regardless of seatng poston, chldren 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured n an approprate nfant or chld restrant recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. The nfant or chld restrant must be properly secured wth the vehcle s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully n accordance wth the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. 69

72 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Chldren can be klled or serously njured by an nflatng ar bag. Note the followng mportant nformaton when crcumstances requre you to place a chld n the front passenger seat: Your vehcle s equpped wth ar bag technology desgned to turn off the front passenger front ar bag n your vehcle when the OCS senses the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld or less along wth the weght of a standard approprate chld restrant on the front passenger seat. A chld n a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat wll be serously njured or even klled f the front passenger front ar bag nflates n a collson whch could occur under some crcumstances, even wth the ar bag technology nstalled n your vehcle. The only means to completely elmnate ths rsk s to never place a chld n a rear-facng chld restrant n the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a chld n a rear-facng chld restrant n the back seat. If you must nstall a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat because crcumstances requre you to do so, make sure that the 56 ndcator lamp s llumnated, ndcatng that the front passenger ar bag s deactvated. Should the 56 ndcator lamp not llumnate or go out whle the restrant s nstalled, please check nstallaton. Perodcally check the 56 ndcator lamp whle drvng to make sure the 56 ndcator lamp s llumnated. If the 56 ndcator lamp goes out or remans out, do not transport a chld on the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. A chld n a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat wll be serously njured or even klled f the front passenger front ar bag nflates. If you have to place a chld n a forward-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possble, use the proper chld restrant recommended for the age, sze and weght of the chld, and secure chld restrant wth the vehcle s seat belt accordng to the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. For chldren larger than the typcal 12-month-old chld, the front passenger ar bag may or may not be actvated ( page 73). 70

73 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G Infants and small chldren should never share a seat belt wth another occupant. Durng an accdent, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. A chld s rsk of serous or fatal njures s sgnfcantly ncreased f the chld restrants are not properly secured n the vehcle and/or the chld s not properly secured n the chld restrant. Chldren too bg for a toddler restrant must rde n seats usng regular seat belts. Poston shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to acheve proper belt postonng for chldren from 41 lbs untl they reach a heght where a lap/shoulder belt fts properly wthout a booster. When the chld restrant s not n use, remove t from the vehcle or secure t wth the seat belt to prevent the chld restrant from becomng a projectle n the event of an accdent. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, even f the chldren are secured n a chld restrant system. Unsupervsed chldren n a chld restrant system may use vehcle equpment and may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Occupant Classfcaton System The Occupant Classfcaton System (OCS) automatcally turns the front passenger front ar bag on or off based on the classfed occupant weght category determned by weght sensor readngs from the front passenger seat. The system does not deactvate the front passenger sde mpact ar bag, the wndow curtan ar bag and the emergency tensonng devce. Occupants must st properly belted n a nearly uprght poston wth ther back aganst the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classfed. If the occupant s weght s transferred to another object n the vehcle (e.g. by leanng on armrests), the OCS may not be able to properly approxmate the occupant s weght category. 71

74 Safety and Securty Occupant safety If your seat, ncludng your trm cover and cushon needs to be servced n any way, take the vehcle to your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Only seat accessores approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. Both drver and the front passenger should always use the 56 ndcator lamp as an ndcaton of whether or not the front passenger s properly postoned. Warnng! G If the 56 ndcator lamp llumnates when an adult or someone larger than a small ndvdual s n the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-poston hmself or herself n the seat untl the 56 ndcator lamp goes out. More nformaton about ar bag dsplay messages ( page 354). In the event of a collson, the ar bag control unt wll not allow front passenger front ar bag deployment when the OCS classfed the front passenger seat occupant as beng up to or less than the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld n a standard chld restrant or f the front passenger seat s sensed as beng empty. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant s classfed as beng up to or less than the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld n a standard chld restrant, the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate when the engne s started and reman llumnated, ndcatng that the front passenger front ar bag s deactvated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat s classfed as beng empty, the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate when the engne s started and reman llumnated, ndcatng that the front passenger front ar bag s deactvated. 72

75 Safety and Securty Occupant safety When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant s classfed as beng heaver than the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld seated n a standard chld restrant or as beng a small ndvdual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate for approxmately sx seconds when the engne s started and then, dependng on occupant weght sensor readngs from the seat, reman llumnated or go out. Wth the 56 ndcator lamp llumnated, the front passenger front ar bag s deactvated. Wth the 56 ndcator lamp out, the front passenger front ar bag s actvated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant s classfed as an adult or someone larger than a small ndvdual, the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate for approxmately sx seconds when the engne s started and then go out, ndcatng that the front passenger front ar bag s actvated. If the 56 ndcator lamp s llumnated, the front passenger front ar bag s deactvated and wll not be deployed. If the 56 ndcator lamp s not llumnated, the front passenger front ar bag s actvated and wll be deployed: n the event of certan frontal mpacts f mpact exceeds a preset deployment threshold ndependently of the sde mpact ar bags. If the front passenger front ar bag s deployed, the rate of nflaton wll be nfluenced by: the rate of relevant vehcle deceleraton as assessed by the ar bag control unt front passenger s weght category as dentfed by the Occupant Classfcaton System (OCS). Warnng! G Accordng to accdent statstcs, chldren are safer when properly restraned n the rear seatng postons than n the front seatng poston. Thus, we strongly recommend that chldren be placed n the rear seats whenever possble. Regardless of seatng poston, chldren 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured n an approprate nfant or chld restrant recommended for the sze and weght of the chld. The nfant or chld restrant must be properly secured wth the vehcle s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully n accordance wth the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. 73

76 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Chldren can be klled or serously njured by an nflatng ar bag. Note the followng mportant nformaton when crcumstances requre you to place a chld n the front passenger seat: Your vehcle s equpped wth ar bag technology desgned to turn off the front passenger front ar bag n your vehcle when the system senses the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld or less along wth the weght of a standard approprate chld restrant on the front passenger seat. A chld n a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat wll be serously njured or even klled f the front passenger front ar bag nflates n a collson whch could occur under some crcumstances, even wth the ar bag technology nstalled n your vehcle. The only means to completely elmnate ths rsk s to never place a chld n a rear-facng chld restrant n the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a chld n a rear-facng chld restrant n the back seat. If you must nstall a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat because crcumstances requre you to do so, make sure that the 56 ndcator lamp s llumnated, ndcatng that the front passenger front ar bag s deactvated. Should the 56 ndcator lamp not llumnate or go out whle the restrant s nstalled, please check nstallaton. Perodcally check the 56 ndcator lamp whle drvng to make sure the 56 ndcator lamp s llumnated. If the 56 ndcator lamp goes out or remans out, do not transport a chld on the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. A chld n a rear-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat wll be serously njured or even klled f the passenger front ar bag nflates. If you have to place a chld n a forward-facng chld restrant on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possble, use the proper chld restrant recommended for the age, sze and weght of the chld, and secure chld restrant wth the vehcle s seat belt accordng to the chld seat manufacturer s nstructons. For chldren larger than the typcal 12-month-old chld, the front passenger front ar bag may or may not be actvated ( page 73). 74

77 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Deployment of the drver front ar bag does not mean that the front passenger front ar bag also should have deployed. The Occupant Classfcaton System ( page 71) may have determned: that the seat was empty or occuped by the weght up to or less than that of a typcal 12-month-old chld seated n a standard chld restrant - both nstances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front ar bag even though the mpact met the crtera and was of suffcent severty to deploy the drver front ar bag. that the seat was occuped by a small ndvdual (such as a young teenager or a small adult) or a chld weghng more than the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld n a standard chld restrant - nstances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front ar bag even though the mpact met the crtera and was of suffcent severty to deploy the drver front ar bag. The 56 ndcator lamp s located n the center console. 1 Front passenger front ar bag off ndcator lamp The 56 ndcator lamp wll be llumnated, except wth the SmartKey removed or n starter swtch poston 0. 75

78 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Warnng! G If the 1 ndcator lamp and the 56 ndcator lamp are lt at the same tme, there s a malfuncton n the Occupant Classfcaton System. The front passenger front ar bag wll be deactvated n ths case. In order to ensure proper operaton of the ar bag system and OCS: Have the system checked as soon as possble by qualfed techncans. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. St properly belted n a nearly uprght poston wth your back aganst the seat backrest. Do not lean on the armrests or lft yourself from the seat by usng the handle over the door as ths may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approxmate the occupant weght category. Only have the seat repared or replaced by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Read and observe all warnngs n ths chapter. Self-test Occupant Classfcaton System After turnng the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 1 or 2, the 56 ndcator lamp located n the center console llumnates. If an adult occupant s properly sttng on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as beng an adult, the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate and go out after approxmately sx seconds. If the seat s not occuped and the system senses the front passenger seat as beng empty, the 56 ndcator lamp wll llumnate and not go out. Warnng! G If the 56 ndcator lamp should not llumnate, the system s not functonng. You must see an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center before seatng any chld on the front passenger seat. More nformaton can be found n the Practcal hnts secton ( page 350). Warnng! G Never place anythng between seat cushon and chld seat (e.g. pllow), snce t reduces the effectveness of the Occupant Classfcaton System. The bottom of the chld seat must make full contact wth the passenger seat cushon. An ncorrectly mounted chld seat could cause njures to the chld n case of an accdent, nstead of ncreasng protecton for the chld. Follow the manufacturer s nstructons for nstallaton of chld seats. 76

79 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Installaton of nfant and chld restrant systems Ths vehcle s equpped wth tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seatng postons. Warnng! G Always lock backrest n ts uprght poston when rear seat bench s occuped by passengers, or the extended cargo area s not n use. Check for secure lockng by pushng and pullng on the backrest. 1 Cover of top anchorage rng Make sure the rear backrest s locked n ts uprght poston ( page 257). Remove cover 1 from anchorage rng 3. Gude tether strap between head restrant and top of seat back. Head restrant must be postoned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restrant and top of seat back. Make sure the tether strap s not twsted. 2 Hook 3 Anchorage rng Securely fasten hook 2, whch s part of the tether strap, to anchorage rng 3. Once the top tether anchorage hook s attached, the chld restrant tself can be secured. Tghten the top tether strap accordng to the chld restrant manufacturer s nstructons. 77

80 Safety and Securty Occupant safety For safety, make sure the hook 2 has attached to the rng 3 beyond the safety catch, as llustrated. Renstall cover 1 after removng the tether strap. Chld seat anchors LATCH-type Ths vehcle s equpped wth two LATCH- (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHldren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the nstallaton of a LATCH-type chld seat wth the matchng mountng fttngs. To fold anchors out The foldable LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushon and the backrest. 1 Anchors 2 Release button Grp nner sde of anchors 1 and fold forward untl they audbly lock n place. Install chld seat accordng to the manufacturer s nstructons. If a chld seat s not nstalled, the LATCH-type anchors can be folded back between the seat cushon and the backrest ( page 79). The chld seat must be frmly attached n the rght and left sde anchors 1. Wth a chld seat nstalled n the left rear seat, the seat belt for the center seat occuped by a passenger must operate freely. Gude seat belt between ts seat cushon mount and backrest mount along outsde of rght sde chld seat anchor. 78

81 Safety and Securty Occupant safety To fold anchors back Press down button 2 on each anchor and return anchor 1 to ts catch. Non-LATCH-type chld seats may also be used and can be nstalled usng the vehcle s seat belt system. Install chld seat accordng to the manufacturer s nstructons. Warnng! G Chldren too bg for a toddler restrant must rde n seats usng regular seat belts. Poston shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to acheve proper belt postonng for chldren from 41 lbs untl they reach a heght where a lap/shoulder belt fts properly wthout a booster. Before nstallng the chld seat, make sure anchors 1 are folded out and locked n place. Install chld seat accordng to manufacturer s nstructons. The chld seat must be frmly attached n the rght and left sde anchors 1. An ncorrectly mounted chld seat may come loose durng an accdent whch could result n serous njury or death to the chld. Damaged or mpact damaged chld seats or chld seat mountng fttngs must be replaced. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, even f the chldren are secured n a chld restrant system. 79

82 Safety and Securty Occupant safety Blockng of rear door wndow operaton You can block the rear door wndow operaton (for nstance when you have chldren rdng n the rear passenger compartment). The overrde swtch s located on the door control panel of the drver s door. 1 Deactvatng overrde swtch 2 Actvatng overrde swtch 3 Overrde swtch Actvatng overrde swtch Slde overrde swtch 3 to the rght. The rear door wndows can no longer be operated usng the respectve swtch located n the rear doors. Deactvatng overrde swtch Operaton of the rear door wndows wth the swtches located on the door control panel of the drver s door s stll possble. Slde overrde swtch 3 to the left. The rear door wndows can be operated agan usng the respectve swtch located n the rear doors. Warnng! G Actvate the overrde swtch when chldren are rdng n the back seats of the vehcle. The chldren may otherwse njure themselves, e.g. by becomng trapped n the wndow openng. When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment can cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. For more nformaton, see Power wndows ( page 241). 80

83 Panc alarm* An audble alarm and flashng exteror lamps wll operate for approxmately 2 1 / 2 mnutes. 1 Â button Canada only: Only vehcles equpped wth an ant-theft alarm system* have SmartKeys wth ntegrated panc button 1. Actvatng Press and hold button 1 for at least one second. Deactvatng or Press button 1 agan. Insert SmartKey n starter swtch. Safety and Securty Panc alarm* USA only: Ths devce comples wth Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause harmful nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. 81

84 Safety and Securty Panc alarm* Canada only: Ths devce comples wth RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton of the devce. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. 82

85 Drvng safety systems In ths secton you wll fnd nformaton on the followng drvng safety systems: ABS (Antlock Brake System) BAS (Brake Assst System) ESP (Electronc Stablty Program) 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronc Tracton System) In wnter operaton, the maxmum effectveness of the ABS, ESP, and 4MATIC (f so equpped) s only acheved wth wnter tres (M+S tres), or snow chans as requred. Warnng! The followng factors ncrease the rsk of accdents: G Excessve speed, especally n turns Wet and slppery road surfaces Followng another vehcle too closely The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC (f so equpped) cannot reduce ths rsk. Always adjust your drvng style to the prevalng road and weather condtons. ABS Warnng! Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems G Do not pump the brake pedal. Use frm, steady brake pedal pressure nstead. Pumpng the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and sgnfcantly reduces brakng effectveness. The Antlock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock durng brakng. Ths allows you to mantan the ablty to steer your vehcle. The ABS s functonal above a speed of approxmately 5 mph (8 km/h) ndependent of road surface condtons. On slppery road surfaces, the ABS wll respond even to lght brake pressure. The - ndcator lamp n the nstrument cluster ( page 24) comes on when you swtch on the gnton. It goes out when the engne s runnng. 83

86 Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems Brakng At the nstant one of the wheels s about to lock up, a slght pulsaton can be felt n the brake pedal, ndcatng that the ABS s n the regulatng mode. Keep frm and steady pressure on the brake pedal whle experencng the pulsaton. Contnuous steady brake pedal pressure yelds the advantages provded by the ABS, namely brakng power and ablty to steer the vehcle. The pulsatng brake pedal can be an ndcaton of hazardous road condtons and functons as a remnder to take extra care whle drvng. Emergency brake maneuver Keep contnuous full pressure on the brake pedal. Warnng! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physcs from actng on the vehcle, nor can t ncrease brakng or steerng effcency beyond that afforded by the condton of the vehcle brakes and tres or the tracton afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accdents, ncludng those resultng from excessve speed n turns, followng another vehcle too closely, or hydroplanng. Only a safe, attentve, and skllful drver can prevent accdents. The capabltes of an ABS equpped vehcle must never be exploted n a reckless or dangerous manner whch could jeopardze the user s safety or the safety of others. For more nformaton, see Practcal hnts ( page 344) and ( page 358). BAS The Brake Assst System (BAS) operates n emergency stuatons. If you apply the brakes very quckly, the BAS automatcally provdes full brake boost, thereby potentally reducng the brakng dstance. Apply contnuous full brakng pressure untl the emergency brakng stuaton s over. The ABS wll prevent the wheels from lockng. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes functon agan as normal. The BAS s then deactvated. Warnng! G If the BAS s malfunctonng, the brake system s stll functonng normally, but wthout the addtonal brake boost avalable that BAS would normally provde n an emergency brakng maneuver. Therefore, the brakng dstance may ncrease. 84

87 Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems Warnng! G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physcs from actng on the vehcle, nor can t ncrease brakng effcency beyond that afforded by the condton of the vehcle brakes and tres or the tracton afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accdents, ncludng those resultng from excessve speed n turns, followng another vehcle too closely, or hydroplanng. Only a safe, attentve, and skllful drver can prevent accdents. The capabltes of a BAS equpped vehcle must never be exploted n a reckless or dangerous manner whch could jeopardze the user s safety or the safety of others. For more nformaton, see Practcal hnts ( page 359). ESP The Electronc Stablty Program (ESP) s operatonal as soon as the engne s runnng and montors the vehcle s tracton (force of adhesve frcton between the tres and the road surface) and handlng. The ESP recognzes when a wheel s spnnng or f the vehcle starts to skd. By applyng brakes to the approprate wheel and by lmtng the engne output, the ESP works to stablze the vehcle. The ESP s especally useful whle drvng off and on wet or slppery road surfaces. The ESP also stablzes the vehcle durng brakng maneuvers. The ESP warnng lamp v n the speedometer flashes when the ESP s engaged. The ESP warnng lamp v n the speedometer comes on when you swtch on the gnton. It goes out when the engne s runnng. Warnng! G Never swtch off the ESP when you see the ESP warnng lamp v flashng n the speedometer. In ths case, proceed as follows: Whle drvng off, apply as lttle throttle as possble. Whle drvng, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and drvng style to the prevalng road condtons. Falure to observe these gudelnes could cause the vehcle to skd. The ESP cannot prevent accdents resultng from excessve speed. 85

88 Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems Warnng! G The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physcs from actng on the vehcle, nor can t ncrease the tracton afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accdents, ncludng those resultng from excessve speed n turns or hydroplanng. Only a safe, attentve, and skllful drver can prevent accdents. The capabltes of an ESP equpped vehcle must never be exploted n a reckless or dangerous manner whch could jeopardze the user s safety or the safety of others. The ESP wll only functon properly f you use wheels of the recommended tre sze ( page 424).! Vehcles wthout 4MATIC: Because of the ESP s automatc operaton, the engne must be shut off (SmartKey n starter swtch poston 0 or 1) when the parkng brake s beng tested on a brake test dynamometer the vehcle s beng towed wth the front axle rased Actve brakng acton through the ESP may otherwse serously damage the brake system. For nformaton on vehcles wth 4MATIC, see Four wheel electronc tracton system (4MATIC) wth the ESP ( page 88). For more nformaton, see Practcal hnts ( page 348) and ( page 360). Swtchng off the ESP To mprove the vehcle s tracton, turn off the ESP n drvng stuatons where t would be advantageous to have the drve wheels spn and thus cut nto surfaces for better grp such as: Warnng! startng out on slppery surfaces and n deep snow n conjuncton wth snow chans n sand or gravel G The ESP should not be swtched off durng normal drvng other than n the crcumstances descrbed below. Dsablng of the system wll reduce vehcle stablty n standard drvng maneuvers.! Turn on the ESP mmedately f the aforementoned crcumstances do not apply anymore. 86

89 Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems When you swtch off the ESP the ESP does not stablze the vehcle the engne output s not lmted, whch allows the drve wheels to spn and thus cut nto surfaces for better grp the tracton control wll stll brake a spnnng wheel the ESP contnues to operate when you are brakng When the ESP s swtched off and one or more drve wheels are spnnng, the ESP warnng lamp v n the speedometer flashes. However, the ESP wll then not stablze the vehcle. The swtch s located on the center console. 1 ESP swtch (off/on) Press swtch 1. The ESP warnng lamp v n the speedometer comes on. The ESP s deactvated. Warnng! G When the ESP warnng lamp v s llumnated contnuously, the ESP s swtched off. Adapt your speed and drvng to the prevalng road condtons and to the non-operatng status of the ESP.! Avod spnnng of a drve wheel for an extended perod wth the ESP swtched off. Ths may cause serous damage to the drvetran whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Swtchng on the ESP Press swtch 1 agan. The ESP warnng lamp v n the speedometer goes out. You are now agan n normal drvng mode wth the ESP swtched on. 87

90 Safety and Securty Drvng safety systems Four wheel electronc tracton system (4MATIC) wth the ESP Models wth all-wheel-drve only. The 4MATIC mproves vehcle s ablty to use avalable tracton, e.g. durng wnter operaton n mountans under snowy condtons, by applyng power to all four wheels. Warnng! G If you see the ESP warnng lamp v flashng n the speedometer, proceed as follows: Whle drvng off, apply as lttle throttle as possble Whle drvng, ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and drvng style to the prevalng road condtons Falure to observe these gudelnes could cause the vehcle to skd. The ESP cannot prevent accdents resultng from excessve speed.! Do not tow wth one axle rased. Otherwse the transfer case can be damaged, whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty.! Performance testng must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. Otherwse the transfer case can be damaged, whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty.! Because of the ESP s automatc operaton, the engne must be shut off (SmartKey n starter swtch poston 0 or 1) when the parkng brake s beng tested on a brake test dynamometer. Actve brakng acton through ESP may otherwse serously damage the front or rear axle brake system. Operatonal tests wth the engne runnng can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. At hghly demandng operatng condtons, the electronc tracton system may temporarly swtch off to prevent overheatng of the drve wheel brakes. The message unavalable See Operator s Manual wll then appear n the multfuncton dsplay whle the ESP warnng lamp v s flashng. The ESP s stll functonng normally. 88

91 Ant-theft systems Immoblzer The mmoblzer prevents unauthorzed persons from startng your vehcle. Actvatng Remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Deactvatng Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Startng the engne wll also deactvate the mmoblzer. In case the engne cannot be started (yet the vehcle s battery s charged), the system s not operatonal. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or call FOR-MERCedes (n the USA), or (n Canada). Ant-theft alarm system* Once the alarm system has been armed, a vsual and audble alarm s trggered when someone opens a door the trunk ld the hood The alarm system wll also be trggered when someone attempts to rase the vehcle ( page 91) openng the vehcle wth the mechancal key Safety and Securty Ant-theft systems The alarm wll stay on, even f the actvatng element (a door, for example) s mmedately closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center s ntated automatcally by the Tele Ad system* ( page 267) provded Tele Ad servce was subscrbed to and properly actvated, and that necessary cellular servce and GPS coverage are avalable. 89

92 Safety and Securty Ant-theft systems Armng the alarm system The ndcator lamp s n the swtch for the tow-away alarm* n the center console. 1 Indcator lamp Lock the vehcle wth the SmartKey. The turn sgnal lamps flash three tmes to ndcate that the alarm system s actvated. Indcator lamp 1 begns to flash after approxmately 30 seconds after armng the alarm system. If the turn sgnal lamps do not flash three tmes, one of the followng elements may not be properly closed: a door the trunk ld the hood Close the respectve element and lock the vehcle agan. Dsarmng the alarm system Unlock your vehcle wth the SmartKey. The turn sgnal lamps flash once to ndcate that the alarm system s deactvated. The alarm system wll rearm automatcally after approxmately 40 seconds f no door or the trunk ld was opened. Cancelng the alarm To cancel the alarm: Press the Πor button on the SmartKey. or Insert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. 90

93 Safety and Securty Ant-theft systems Tow-away alarm* Once the tow-away alarm s armed, a vsual and audble alarm wll be trggered when someone attempts to rase the vehcle. The tow-away protecton alarm s trggered, for example, f the vehcle s lfted on one sde. If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center s ntated automatcally by the Tele Ad system* ( page 267) provded Tele Ad servce was subscrbed to and properly actvated, and that necessary cellular servce and GPS coverage are avalable. Armng tow-away alarm Lock your vehcle wth the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm s automatcally armed after about 30 seconds. When you unlock your vehcle, the tow-away protecton dsarms automatcally. The tow-away alarm remans dsarmed untl you lock the vehcle agan. Dsarmng tow-away alarm To prevent trggerng the tow-away alarm, swtch off the tow-away alarm feature before towng the vehcle, or when parkng on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto tran. The swtch s located on the center console. 1 Tow-away alarm off swtch 2 Indcator lamp Swtch off gnton. You cannot dsarm the tow-away alarm whle the gnton s swtched on. 91

94 Safety and Securty Ant-theft systems Press swtch 1. Indcator lamp 2 n swtch comes on brefly. Ext and lock your vehcle wth the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm remans dsarmed untl you lock your vehcle agan. Cancelng the alarm To cancel the alarm: Press the Πor button on the SmartKey. or Insert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. 92

95 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Seats Memory functon* Lghtng Instrument cluster Control system Manual transmsson Automatc transmsson* Good vsblty Clmate control Automatc clmate control* Audo system Power wndows Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Drvng systems Loadng Useful features 93

96 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng In the Controls n detal secton you wll fnd detaled nformaton on how to operate the equpment nstalled on your vehcle. If you are already famlar wth the basc functons of your vehcle, ths secton wll be of partcular nterest to you. To quckly famlarze yourself wth the basc functons of the vehcle, refer to the Gettng started secton of ths manual. The correspondng page numbers are gven at the begnnng of each segment. For more nformaton on lockng and unlockng, see Gettng started ( page 32) and ( page 54). SmartKey Your vehcle comes suppled wth two SmartKeys, each wth remote control and a removable mechancal key. The lockng tabs for the mechancal key porton of the two SmartKeys are a dfferent color to help dstngush each SmartKey unt. The SmartKey provdes an extended operatng range. To prevent theft, however, t s advsable to only unlock the vehcle when you are n close proxmty to t. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: the doors the trunk the fuel fller flap SmartKey wth remote control 1 Lock button 2 Š Openng button for the trunk ld 3 Mechancal key lockng tab 4 Œ Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6  Panc button* ( page 81). Canada only: Only vehcles equpped wth an ant-theft alarm system* have SmartKeys wth ntegrated panc button 6. 94

97 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. It s possble for chldren to open a locked door from the nsde, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous njury.! To prevent possble malfuncton, avod exposng the SmartKey to hgh levels of electromagnetc radaton. USA only: Ths devce comples wth Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause harmful nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. Canada only: Ths devce comples wth RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton of the devce. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. You can also open and close the power wndows ( page 243) and power tlt/sldng sunroof* ( page 247) from outsde usng the SmartKey. 95

98 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Factory settng Global unlockng Press button Œ. All turn sgnal lamps flash once. The lockng knobs n the doors move up. The ant-theft alarm system* s dsarmed. The vehcle wll lock agan automatcally and reactvate the ant-theft alarm system* wthn approxmately 40 seconds of unlockng f: nether door nor trunk s opened the SmartKey s not nserted n the starter swtch the central lockng swtch s not actvated Global lockng Press button. All turn sgnal lamps flash three tmes. The lockng knobs n the doors move down. The ant-theft alarm system* s armed. Selectve settng If you frequently travel alone, you may wsh to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressng Œ only unlocks the drver s door and the fuel fller flap. Press and hold buttons Œ and smultaneously for about fve seconds untl battery check lamp 5 flashes twce. The SmartKey wll then functon as follows: Unlockng drver s door and fuel fller flap Press button Œ once. All turn sgnal lamps flash once. The lockng knob n the drver s door moves up. The ant-theft alarm system* s dsarmed. Global unlockng Press button Œ twce. All turn sgnal lamps flash once. The lockng knobs n the doors move up. The ant-theft alarm system* s dsarmed. 96

99 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Global lockng Press button. All turn sgnal lamps flash three tmes. The lockng knobs n the doors move down. The ant-theft alarm system* s armed. Restorng to factory settng Press and hold buttons Œ and smultaneously for about sx seconds untl battery check lamp 5 flashes twce.! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehcle wth the SmartKey, then ether the batteres n the SmartKey are dscharged, the SmartKey s malfunctonng or the vehcle battery s draned. Check the batteres n the SmartKey ( page 97) and replace them f necessary ( page 389). Use the mechancal key to unlock the drver s door ( page 383) and the trunk ld ( page 384). Use the mechancal key to lock the drver s door ( page 384). Have the vehcle battery and the battery connectons checked ( page 404). If the SmartKey s malfunctonng, contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Checkng the batteres Press button or Œ. Battery check lamp 5 comes on brefly to ndcate that the SmartKey batteres are n order. If battery check lamp 5 does not come on brefly durng check, then the SmartKey batteres are dscharged. Replace the batteres ( page 389). You can obtan the requred batteres at any authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. If the batteres are checked wthn sgnal range of the vehcle, pressng the or Œ button wll lock or unlock the vehcle accordngly. 97

100 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Unlockng and openng the trunk ld You can unlock and open the trunk separately. A mnmum heght clearance of 5.71 ft (1.74 m) s requred to open the trunk ld. Press button Š untl trunk ld unlocks and begns to open.! The trunk ld swngs open upwards automatcally. Always make sure there s suffcent overhead clearance. Loss of SmartKey or mechancal key If you lose a SmartKey or mechancal key, you should do the followng: Have the SmartKey deactvated by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechancal key mmedately to your car nsurance company. If necessary, have the mechancal lock replaced. Your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll be glad to supply you wth a replacement. Openng the doors from the nsde You can open a locked door from the nsde. Open door only when condtons are safe to do so. 1 Lockng knob 2 Insde door handle 98

101 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng If the vehcle has prevously been locked from the outsde wth the SmartKey, openng a door from the nsde wll trgger the ant-theft alarm system*. To cancel the alarm, do one of the followng: Press button Πor on the SmartKey. Insert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. Front doors Pull on door handle 2 on the respectve front door to open door. If door was locked, lockng knob 1 wll move up. Rear doors Pull up lockng knob 1 on the respectve rear door to unlock door. Pull on door handle 2 on the respectve rear door to open door. Openng the trunk Openng the trunk from the outsde A mnmum heght clearance of 5.71 ft (1.74 m) s requred to open the trunk ld. The handle s located above the rear lcense plate recess. 1 Handle 99

102 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng The vehcle must be unlocked. Pull on handle 1. The trunk ld unlocks and begns to open.! The trunk ld swngs open upwards automatcally. Always make sure there s suffcent overhead clearance. Openng the trunk from the nsde You can open the trunk from the nsde f the vehcle s statonary. A mnmum heght clearance of 5.71 ft (1.74 m) s requred to open the trunk ld. The remote trunk ld swtch s located on the drver s door. Press remote trunk ld swtch 1 untl the trunk begns to open. The ndcator lamp n the swtch remans lt as long as the trunk s open.! The trunk ld swngs open upwards automatcally. Always make sure there s suffcent overhead clearance. The trunk can also be opened usng button Š on the SmartKey or from ts nsde n an emergency, see Trunk ld emergency release ( page 102). The trunk can also be opened usng button Š on the SmartKey or from ts nsde n an emergency, see Trunk ld emergency release ( page 102). 1 Remote trunk ld swtch wth ndcator lamp 100

103 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Closng the trunk Dependng on producton date, your vehcle s equpped wth ether trunk desgn A or B. Trunk desgn A 1 Handle Lower trunk ld by pullng frmly on handle 1. Close trunk ld wth hands placed flat on the trunk ld. Trunk desgn B 1 Handle 2 Handles Lower trunk ld by pullng frmly on handle 1 or handles 2. Close trunk ld wth hands placed flat on the trunk ld. Warnng! G To prevent possble personal njury, always keep hands and fngers away from the trunk openng when closng the trunk. Be especally careful when small chldren are around. When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Warnng! G Only drve wth the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as vsblty blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehcle nteror. 101

104 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Do not place the SmartKey n the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. If the vehcle was prevously centrally locked, the trunk ld wll lock automatcally after closng t. The turn sgnals wll flash three tmes to confrm lockng. Trunk ld emergency release The emergency release button s located on the nsde of the trunk ld. 1 Emergency release button Brefly press emergency release button 1. The trunk ld unlocks and the trunk ld opens.! The trunk ld swngs open upwards automatcally. Illumnaton of the emergency release button: The button wll flash for 30 mnutes after openng the trunk. The button wll flash for 60 mnutes after closng the trunk. The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk whle the vehcle s standng stll or n moton. The emergency release button does not open the trunk ld f the vehcle battery s dscharged or dsconnected. 102

105 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng If the vehcle has prevously been locked from the outsde wth the SmartKey, openng the trunk from the nsde usng the emergency release button wll trgger the ant-theft alarm system*. To cancel the alarm, do one of the followng: Press button Πor on the SmartKey. Insert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. Automatc central lockng The doors and the trunk automatcally lock when the gnton s swtched on and the wheels are turnng at vehcle speeds of approxmately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You can open a locked door from the nsde. Open door only when condtons are safe to do so. The doors unlock automatcally after an accdent f the force of the mpact exceeds a preset threshold. To prevent the vehcle door locks from lockng, deactvate the automatc central lockng when the vehcle s pushed or towed s on a test stand You can deactvate the automatc lockng mode usng the control system, see Settng automatc lockng ( page 153). 103

106 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng Lockng and unlockng from the nsde You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from nsde usng the central lockng or unlockng swtch. Ths can be useful, for example, f you want to lock the vehcle before startng to drve. You cannot lock or unlock the fuel fller flap wth the central lockng or unlockng swtch. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Dependng on producton date, your vehcle s equpped wth ether swtch desgn A or B. The swtches are located n the center console. Swtch desgn A 1 Central lockng swtch 2 Central unlockng swtch Swtch desgn B 1 Central lockng swtch 2 Central unlockng swtch 104

107 Controls n detal Lockng and unlockng You can open a locked door from the nsde. Open door only when condtons are safe to do so. If the vehcle was prevously centrally locked usng the SmartKey, t wll not unlock usng the central unlockng swtch 2. If the vehcle was prevously locked wth the central lockng swtch 1 whle n the selectve remote control mode, only the door opened from the nsde s unlocked. whle n the global remote control mode, the complete vehcle s unlocked when a door s opened from the nsde. Lockng Press central lockng swtch 1. If all doors are closed, the vehcle locks. Unlockng Press central unlockng swtch 2. The vehcle unlocks. 105

108 Controls n detal Seats For nformaton on seat adjustment, see Adjustng ( page 35). Easy-entry/ext feature* Ths feature allows for easer entry nto and ext from the vehcle. The easy-entry/ext feature can be actvated or deactvated n the Convenence submenu of the control system ( page 154). Warnng! G You must make sure no one can become trapped or njured by the movng steerng wheel and drver s seat when the easy-entry/ext feature s actvated. To cancel seat/steerng wheel movement, do one of the followng: Press seat adjustment swtch* ( page 30). Move steerng column stalk* ( page 40). Press memory poston swtch* ( page 115). Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could open the drver s door and unntentonally actvate the easy-entry/ext feature, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous personal njury. When extng the vehcle, wth the easy-entry/ext feature actvated and dependng on your selecton, the steerng wheel tlts upwards and/or the drver s seat moves a few nches to the rear when you: remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, or open the drver s door wth the SmartKey n starter swtch poston 0 or 1. If the current poston for the steerng wheel s n the uppermost tlt poston, the steerng wheel wll no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/ext feature s actvated. 106

109 Controls n detal Seats When enterng the vehcle, wth the easy-entry/ext feature actvated, the steerng wheel or, dependng on your selecton, the steerng wheel and drver s seat wll return to ther last set poston or a factory-set maxmum forward poston when you: If the current seat poston falls nto a factory-set poston range and the system recognzes the current seat poston to be rearward enough for easy entry and ext, the drver s seat wll not move to the rear when the easy-entry/ext feature s actvated. close the drver s door wth the gnton swtched on nsert the SmartKey nto the starter swtch wth the drver s door closed. For safety reasons, the drver s seat wll not return to ts last set poston wth the easy-entry/ext feature actvated f the system recognzes the last set poston as an extreme forward poston. Instead, the drver s seat wll reman at or move to a factory-set maxmum forward poston. To agan fully return the drver s seat to your last set poston or to memory poston, adjust the seat to the desred poston or press and hold the respectve memory poston swtch* ( page 115). Removng and nstallng front seat head restrants For nformaton on head restrant adjustment, see Seats ( page 35). Adjust the head restrant n such a way that t s as close to the head as possble. Warnng! G For your protecton, drve only wth properly postoned head restrants. Adjust head restrant so that the center of the head restrant supports the back of the head at eye level. Ths wll reduce the potental for njury to the head and neck n the event of an accdent or smlar stuaton. 107

110 Controls n detal Seats Do not drve the vehcle wthout the seat head restrants. Head restrants are ntended to help reduce njures durng an accdent. Do not nterchange head restrants from front and rear seat. Tlt the backrest to the rear for easer removal and nstallaton of the head restrants. Front seat head restrants, manual seat 1 Release button Removng front seat head restrants Pull head restrant to ts hghest poston. Push release button 1 and pull out head restrant. Installng front seat head restrants Insert head restrant and push t down untl t engages. Push release button 1 and adjust head restrant to desred poston. Front seat head restrants, power seat* 1 Head restrant swtch Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Removng front seat head restrants Press swtch 1 upwards and hold untl head restrant s fully extended. Pull out head restrant. 108

111 Controls n detal Seats Installng front seat head restrants Press swtch 1 upwards and hold for about fve seconds. Push head restrant down untl t engages. Adjust head restrant to desred poston ( page 38). Rear seat head restrants Warnng! G For safety reasons, always drve wth the rear head restrants n the uprght poston when the rear seats are occuped. Keep the area around head restrants clear of artcles (e.g. clothng) to not obstruct the foldng operaton of the head restrants. Head restrant heght (rear outer seats) 1 Release button Rasng: Manually adjust the heght of the head restrant by pullng t upward. If the head restrant s fully retracted, push release button 1 and pull the head restrant out. Lowerng: To lower the head restrant, push release button 1 and push down on the head restrant. Adjust the head restrant n such a way that t s as close to the head as possble. Warnng! G For your protecton, drve only wth properly postoned head restrants. Adjust head restrant so that the center of the head restrant supports the back of the head at eye level. Ths wll reduce the potental for njury to the head and neck n the event of an accdent or smlar stuaton. Do not drve the vehcle wthout the seat head restrants. Head restrants are ntended to help reduce njures durng an accdent. 109

112 Controls n detal Seats Foldng head restrants back wth release button The rear seat head restrants can be folded backward for ncreased vsblty. Foldng head restrants back wth swtch n the center console (rear outer seats) Placng head restrants uprght 1 Release button Push release button 1. The head restrant wll fold backward. You can also fold the rear outer seat head restrants back usng the swtch n the center console ( page 110). 1 Swtch for rear seat head restrants Start the engne ( page 46). Press swtch 1. The rear seat head restrants wll fold backward. Pull the head restrant forward untl t locks nto poston. Warnng! G Make sure the head restrants engage when placng them uprght. Otherwse ther protectve functon cannot be assured. 110

113 Controls n detal Seats Head restrant tlt (rear outer seats) Two dfferent head restrant angle postons are avalable: Press the release button ( page 110) and tlt the head restrant to the desred poston. Removng and nstallng rear seat head restrants (rear outer seats) Adjust the head restrant n such a way that t s as close to the head as possble. The rear center seat head restrant cannot be removed. Warnng! G For your protecton, drve only wth properly postoned head restrants. Adjust head restrant so that the center of the head restrant supports the back of the head at eye level. Ths wll reduce the potental for njury to the head and neck n the event of an accdent or smlar stuaton. Do not drve the vehcle wthout the seat head restrants. Head restrants are ntended to help reduce njures durng an accdent. Do not nterchange head restrants from front and rear seat. 1 Release button Removng rear seat head restrants Fold back head restrant ( page 110). Pull head restrant to ts hghest poston. Push release button 1 and pull out head restrant. Installng rear seat head restrants Insert head restrant and push t down untl t engages. Push button 1 and adjust head restrant to desred poston. 111

114 Controls n detal Seats Multcontour seats* Ths multcontour seat has a movable seat cushon and nflatable ar cushons bult nto the backrest to provde addtonal lumbar and sde support. The seat cushon movement, backrest cushon heght and curvature can be contnuously vared wth swtches on the sde of the seat after swtchng on gnton. 1 Seat cushon depth 2 Backrest bottom 3 Backrest center 4 Backrest sde bolster adjustment Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Seat cushon depth Adjust the seat cushon depth to the length of your upper leg usng swtch 1. Backrest contour Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desred poston usng swtches 2 and 3. Backrest sde bolsters Adjust the backrest sde bolsters so that they provde good lateral support usng swtch

115 Controls n detal Seats Seat heatng* The swtches for the front seats are located n the center console. 1 Seat heatng swtch 2 Indcator lamps The red ndcator lamps 2 n the swtch show the heatng level selected. Level 3 Three ndcator lamps on. After approxmately fve mnutes, seat heatng s automatcally swtched to level 2. 2 Two ndcator lamps on. After approxmately ten mnutes, seat heatng s automatcally swtched to level 1. 1 One ndcator lamp on. After approxmately 20 mnutes, seat heatng s automatcally swtched off. off No ndcator lamp on. Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Swtchng on seat heatng Press swtch 1 twce. Three red ndcator lamps 2 n the swtch come on. Contnue pressng swtch 1 untl desred seat heatng level s reached. Swtchng off seat heatng Press swtch 1 repeatedly untl all ndcator lamps 2 go out. If one or all of the ndcator lamps 2 on the seat heatng swtch are flashng, there s nsuffcent voltage due to too many electrcal consumers are turned on. The seat heatng swtches off automatcally. The seat heatng wll swtch back on agan automatcally as soon as suffcent voltage s avalable. 113

116 Controls n detal Memory functon*! Pror to operatng the vehcle, the drver should check and adjust the seat heght, seat poston fore and aft, and seat backrest angle f necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restrant should also be adjusted for proper heght. See also the secton on ar bags ( page 59) for proper seat postonng. In addton, adjust the steerng wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operaton and comfort. Both the nteror and exteror rear vew mrrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vson. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chldren should be seated n a properly secured restrant system that comples wth U.S. Federal Motor Vehcle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadan Motor Vehcle Safety Standards 213 and You can store up to three dfferent settngs for each SmartKey. The followng settngs are stored when usng the buttons on the drver s door: Drver s seat, backrest and head restrant poston Steerng wheel poston Exteror rear vew mrror postons These key-dependent memory settngs can be deactvated f desred. For nformaton on key-dependent memory settngs, see Settng key-dependency ( page 155). The followng settngs are not key-dependent. They are stored when usng the buttons on the front passenger door: Front passenger seat, backrest and head restrant poston Warnng! G Do not actvate the memory functon whle drvng. Actvatng the memory functon whle drvng could cause the drver to lose control of the vehcle. 114

117 Controls n detal Memory functon* The memory button and memory poston swtch are located on the door. 1 Memory button 2 Memory poston swtch Swtch on gnton ( page 33). or Open the respectve door and nsert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. Storng postons nto memory Adjust the seat, steerng wheel and exteror rear vew mrrors to the desred poston ( page 35). Turn memory poston swtch 2 to the selected memory poston. Press memory button 1. Release memory button 1 and press memory poston swtch 2 wthn three seconds. All settngs are stored to the selected poston. Recallng postons from memory! Do not operate the power seats usng the memory button f the seat backrest s n an excessvely reclned poston. Dong so could cause damage to front or rear seats. Turn memory poston swtch 2 to the selected memory poston. Press and hold memory poston swtch 2 untl the seat, steerng wheel and exteror rear vew mrrors have completely moved to the stored postons. Releasng the memory poston swtch stops movement to the stored postons mmedately. 115

118 Controls n detal Memory functon* Storng exteror rear vew mrror parkng poston For easer parkng, you can adjust the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror so that you can see the rght rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. For nformaton on actvatng the parkng poston feature, see Actvatng exteror rear vew mrror parkng poston* ( page 174). You can store a parkng poston for the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror for each SmartKey. 1 Memory button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror button Stop the vehcle. Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Press button 3. The passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror s selected. Adjust the exteror rear vew mrror wth button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. Press memory button 1. Wthn three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 2. The parkng poston s stored f the mrror does not move. If the mrror does move, repeat the above steps. After the settng s stored, you can move the mrror agan. 116

119 Lghtng For nformaton on how to swtch on the headlamps and use the turn sgnals, see Swtchng on headlamps ( page 49) and Turn sgnals ( page 50). If you drve n countres where vehcles drve on the other sde of the road than the country where the vehcle s regstered, you must have the headlamps modfed for symmetrcal low beams. Relevant nformaton can be obtaned at your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Exteror lamp swtch The exteror lamp swtch s located on the dashboard to the left of the steerng wheel. Exteror lamp swtch M U C B ˆ Controls n detal Off Daytme runnng lamp mode ( page 119) Automatc headlamp mode Daytme runnng lamp mode ( page 119) Lghtng Parkng lamps (also tal lamps, lcense plate lamps, sde marker lamps, nstrument panel lamps) Low beam headlamps (or hgh beam headlamps when the combnaton swtch s pushed forward) and parkng lamps Standng lamps, rght (turn left one stop) Standng lamps, left (turn left two stops) Indcator lamp for front fog lamps Indcator lamp for rear fog lamp 117

120 Controls n detal Lghtng Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parkng lamps can be swtched on and off wth the exteror lamp swtch. Automatc headlamp mode The followng lamps swtch on and off automatcally dependng on the brghtness of the ambent lght: Wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch and the drver s door open, a warnng sounds f the parkng lamps or low beam headlamps are swtched on. The message Swtch off lghts. appears n the multfuncton dsplay Low beam headlamps Tal and parkng lamps Lcense plate lamps Sde marker lamps Warnng! G If the exteror lamp swtch s set to U, the headlamps may swtch off unexpectedly when the system senses brght ambent lght, for example lght from oncomng traffc. the headlamps wll not be automatcally swtched on under foggy condtons. To mnmze rsk to you and to others, actvate headlamps by turnng exteror lamp swtch to B when drvng or when traffc and/or ambent lghtng condtons requre you to do so. In low ambent lghtng condtons, only swtch from poston U to B wth the vehcle at a standstll. Swtchng from U to B wll brefly swtch off the headlamps. Dong so whle drvng n low ambent lghtng condtons may result n an accdent. The automatc headlamp feature s only an ad to the drver. The drver s responsble for the operaton of the vehcle s lghts at all tmes. Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston U. Wth the SmartKey n starter swtch poston 1, only the parkng lamps wll swtch on and off automatcally. When the engne s runnng, the low beam headlamps, the tal and parkng lamps, the lcense plate lamps, and the sde marker lamps wll swtch on and off automatcally. 118

121 Controls n detal Lghtng Daytme runnng lamp mode Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston M or U. When the engne s runnng, the low beam headlamps are swtched on. In low ambent lght condtons, the followng lamps wll swtch on addtonally: Tal and parkng lamps Lcense plate lamps Sde marker lamps For nghttme drvng you should turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston B to permt actvaton of the hgh beam headlamps. Wth the daytme runnng lamp mode actvated and the exteror lamp swtch n poston M, the hgh beam headlamps cannot be swtched on. The hgh beam flasher s avalable at all tmes. Canada only: The daytme runnng lamp mode s mandatory and therefore n a constant mode. Vehcles wth automatc transmsson*: When the engne s runnng, and you shft from a drvng poston to poston N or P, the low beam headlamps wll swtch off wth a three-mnute delay. When the engne s runnng, and you turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston C, the parkng lamps swtch on addtonally. turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston B, the manual headlamp mode has prorty over the daytme runnng lamp mode. The correspondng exteror lamps swtch on ( page 117). USA only: By default, the daytme runnng lamp mode s deactvated. Actvate the daytme runnng lamp mode usng the control system, see Settng daytme runnng lamp mode (USA only) ( page 150). When the engne s runnng, and you turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston C or B, the manual headlamp mode has prorty over the daytme runnng lamp mode. The correspondng exteror lamps swtch on ( page 117). 119

122 Controls n detal Lghtng Locator lghtng and nght securty llumnaton The locator lghtng and the nght securty llumnaton are descrbed n the Control system secton, see Settng locator lghtng ( page 151) and Settng nght securty llumnaton ( page 151). Fog lamps Warnng! G In low ambent lghtng or foggy condtons, only swtch from poston U to B wth the vehcle at a standstll. Swtchng from U to B wll brefly swtch off the headlamps. Dong so whle drvng n low ambent lghtng condtons may result n an accdent. Fog lamps wll operate wth the parkng lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used n conjuncton wth low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Provnce Motor Vehcle Regulatons regardng permssble lamp operaton. Fog lamps cannot be swtched on wth the exteror lamp swtch n poston U. For swtchng on the fog lamps, turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston B frst. Front fog lamps Swtch on the low beam headlamps ( page 117). Pull out the exteror lamp swtch to frst stop. The front fog lamps swtch on. The green ndcator lamp n the exteror lamp swtch comes on ( page 117). Push n the exteror lamp swtch. The front fog lamps swtch off. The green ndcator lamp n the exteror lamp swtch goes out. 120

123 Controls n detal Lghtng Rear fog lamp (drver s sde only) Swtch on the front fog lamps ( page 120). Pull out the exteror lamp swtch to second stop. The rear fog lamp swtches on. The yellow ndcator lamp n the exteror lamp swtch comes on ( page 117). Push n the exteror lamp swtch to frst stop. The rear fog lamp swtches off. The yellow ndcator lamp n the exteror lamp swtch goes out. The front fog lamps reman lt. Combnaton swtch The combnaton swtch s located on the left of the steerng column. Combnaton swtch 1 Hgh beam 2 Hgh beam flasher Hgh beam Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston B or U ( page 117). Push the combnaton swtch n drecton of arrow 1 to swtch on the hgh beam. The hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp A n the nstrument cluster comes on ( page 24). Pull the combnaton swtch n drecton of arrow 2 to ts orgnal poston to swtch off the hgh beam. The hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp A n the nstrument cluster goes out. Hgh beam flasher Pull the combnaton swtch brefly n drecton of arrow

124 Controls n detal Lghtng Cornerng fog lamps* (All models wth B-Xenon* headlamps, except C 230 Kompressor Sport and C320Sport) The cornerng fog lamps mprove llumnaton of the road nto whch you are turnng. Cornerng fog lamps wll operate wth the engne runnng and wth the exteror lamp swtch n poston B ( page 117) or the exteror lamp swtch n poston U ( page 117) or the daytme runnng lamp mode actvated ( page 119) Cornerng fog lamps wll only come on n low ambent lghtng condtons. The cornerng fog lamps functon s not avalable at a vehcle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). Drvng forward Swtchng on cornerng fog lamps Dependng on whether you are turnng left or rght, swtch on the left or rght turn sgnal ( page 50). The respectve front fog lamp comes on and llumnates the road nto whch you are turnng. The cornerng fog lamps wll come on automatcally dependng on the steerng angle, even f you dd not swtch on ether turn sgnal. If the cornerng fog lamps came on automatcally, they wll also go out automatcally dependng on the steerng angle. Swtchng off cornerng fog lamps The combnaton swtch for the turn sgnal resets automatcally after major steerng wheel movements. Ths wll swtch off the cornerng fog lamps f they were actvated by swtchng on the left or rght turn sgnal. If the turn sgnal should stay on after makng the turn, the turn sgnal and cornerng fog lamp can be swtched off by returnng the combnaton swtch to ts orgnal poston. 122

125 Controls n detal Lghtng Drvng rearward Swtchng on cornerng fog lamps Place the gear selector lever (manual transmsson: gearshft lever) n poston R. The nverse front fog lamp comes on automatcally dependng on the steerng drecton and steerng angle. Swtchng off cornerng fog lamps Place the gear selector lever (manual transmsson: gearshft lever) out of poston R. The respectve front fog lamp goes out. Hazard warnng flasher The hazard warnng flasher can be swtched on at all tmes, even wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch. The hazard warnng flasher swtches on automatcally when an ar bag deploys. The hazard warnng flasher swtch s located on the upper part of the center console. 1 Hazard warnng flasher swtch Swtchng on hazard warnng flasher Press hazard warnng flasher swtch 1. All turn sgnals are flashng. Wth the hazard warnng flasher actvated and the combnaton swtch set for ether left or rght turn, only the respectve turn sgnals wll operate when the gnton s swtched on. Swtchng off hazard warnng flasher Press hazard warnng flasher swtch 1 agan. If the hazard warnng flasher has been actvated automatcally, press hazard warnng flasher swtch 1 once to swtch t off. 123

126 Controls n detal Lghtng Interor lghtng The controls are located n the overhead control panel. 1 Rear nteror lghts 2 Rght front readng lamp 3 Rocker swtch for automatc control system 4 Left front readng lamp Actvatng automatc control Press rocker swtch 3 to center poston. Interor lamps are swtched on n darkness, even when you: unlock the vehcle open a door remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch The nteror lamps are swtched off after a preset tme, see Settng nteror lghtng delayed shut-off ( page 153). If the door remans open, the nteror lamps swtch off automatcally after approxmately fve mnutes, when the SmartKey s removed or n starter swtch poston 0. An nteror lamp swtched on manually does not go out automatcally. Deactvatng automatc control Press the = symbol on rocker swtch 3. The nteror lghtng remans swtched off, even when you: unlock the vehcle open a door remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch Manual control Swtchng all front nteror lghts on and off Press the W symbol on rocker swtch 3. The front nteror lghts come on. Press rocker swtch 3 to center poston to actvate the automatc control. 124

127 Controls n detal Lghtng Swtchng rear nteror lghts on and off Press button V. The lghts n the rear passenger compartment come on. Press button V agan. The lghts n the rear passenger compartment go out. Swtchng rght front readng lamp on and off Press rght button X. The rght readng lamp comes on. Press rght button X agan. The rght readng lamp goes out. Swtchng left front readng lamp on and off Press left button X. The left readng lamp comes on. Press left button X agan. The left readng lamp goes out. Door entry lamps The approprate door entry lamp swtches on f a door s opened n darkness and f the nteror lghtng s swtched to automatc functon. The entry lamp swtches off automatcally when the door s closed. If you turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0 and swtch off the exteror headlamps, the door entry lamps wll reman lt for approxmately fve mnutes. Trunk lamp The trunk lamp swtches on f the trunk ld s opened. If you leave the trunk open for an extended perod of tme, the trunk lamp wll swtch off automatcally after approxmately ten mnutes. 125

128 Controls n detal Instrument cluster For a full vew llustraton of the nstrument cluster, see At a glance ( page 24). 1 Reset button The nstrument cluster s actvated when you open a door swtch on gnton press reset button 1 swtch on the exteror lamps You can change the nstrument cluster settngs n the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system ( page 143). Instrument cluster llumnaton Use reset button 1 to adjust the llumnaton brghtness for the nstrument cluster. The nstrument cluster llumnaton s dmmed or brghtened automatcally to sut ambent lght condtons. The nstrument cluster llumnaton wll also be adjusted automatcally when you swtch on the vehcle s exteror lamps. To brghten llumnaton Turn reset button 1 clockwse. The nstrument cluster llumnaton wll brghten. To dm llumnaton Turn reset button 1 counterclockwse. The nstrument cluster llumnaton wll dm. 126

129 Controls n detal Instrument cluster Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge s on the left sde n the nstrument cluster ( page 24). Warnng! G Drvng when your engne s badly overheated can cause some fluds whch may have leaked nto the engne compartment to catch fre. You could be serously burned. Steam from an overheated engne can cause serous burns and can occur just by openng the hood. Stay away from the engne f you see or hear steam comng from t. Turn off the engne, get out of the vehcle and do not stand near the vehcle untl the engne has cooled down. Durng severe operatng condtons, e.g. stop-and-go traffc, the coolant temperature may rse close to 248 F (120 C). The engne should not be operated wth the coolant temperature above 248 F (120 C). Dong so may cause serous engne damage whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Trp odometer Make sure you are vewng the trp odometer and man odometer n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 129). If t s not dsplayed, press button è or ÿ on the multfuncton steerng wheel ( page 130) untl the trp odometer appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press and hold the reset button n the nstrument cluster ( page 126) untl the trp odometer s reset. 127

130 Controls n detal Instrument cluster Tachometer The red markng on the tachometer ( page 24) denotes excessve engne speed.! Avod drvng at excessve engne speeds, as t may result n serous engne damage that s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. To help protect the engne, the fuel supply s nterrupted f the engne s operated wthn the red markng. Outsde temperature ndcator Warnng! G The outsde temperature ndcator s not desgned to serve as an ce-warnng devce and s therefore unsutable for that purpose. Indcated temperatures just above the freezng pont do not guarantee that the road surface s free of ce. The road may stll be cy, especally n wooded areas or on brdges. The outsde temperature s ndcated n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 129). For nformaton on how to select the unt of the ndcated temperature,.e. degrees Celsus ( C) or degrees Fahrenhet ( F), see Selectng temperature dsplay mode ( page 143). The temperature sensor s located n the front bumper area. Due to ts locaton, the sensor can be affected by road or engne heat durng dlng or slow drvng. Ths means that the accuracy of the dsplayed temperature can only be verfed by comparson to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparson to external dsplays (e.g. bank sgns, etc.). When movng the vehcle nto colder ambent temperatures (e.g. when leavng your garage), you wll notce a delay before the lower temperature s dsplayed. A delay also occurs when ambent temperatures rse. Ths prevents naccurate temperature ndcatons caused by heat radated from the engne durng dlng or slow drvng. 128

131 Control system The control system s actvated as soon as the SmartKey n the starter swtch s turned to poston 1. The control system enables you to call up nformaton about your vehcle change vehcle settngs For example, you can use the control system to fnd out when your vehcle s next due for servce, to set the language for messages n the nstrument cluster dsplay, and much more. The dsplays for the audo systems (rado, CD player) wll appear n Englsh, regardless of the language selected. Warnng! G A drver s attenton to the road and traffc condtons must always be hs/her prmary focus when drvng. For your safety and the safety of others, selectng features through the multfuncton steerng wheel should only be done by the drver when traffc and road condtons permt t to be done safely. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. The control system relays nformaton to the multfuncton dsplay. Multfuncton dsplay Controls n detal Control system 1 Trp odometer 2 Man odometer 3 Current program mode 4 Current gear selector lever poston/gear range 5 Dgtal clock 6 Status ndcator (outsde temperature/dgtal speedometer) 129

132 Controls n detal Control system Multfuncton steerng wheel The dsplays n the multfuncton dsplay and the settngs n the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multfuncton steerng wheel. 1 Multfuncton dsplay Operatng the control system 2 Selectng the submenu or settng the volume: Press button æ up/to ncrease ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call t to end a call 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for prevous menu 5 Movng wthn a menu: Press button j for next dsplay k for prevous dsplay Pressng any of the buttons on the multfuncton steerng wheel wll alter what s shown n the multfuncton dsplay. The nformaton avalable n the multfuncton dsplay s arranged n menus, each contanng a number of functons or submenus. The ndvdual functons are then found wthn the relevant menu (rado or CD operatons under AUDIO, for example). These functons serve to call up relevant nformaton or to customze the settngs for your vehcle. C 230 Kompressor Sport, and C320Sport: Steerng wheel n these vehcles wll vary from steerng wheel shown. However, multfuncton steerng wheel symbols and feature descrpton apply to Sport models as well. 130

133 Controls n detal Control system It s helpful to thnk of the menus, and the functons wthn each menu, as beng arranged n a crcular pattern. If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you wll pass through each menu one after the other. If you press button k or j repeatedly, you wll pass through each functon dsplay, one after the other, n the current menu. In the Settngs menu, nstead of functons you wll fnd a number of submenus for callng up and changng settngs. For nstructons on usng these submenus, see Submenus n the Settngs menu ( page 141). The number of menus avalable n the system depends on whch optonal equpment s nstalled n your vehcle. The menus are descrbed on the followng pages. 131

134 Controls n detal Control system Menus Ths s what you wll see when you scroll through the menus. The table on the next page provdes an overvew of the ndvdual menus. 132

135 Controls n detal Control system Menus, submenus and functons Commands/submenus Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Standard dsplay AUDIO NAV* Vehcle status Settngs Trp computer Telephone* message memory ( page 134) ( page 135) ( page 138) ( page 138) ( page 140) ( page 156) ( page 158) Dgtal speedometer or outsde temperature Call up mantenance servce dsplay Check engne ol level Select rado staton Select satellte rado staton* (USA only) Operate the CD player* Actvate route gudance Call up vehcle malfuncton, warnng and system status messages stored n memory Reset to factory settngs Instrument cluster submenu Tme/Date submenu Lghtng submenu Vehcle submenu Convenence submenu Fuel consumpton statstcs after start Fuel consumpton statstcs snce the last reset Call up range Load phone book Search for name n phone book 133

136 Controls n detal Control system The headngs used n the menus table are desgned to facltate navgaton wthn the system and are not necessarly dentcal to those shown n the control system dsplays. The frst functon dsplayed n each menu wll automatcally show you Standard dsplay menu In the standard dsplay, the man odometer and the trp odometer are shown n the multfuncton dsplay. 1 Trp odometer 2 Man odometer If you see another dsplay, press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the standard dsplay appears. You can select the functons n the standard dsplay menu wth button k or j. The followng functons are avalable: whch part of the system you are n. Functon Page Dsplay dgtal speedometer or 135 outsde temperature Callng up mantenance servce 334 dsplay Checkng engne ol level

137 Controls n detal Control system Dsplay dgtal speedometer or outsde temperature Press button j or k repeatedly untl the dgtal speedometer appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The current vehcle speed s shown n the multfuncton dsplay. You can have the outsde temperature dsplayed nstead of the dgtal speedometer. You can select the settng n the submenu Instr.Cl. va the functon Status lne dsplay ( page 144). AUDIO menu The functons n the AUDIO menu operate the audo equpment whch you currently have turned on. If no audo equpment s currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The followng functons are avalable: Functon Page Select rado staton 136 Select satellte rado staton* 136 (USA only) Operate the CD player* Dgtal speedometer 135

138 Controls n detal Control system Select rado staton Turn on the rado ( page 204). Vehcles wth COMAND*: Refer to separate operatng nstructons. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the currently tuned staton appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button k or j repeatedly untl the desred staton s found. You can only store new statons usng the correspondng feature on the rado ( page 212). Vehcles wth COMAND*: Refer to separate operatng nstructons. Select satellte rado staton* (USA only) The satellte rado s treated as a rado applcaton. Select satellte rado wth the correspondng soft key (SAT) n the rado menu. You can also operate the rado n the usual manner. 1 Waveband settng 2 Staton frequency 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Channel name or number 136

139 Controls n detal Control system Press button k or j repeatedly untl the desred channel s found. For more nformaton on satellte rado operaton, see Introducton to satellte rado* (USA only) ( page 214). Vehcles wth COMAND*: Refer to separate operatng nstructons. Operate the CD player* Turn on the rado and select the CD player ( page 219). Vehcles wth COMAND*: Refer to separate operatng nstructons. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the settngs for the CD currently beng played appear n the multfuncton dsplay. 1 Current CD (for CD changer*) 2 Current track Press button k or j repeatedly untl the desred track s selected. To select a CD from the magazne, press a number on the audo system or the COMAND* system key pad located n the center dashboard. 137

140 Controls n detal Control system NAV* menu The NAV menu contans the functons needed to operate your navgaton system. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the message NAV appears n the multfuncton dsplay. If the navgaton system s swtched off, the message NAV OFF appears n the multfuncton dsplay. If the navgaton system s on, dfferent messages, dependng on the current state of the navgaton system, appear n the multfuncton dsplay. Please refer to the COMAND* manual for nstructons on how to actvate the route gudance system*. Vehcle status message memory menu Use the vehcle status message memory menu to scan malfuncton and warnng messages that may be stored n the system. Such messages appear n the multfuncton dsplay and are based on condtons or system status the vehcle s system has recorded. Warnng! G Malfuncton and warnng messages are only ndcated for certan systems and are ntentonally not very detaled. The malfuncton and warnng messages are smply a remnder wth respect to the operaton of certan systems and do not replace the owner s and/or drver s responsblty to mantan the vehcle s operatng safety by havng all requred mantenance and safety checks performed on the vehcle and by brngng the vehcle to an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfuncton and warnng messages ( page 352). Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the vehcle status message memory appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 138

141 Controls n detal Control system No vehcle status messages If no condtons are recorded n memory, the message n the multfuncton dsplay s: No message Vehcle status messages have been recorded If condtons have occured causng status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears n the multfuncton dsplay: Press button k or j. The stored messages wll now be dsplayed n the order n whch they have occured. For malfuncton and warnng messages, see Vehcle status messages n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 352). Should the vehcle s system record any condtons whle drvng, the number of messages wll reappear n the multfuncton dsplay when the SmartKey n the starter swtch s turned to poston 0 or removed from the starter swtch. The vehcle status message memory wll be cleared when you turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 1 or 2. You wll then only see hgh-prorty messages n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 352). 1 Number of messages 139

142 Controls n detal Control system Settngs menu In the Settngs menu there are two functons: The functon Reset to factory settngs, wth whch you can reset all the settngs to the orgnal factory settngs. A collecton of submenus wth whch you can make ndvdual settngs for your vehcle. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untl the Settngs menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Resettng all settngs You can reset all the functons of all submenus to the factory settngs. Press the reset button n the nstrument cluster ( page 126) for approxmately three seconds. The request to press the reset button once more to confrm appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The settngs you have changed wll not be reset unless you confrm the acton by pressng the reset button a second tme. After approxmately fve seconds, the Settngs menu reappears n the multfuncton dsplay. For safety reasons, the followng functons are not reset whle drvng: the Hdlamp mode functon n the Lghtng submenu the Key dependency functon n the Convenence submenu Press the reset button once more. The functons of all the submenus wll reset to factory settngs. 140

143 Controls n detal Control system Submenus n the Settngs menu Press button k or j. The collecton of the submenus appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button ç. The selecton marker moves to the next submenu. The submenus are arranged by herarchy. Scroll down wth button ç, scroll up wth button æ. Move wthn the submenus wth button k or j to the ndvdual functons. The settngs themselves are made wth button æ or ç. Resettng the functons of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functons to the factory settngs. Move to a functon n the submenu. Press the reset button ( page 126) n the nstrument cluster for approxmately three seconds. The request to press the reset button once more to confrm appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press the reset button once more. All functons of the submenu wll reset to factory settngs. The settngs you have changed wll not be reset unless you confrm the acton by pressng the reset button a second tme. After approxmately fve seconds, the Settngs menu reappears n the multfuncton dsplay. 141

144 Controls n detal Control system The table below shows what settngs can be changed wthn the varous menus. Detaled nstructons on makng ndvdual settngs can be found on the followng pages. Instrument cluster Tme/Date Lghtng Vehcle Convenence Selectng temperature dsplay mode Selectng speedometer dsplay mode Tme synchronzaton wth head unt* Settng daytme runnng lamp mode (USA only) Settng automatc lockng Actvatng easy-entry/ext feature Settng the tme (hours) Settng locator lghtng Settng key-dependency Selectng language Settng the tme (mnutes) Settng nght securty llumnaton Selectng dsplay (speed Selectng tme dsplay mode dsplay or outsde temperature) for status ndcator Selectng automatc tme change (Daylght Savng Tme (DST) summer/standard tme wnter) Settng the date (month) Settng the date (day) Settng the date (year) Settng nteror lghtng delayed shut-off Settng parkng poston for exteror rear vew mrror 142

145 Controls n detal Control system Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr.Cl. submenu va the Settngs menu. Use the Instr.Cl. submenu to change the nstrument cluster dsplay settngs. The followng functons are avalable: Functon Page Selectng temperature dsplay 143 mode Selectng speedometer dsplay 143 mode Selectng language 144 Selectng dsplay (speed dsplay 144 or outsde temperature) for status ndcator Selectng temperature dsplay mode Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Temperature ndcator appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Selectng speedometer dsplay mode Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Dsp.Unt Speed/odo appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to set temperature unt to C (degrees Celsus) or F (degrees Fahrenhet). Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unt to km or Mles. 143

146 Controls n detal Control system Selectng language Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu. Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multfuncton dsplay messages. Avalable languages: The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Language appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. German Englsh French Italan Spansh Selectng dsplay (dgtal speedometer or outsde temperature) for status ndcator Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu. Press button æ or ç to select the desred settng. The selected dsplay s then shown contnuously n the lower dsplay. The other dsplay now appears n the menu of the standard dsplay: Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Status lne dsplay appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Dgtal speedometer or Outsde temperature 144

147 Controls n detal Control system Tme/Date submenu Access the Tme/Date submenu va the Settngs menu. Use the Tme/Date submenu to change the nstrument cluster dsplay settngs. The followng functons are avalable: Functon Page Tme synchronzaton wth 145 head unt* Settng the tme (hours) 145 Settng the tme (mnutes) 146 Selectng tme dsplay mode 147 Selectng automatc tme change 147 (Daylght Savng Tme (DST) summer/standard tme wnter) Settng the date (month) 147 Settng the date (day) 148 Settng the date (year) 149 Tme synchronzaton wth head unt* Ths functon can only be seen on vehcles wth COMAND* and navgaton module*. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Tme synchro. w/head Unt appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Settng the tme (hours) Ths functon can only be seen wth audo system. Vehcles wth COMAND*: For nformaton on settng the tme, refer to the separate COMAND operatng nstructons. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Tme Hours appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button æ or ç to select the desred settng. 145

148 Controls n detal Control system The selecton marker s on the hour settng. Settng the tme (mnutes) Ths functon can only be seen wth audo system. The selecton marker s on the mnute settng. Vehcles wth COMAND*: For nformaton on settng the tme, refer to the separate COMAND operatng nstructons. Press button æ or ç to set the hour. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Tme Mnutes appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button æ or ç to set the mnutes. 146

149 Controls n detal Control system Selectng tme dsplay mode Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Clock dsplay appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Selectng automatc tme change (Daylght Savng Tme (DST) summer/standard tme wnter) Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Change-over Summer / Wnter tme appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to select f the changeover between summer and wnter tme should be automatc or manual. Settng the date (month) Ths functon can only be seen wth audo system. Vehcles wth COMAND*: For nformaton on settng the date, refer to the separate COMAND operatng nstructons. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button æ or ç to set the 12h or 24h tme dsplay mode. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Date Set MM appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 147

150 Controls n detal Control system The selecton marker s on the month settng. Settng the date (day) Ths functon can only be seen wth audo system. The selecton marker s on the day settng. Vehcles wth COMAND*: For nformaton on settng the date, refer to the separate COMAND operatng nstructons. Press button æ or ç to set the month. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Date Set day appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button æ or ç to set the day. 148

151 Controls n detal Control system Settng the date (year) Ths functon can only be seen wth audo system. Vehcles wth COMAND*: For nformaton on settng the date, refer to the separate COMAND operatng nstructons. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Tme/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Date Set YY appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the year settng. Press button æ or ç to set the year. Lghtng submenu Access the Lghtng submenu va the Settngs menu. Use the Lghtng submenu to change the lamp and lghtng settngs on your vehcle. The followng functons are avalable: Functon Page Settng daytme runnng lamp 150 mode (USA only) Settng locator lghtng 151 Settng nght securty 151 llumnaton Settng nteror lghtng delayed 153 shut-off 149

152 Controls n detal Control system Settng daytme runnng lamp mode (USA only) Ths functon s not avalable n countres where the daytme runnng lamp mode s mandatory and therefore n a constant mode. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Lghtng submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Hdlamp mode appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to select manual operaton (Manual) or daytme runnng lamp mode (Constant) actvated. Wth daytme runnng lamp mode actvated and the exteror lamp swtch n poston M or U, the low beam headlamps are swtched on when the engne s runnng. In low ambent lght condtons the followng lamps wll swtch on addtonally: Parkng lamps Tal lamps Lcense plate lamps Sde marker lamps For more nformaton on the daytme runnng lamp mode, see Lghtng ( page 117). For safety reasons, resettng the Lghtng submenu to factory settngs ( page 141) whle drvng wll not deactvate the daytme runnng lamp mode. The followng message appears n the multfuncton dsplay: Lghtng - Cannot be completely reset to factory sets. whle drvng. 150

153 Controls n detal Control system Settng locator lghtng Wth the locator lghtng feature actvated and the exteror lamp swtch n poston U, the followng lamps wll swtch on when the vehcle s unlocked wth the SmartKey durng darkness: Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Surround lghtng appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Settng nght securty llumnaton (Headlamps delayed shut-off) Use ths functon to set whether and how long you would lke the exteror lamps to llumnate durng darkness after extng the vehcle and all doors closed. Parkng lamps Tal lamps Lcense plate lamps Sde marker lamps Front fog lamps The locator lghtng swtches off when the drver s door s opened. If you do not open a door after unlockng wth the SmartKey the lamps wll swtch off automatcally after approxmately 40 seconds. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Lghtng submenu. Press button æ or ç to swtch the locator lghtng functon On. Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston U when extng the vehcle ( page 117). The locator lghtng feature s actvated. Wth the delayed shut-off feature actvated and the exteror lamp swtch n poston U before the engne s turned off, the followng lamps wll swtch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter swtch: Parkng lamps Tal lamps Lcense plate lamps Sde marker lamps Front fog lamps If you do not open a door after removng the SmartKey from the starter swtch, the lamps wll swtch off automatcally after approxmately 60 seconds. 151

154 Controls n detal Control system You can reactvate ths functon wthn ten mnutes by openng a door. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Lghtng submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Hdlamp delay off appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to select the desred lamp-on perod. You can select: 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature s deactvated. 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec. or 60 sec., select the desred lamp-on perod. Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston U before turnng off the engne ( page 117). The headlamps delayed shut-off feature s actvated. You can temporarly deactvate the delayed shut-off feature: Before extng the vehcle, turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0. Then turn t to poston 2 and back to poston 0. The delayed shut-off feature s deactvated. It wll reactvate as soon as you rensert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. 152

155 Controls n detal Control system Settng nteror lghtng delayed shut-off Use ths functon to set whether and how long you would lke the nteror lghtng to reman lt durng darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Lghtng submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Int. lght delay off appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to select the desred lamp-on perod. You can select: 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature s deactvated. 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec. or 20 sec., the nteror lghtng delayed shut-off feature s actvated wth the desred lamp-on perod. Vehcle submenu Access the Vehcle submenu va the Settngs menu. Use the Vehcle submenu to make general vehcle settngs. The followng functon s avalable: Functon Page Settng automatc lockng 153 Settng automatc lockng Use ths functon to actvate or deactvate the automatc central lockng. Wth the automatc central lockng system actvated, the vehcle s centrally locked at vehcle speeds of approxmately 9 mph (15 km/h). Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Vehcle submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Automatc door lk. appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 153

156 Controls n detal Control system The selecton marker s on the current settng. Convenence submenu Access the Convenence submenu va the Settngs menu. Use the Convenence submenu to change the settngs for a number of convenence features. The followng functons are avalable: Actvatng easy-entry/ext feature* Use ths functon to actvate and deactvate the easy-entry/ext feature ( page 106). Warnng! G Press button æ or ç to swtch the automatc central lockng On or Off. Functon Page Actvatng 154 easy-entry/ext feature* Settng key-dependency 155 Settng parkng poston* for 156 exteror rear vew mrror You must make sure no one can become trapped or njured by the movng steerng wheel and drver s seat when the easy-entry/ext feature s actvated. To cancel seat/steerng wheel movement, do one of the followng: Press seat adjustment swtch* ( page 30). Move steerng column stalk* ( page 40). Press memory poston swtch* ( page 115). 154

157 Controls n detal Control system Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could open the drver s door and unntentonally actvate the easy-entry/ext feature, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Convenence submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Easy-entry feature appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to change the easy-entry/ext settng. The followng settngs are avalable for the easy-entry/ext feature: Off The easy-entry/ext feature s deactvated Steer. Column Only the steerng column s moved St.col.+seat Both the steerng column and the seat are moved Settng key-dependency Use ths functon to set whether the memory settngs for the seats, the steerng wheel and the mrrors should be stored separately for each SmartKey ( page 114). Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Convenence submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Key dependency appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. 155

158 Controls n detal Control system Press button æ or ç to set key-dependency On or Off. Settng parkng poston* for exteror rear vew mrror Use the Mrror set. parkng ad functon to select whether the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror should be turned downward durng parkng maneuvers when reverse gear R s engaged. For addtonal nformaton, see Actvatng exteror rear vew mrror parkng poston* ( page 174). Move the selecton marker wth button æ or ç to the Convenence submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Mrror set. parkng ad appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The selecton marker s on the current settng. Press button æ or ç to swtch functon On or Off. Trp computer menu Use the trp computer menu to call up statstcal data on your vehcle. The followng nformaton s avalable: Functon Fuel consumpton statstcs after start Fuel consumpton statstcs snce last reset Callng up range (dstance to empty) Page

159 Controls n detal Control system Fuel consumpton statstcs after start Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the frst functon of the Trp computer menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message After start appears n the multfuncton dsplay. All statstcs stored snce the last engne start wll be reset approxmately four hours after the SmartKey n the starter swtch s turned to poston 0 or removed from the starter swtch. Resettng wll not occur f you turn the SmartKey back to poston 1 or 2 wthn ths tme perod. Fuel consumpton snce last reset Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the frst functon of the Trp computer menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message After reset appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 1 Dstance drven snce start 2 Tme elapsed snce start 3 Average speed snce start 4 Average fuel consumpton snce start 1 Dstance drven snce last reset 2 Tme elapsed snce last reset 3 Average speed snce last reset 4 Average fuel consumpton snce last reset 157

160 Controls n detal Control system Resettng fuel consumpton statstcs Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the frst functon of the Trp computer menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the readng that you want to reset appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press and hold the reset button n the nstrument cluster ( page 126) untl the value s reset to 0. Callng up range (dstance to empty) Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the frst functon of the Trp computer menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the message Dstance appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The calculated range based on the current fuel tank level appears n the multfuncton dsplay. TEL menu* Warnng! G A drver s attenton to the road must always be hs/her prmary focus when drvng. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe locaton and stop before placng or takng a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone whle drvng, please use the hands-free devce and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffc condtons permt. Some jursdctons prohbt the drver from usng a cellular telephone whle drvng a vehcle. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. 158

161 Controls n detal Control system You can use the functons n the TEL menu to operate your telephone, provded t s connected to a hands-free system and swtched on. Never operate rado transmtters equpped wth a bult-n or attached antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne s runnng. Dong so could lead to a malfuncton of the vehcle s electronc system, possbly resultng n an accdent and personal njury. Swtch on the telephone and Audo or COMAND*. Press button ÿ or è on the steerng wheel repeatedly untl the message TEL appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Whch messages wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay depends on whether your telephone s swtched on or off: If the telephone s off, the message PHONE OFF appears n the multfuncton dsplay. If the telephone s on: The telephone wll then search for a network. Durng ths tme the multfuncton dsplay s empty. As soon as the telephone has found a network, the message READY appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Ths standby message ndcates that your telephone s ready for use and you can operate t usng the control system. Answerng a call When your telephone s ready to receve calls, you can answer a call at any tme. In the multfuncton dsplay you wll then see the message: Press button s. You have answered the call. The duraton of the call appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 159

162 Controls n detal Control system Endng a call Press button t. You have ended the call. The standby message appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k. The control system reads the phone book whch s stored n the telephone. Ths may take up to 30 seconds. The message Please wat appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the desred name appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The stored names are dsplayed n ascendng or descendng alphabetcal order. Dalng a number from the phone book If your telephone s ready to receve calls, you may select and dal a number from the phone book at any tme. When the message Please wat dsappears, the phone book has been loaded. Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the message TEL appears n the multfuncton dsplay. 1 Name from the phone book 160

163 Controls n detal Control system If you press and hold button j or k for longer than one second, the system scrolls rapdly through the lst of names untl you release the button agan. Cancel the quck search mode by pressng button t. Redalng The control system stores the most recently daled phone numbers. Ths elmnates the need to search through your entre phone book. Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untl the message TEL appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button s. The system dals the selected phone number. If the connecton s successful, the name of the party you called and the duraton of the call wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay. If no connecton s made, the control system stores the daled number n the redal memory. Press button s. The frst number n the redal memory appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button j or k repeatedly untl the desred name appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button s. The control system dals the selected phone number. 161

164 Controls n detal Manual transmsson Manual transmsson s standard equpment on select models and not avalable on all models. For nformaton on drvng wth a manual transmsson, see Manual transmsson ( page 46). Warnng! G For vehcles equpped wth a manual transmsson, gettng out of your vehcle wth the gearshft lever not engaged n frst or reverse gear and parkng brake engaged s dangerous. Also, when parked on an nclne, an engaged frst or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehcle from movng, possbly httng people or objects. Always set the parkng brake n addton to engagng frst or reverse gear ( page 54). When parked on an nclne, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park ths vehcle n areas where combustble materals such as grass, hay or leaves can come nto contact wth the hot exhaust system, as these materals could be gnted and cause a vehcle fre. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could move the gearshft lever, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous njury. Warnng! G On slppery road surfaces, never downshft n order to obtan brakng acton. Ths could result n drve wheel slp and reduced vehcle control. Your vehcle s ABS wll not prevent ths type of loss of control. 162

165 Controls n detal Manual transmsson Gearshft pattern for manual transmsson! When you are shftng nto the 5th or 6th gear, make sure that you press the gearshft lever to the rght. Otherwse, you could accdentally shft nto the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmsson. Downshftng gears leadng to overrevvng the engne can result n engne damage that s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Never hold the vehcle stopped on a hll by usng the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Do not exceed the engne speed lmts. Refer to tachometer ( page 128) for engne speeds. Shftng nto reverse! Only shft nto reverse gear R when the vehcle s statonary, as the transmsson could otherwse be damaged. Stop the vehcle completely. Fully depress clutch pedal. Move the gearshft lever to neutral poston (no gear selected). Move the gearshft lever to the left untl you feel a certan resstance. Push the gearshft lever past ths resstance. Then move the gearshft lever forward nto poston R. 163

166 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* Automatc transmsson s standard equpment on select models and avalable as optonal equpment on select other models. For more nformaton on drvng wth an automatc transmsson see Automatc transmsson* ( page 47). Your vehcle s transmsson adapts ts gear shftng process to your ndvdual drvng style by contnually adjustng the shft ponts up or down. These shft pont adjustments are performed based on current operatng and drvng condtons. If the operatng condtons change, the automatc transmsson reacts by adjustng ts shft program. Durng the bref warm-up, transmsson upshftng s delayed. Ths allows the catalytc converter to heat up more quckly to operatng temperature. Gearshft pattern for automatc transmsson The automatc transmsson selects ndvdual gears automatcally, dependng on: the gear selector lever poston D ( page 168) wth gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 167) the selected program mode (C/S) ( page 169) the poston of the accelerator pedal ( page 170) the vehcle speed 164

167 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* 1 Current gear range/gear selector lever poston 2 Current program mode The current gear range/gear selector lever poston and program mode (C/S) appear n the multfuncton dsplay. An addtonal ndcaton of the current gear selector lever poston can be found on the cover of the shftng-gate. The ndcators come on when you actvate a swtch (e.g. unlockng the vehcle or openng a door) and go out after approxmately 15 mnutes. Warnng! G It s dangerous to shft the gear selector lever out of P or N f the engne speed s hgher than dle speed. If your foot s not frmly on the brake pedal, the vehcle could accelerate quckly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehcle and ht someone or somethng. Only shft nto gear when the engne s dlng normally and when your rght foot s frmly on the brake pedal. When the gear selector lever s n poston D, you can nfluence transmsson shftng by:! Allow engne to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engne untl the operatng temperature has been reached. Shft nto reverse gear R or parkng poston P only when the vehcle s stopped. Avod spnnng of a drve wheel for an extended perod when drvng off on slppery road surfaces. Ths may cause serous damage to the drvetran whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. lmtng the gear range changng gears manually 165

168 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* One-touch gearshftng Even wth an automatc transmsson you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever s n poston D. Downshftng Brefly press the gear selector lever to the left n the D- drecton. The transmsson wll shft from the current gear to the next lower gear as permtted by the shft program. Ths acton smultaneously lmts the gear range of the transmsson ( page 167). Warnng! G On slppery road surfaces, never downshft n order to obtan brakng acton. Ths could result n drve wheel slp and reduced vehcle control. Your vehcle s ABS wll not prevent ths type of loss of control. Upshftng To avod overrevvng the engne when the gear selector lever s moved to the D- drecton, the transmsson wll not shft to a lower gear f the engne s max. speed would be exceeded. Brefly press the gear selector lever to the rght n the D+ drecton. The transmsson wll shft from the current gear to the next hgher gear as permtted by the shft program. Ths acton smultaneously extends the gear range of the transmsson. Cancelng gear range lmt Press and hold the gear selector lever n the D+ drecton untl D reappears n the multfuncton dsplay. The transmsson wll shft from the current gear range drectly to gear range D. Shftng nto optmal gear range Press and hold the gear selector lever n the D- drecton. The transmsson wll automatcally select the gear range suted for optmal acceleraton and deceleraton. Ths wll nvolve shftng down one or more gears. 166

169 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* Gear ranges Wth the gear selector lever n poston D, you can lmt the transmsson s gear range by pressng the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range lmt by pressng the gear selector lever to the rght (D+). The selected gear range appears n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 165). If you press on the accelerator when the engne has reached ts rpm lmt, the transmsson wll upshft beyond any gear range lmt selected. Effect é The transmsson shfts through fourth gear only. è The transmsson shfts through thrd gear only. Wth ths selecton you can use the brakng effect of the engne. Effect ç The transmsson shfts through second gear only. Allows the use of engne s brakng power when drvng: on steep downgrades n mountanous regons under extreme operatng condtons æ The transmsson operates n frst gear only. For maxmum use of engne s brakng effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. 167

170 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* Gear selector lever poston Effect ì Park poston Gear selector lever poston when the vehcle s parked. Place gear selector lever n poston P only when vehcle s stopped. The park poston s not ntended to serve as a brake when the vehcle s parked. Rather, the drver should always set the parkng brake n addton to placng the gear selector lever n poston P to secure the vehcle. Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter swtch wth the gear selector lever n poston P. Wth the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever s locked n poston P. If the vehcle s electrcal system s malfunctonng, the gear selector lever could reman locked n poston P ( page 386). í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever n poston R only when vehcle s stopped. Effect ë Neutral No power s transmtted from the engne to the drve axle. When the brakes are released, the vehcle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). To avod damage to the transmsson, never engage N whle drvng. If the ESP s deactvated or malfunctonng: Move gear selector lever to N only f the vehcle s n danger of skddng, e.g. on cy roads. ê Drve The transmsson shfts automatcally. All fve forward gears are avalable. 168

171 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson*! Coastng the vehcle, or drvng for any other reason wth gear selector lever n N can result n transmsson damage that s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Warnng! G Gettng out of your vehcle wth the gear selector lever not fully engaged n poston P s dangerous. Also, poston P alone s not ntended to or capable of preventng your vehcle from movng, possbly httng people or objects. Always set the parkng brake n addton to shftng to poston P ( page 54). When parked on an nclne, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park ths vehcle n areas where combustble materals such as grass, hay or leaves can come nto contact wth the hot exhaust system, as these materals could be gnted and cause a vehcle fre. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Chldren could move the gear selector lever from poston P, whch could result n an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Automatc shft program The program mode selector swtch s located on the lower part of the center console. 1 Program mode selector swtch C Comfort S Sport For comfort drvng For standard drvng The current gear selector lever poston and the selected program mode (C/S) are ndcated n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 165). 169

172 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson*! Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever s out of poston P. Ths could result n a change of drvng characterstcs for whch you may not be prepared. The last selected program mode (C or S) s swtched on when the engne s restarted. Press program mode selector swtch 1 repeatedly untl the letter of the desred program mode appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Select C for comfort drvng: The vehcle starts out n second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. Ths does not apply f full throttle s appled or gear range 1 s selected. Tracton and drvng stablty are mproved on cy roads. Upshfts occur earler even when you gve more gas. The engne then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less lkely to spn. Drvng tps Accelerator poston Your drvng style nfluences the transmsson s shftng behavor: Less throttle Earler upshftng More throttle Later upshftng Kckdown Use kckdown when you want maxmum acceleraton. Press the accelerator past the pont of resstance. The transmsson shfts nto a lower gear. Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desred speed. The transmsson shfts up agan. 170

173 Controls n detal Automatc transmsson* Stoppng When you stop brefly, e.g. at traffc lghts: Leave the transmsson n gear. Hold the vehcle wth the brake. When you stop longer wth the engne dlng or on an uphll gradent: Move the gear selector lever to poston P. Set the parkng brake. Maneuverng When you maneuver n tght areas, e.g. when pullng nto a parkng space: Control the vehcle speed by gradually releasng the brakes. Accelerate gently. Never abruptly step on the accelerator. Workng on the vehcle Warnng! G When workng on the vehcle, set the parkng brake and move gear selector lever to poston P. Otherwse the vehcle could roll away. Emergency operaton (Lmp Home Mode) If vehcle acceleraton worsens or the transmsson no longer shfts, the transmsson s most lkely operatng n lmp home (emergency operaton) mode. In ths mode only second gear and reverse gear can be actvated. Stop the vehcle. Move gear selector lever to P. Turn off the engne. Wat at least ten seconds before restartng. Restart the engne. Move gear selector lever to poston D (for second gear) or R. Have the transmsson checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. 171

174 Controls n detal Good vsblty For nformaton on the wndsheld wpers, see Wndsheld wpers ( page 51). Headlamp cleanng system* The swtch s located on the left sde of the dashboard. Press swtch 1. The headlamps are cleaned wth a hgh-pressure water jet. For nformaton on fllng up the washer reservor, see Wndsheld washer system and headlamp cleanng system* ( page 303). Rear vew mrrors For more nformaton on settng the rear vew mrrors, see Mrrors ( page 41). Interor rear vew mrror, antglare poston 1 Headlamp washer swtch Swtch on gnton ( page 33). 1 Lever Tlt the mrror to the antglare nght poston by movng lever 1 towards the wndsheld. The nteror rear vew mrror s dmmed. 172

175 Controls n detal Good vsblty Auto-dmmng rear vew mrrors* The reflecton brghtness of the exteror rear vew mrror on the drver s sde and the nteror rear vew mrror wll respond automatcally to glare when the gnton s swtched on and ncomng lght from headlamps falls on the sensor n the nteror rear vew mrror. The rear vew mrror wll not react f reverse gear R s engaged the nteror lghtng s turned on Warnng! G The auto-dmmng functon does not react f ncomng lght s not amed drectly at sensors n the nteror rear vew mrror. The nteror rear vew mrror and the exteror rear vew mrror on the drver s sde do not react, for example, f the rear wndow sunshade* s n rased poston. Glare can endanger you and others. Warnng! G In the case of an accdent lqud electrolyte may escape from the mrror housng f the mrror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an rrtatng effect. Do not allow the lqud to come nto contact wth eyes, skn, clothng, or respratory system. In case t does, mmedately flush affected area wth water, and seek medcal help f necessary.! Electrolyte drops comng nto contact wth the vehcle pant fnsh can be completely removed only whle n the lqud state and by applyng plenty of water. Warnng! G Exercse care when usng the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror. The mrror surface s convex (outwardly curved surface for a wder feld of vew). Objects n mrror are closer than they appear. Check your nteror rear vew mrror or glance over your shoulder before changng lanes. 173

176 Controls n detal Good vsblty Actvatng exteror rear vew mrror parkng poston* Follow these steps to actvate the mrror parkng poston so that the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror wll be turned downward to the stored poston. The buttons are located above the exteror lamp swtch. Make sure you have stored a parkng poston for the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror ( page 116). Make sure the Mrror set. parkng ad functon n the Convenence submenu of the control system s swtched to On ( page 156). Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Press button 2 for the passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror. Place the gear selector lever n reverse gear R. The passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror wll be turned downward to the stored poston. The exteror rear vew mrror returns to ts prevously stored drvng poston: ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of poston R mmedately once your vehcle exceeds a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) mmedately when you press button 1 for the drver s sde exteror rear vew mrror 1 Drver s sde exteror rear vew mrror button 2 Passenger-sde exteror rear vew mrror button 174

177 Controls n detal Good vsblty Sun vsors The sun vsors protect you from sun glare whle drvng. Warnng! G If sunlght enters through a sde wndow, dsengage sun vsor from mountng 1 and pvot to the sde. The mrror lamp 3 wll swtch off. Do not use the vanty mrror whle drvng. Keep the mrrors n the sun vsors closed whle vehcle s n moton. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. Swng sun vsors down when you experence glare. 1 Mountng 2 Mrror cover 3 Mrror lamp 4 Sun vsor To use llumnated mrror, lft up cover

178 Controls n detal Good vsblty Rear wndow sunshade* The swtch s located n the center console. 1 Rear wndow sunshade swtch! Make sure that the movement of the rear wndow sunshade s not restrcted by objects on the rear wndow shelf. Otherwse, the sunshade or the objects could be damaged. Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Always rase the sunshade fully for ts support aganst the wndow frame. Rasng the sunshade Press swtch 1 brefly. The sunshade s rased completely. Stoppng the rasng procedure Press swtch 1 agan. The sunshade stops. Lowerng the sunshade Press swtch 1 brefly. The sunshade s lowered completely. Stoppng the lowerng procedure Press swtch 1 agan. The sunshade stops. Warnng! G When operatng the rear wndow sunshade, make sure there s no danger of anyone beng harmed by the rasng or lowerng procedure. The rasng or lowerng procedure can be mmedately halted by brefly pressng the swtch. Brefly press swtch agan to rase or lower the rear wndow sunshade completely. Warnng! G When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment can cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. 176

179 Controls n detal Good vsblty Rear wndow defroster The rear wndow defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery dran to a mnmum, swtch off the defroster as soon as the rear wndow s clear. The defroster s automatcally deactvated after approxmately 6 to 17 mnutes of operaton dependng on the outsde temperature. Actvatng Press button F or 1 n the clmate control panel ( page 179) or automatc clmate control panel* ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. Deactvatng Press button F or 1 agan. The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. Warnng! G Any accumulaton of snow and ce should be removed from the rear wndow before drvng. Vsblty could otherwse be mpared, endangerng you and others.! If the rear wndow defroster swtches off too soon and the ndcator lamp starts flashng, ths means that too many electrcal consumers are operatng smultaneously and there s nsuffcent voltage n the battery. The system responds automatcally by deactvatng the rear wndow defroster. As soon as the battery has suffcent voltage, the rear wndow defroster automatcally turns tself back on. 177

180 Controls n detal Clmate control 178

181 Controls n detal Clmate control Item 1 Left sde defroster vent, fxed 2 Left sde ar vent, adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for left sde ar vent 4 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for left center ar vent 5 Left center ar vent, adjustable 6 Rght center ar vent, adjustable 7 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for rght center ar vent 8 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for rght sde ar vent 9 Rght sde ar vent, adjustable a Rght sde defroster vent, fxed b Clmate control panel For draft-free ventlaton, move the slders for the ar vents 2, 5, 6, and 9 to the mddle poston. Dependng on producton date, your vehcle s equpped wth ether clmate control panel desgn A or B. Clmate control panel desgn A Clmate control panel desgn B Item 1 Ar volume control 2 Left sde temperature control 3 Rght sde temperature control 4 Ar dstrbuton control 5 Rear wndow defroster 6 AC coolng on/off (AC OFF or A/C) 7 Ar dstrbuton and ar volume (automatc mode) 8 Ar recrculaton 9 Defrostng 179

182 Controls n detal Clmate control The clmate control s operatonal whenever the engne s runnng. You can operate the clmate control system n ether the automatc or manual mode. The system cools or heats the nteror dependng on the selected nteror temperature and the current outsde temperature. Warnng! G When operatng the clmate control, the ar that enters the passenger compartment through the ar vents n the footwell can be very hot or very cold (dependng on the set temperature). Ths may cause burns or frostbte on unprotected skn n the mmedate area of the ar vents. Always keep suffcent dstance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell ar vents. If necessary, change the ar flow usng the ar dstrbuton controls to drect the ar away from the footwell ar vents ( page 182). Nearly all dust partcles, pollutants and odors are fltered out before outsde ar enters the passenger compartment through the ar dstrbuton system. The ar condtonng wll not engage (no coolng) f mode AC OFF s actvated or mode A/C s deactvated ( page 185). Warnng! G Follow the recommended settngs for heatng and coolng gven on the followng pages. Otherwse the wndows could fog up, mparng vsblty and endangerng you and others. Severe condtons (e.g. strong ar polluton) may requre replacement of the flter before ts scheduled nterval. A clogged flter wll reduce the ar volume to the nteror. If the vehcle nteror s hot, ventlate the nteror before drvng off, see Openng (Summer openng feature) ( page 247). Keep the ar ntake grlle n front of the wndsheld free of snow and debrs. Do not obstruct ar flow by placng objects on the ar flow-through exhaust slots below the rear wndow. 180

183 Controls n detal Clmate control Deactvatng the clmate control system Deactvatng Set ar volume control 1 ( page 179) to poston 0. When the ar condtonng s swtched off, the outsde ar supply and crculaton are also swtched off. Only choose ths settng for a short tme. Otherwse the wndows could fog up. Reactvatng Set ar volume control 1 ( page 179) to any speed. Settng the temperature Use temperature controls 2 and 3 ( page 179) to separately adjust the ar temperature on each sde of the passenger compartment. You should rase or lower the temperature settng n small ncrements, preferably startng at 72 F (22 C). When operatng the clmate control system n automatc mode, you wll only rarely need to adjust the temperature, ar volume and ar dstrbuton. Increasng Turn temperature control 2 or 3 ( page 179) slghtly to the rght. The clmate control system wll correspondngly adjust the nteror ar temperature. Decreasng Turn temperature control 2 or 3 ( page 179) slghtly to the left. The clmate control system wll correspondngly adjust the nteror ar temperature. 181

184 Controls n detal Clmate control Adjustng ar dstrbuton and volume Use ar dstrbuton control 4 ( page 179) to adjust the ar dstrbuton. The followng symbols are found on the controls: Symbol Z b Y a Functon Drects ar to the wndsheld and the sde defroster vents Drects ar nto the entre vehcle nteror Drects ar to the footwells Drects ar through the center, sde and rear passenger compartment ar vents Use the ar volume control 1 ( page 179) to adjust the ar volume. You can select between sx ar volume speeds. Adjustng manually Press button U ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. Select any of the sx ar volume speeds and the ar dstrbuton. Adjustng automatcally Press button U ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The temperature, ar dstrbuton and volume are adjusted automatcally. Wndsheld fogged on the outsde Swtch the wndsheld wpers on ( page 51). Swtch to manual mode. Turn ar dstrbuton control 4 to a or Y ( page 179). 182

185 Controls n detal Clmate control Defrostng These settngs should only be selected for a short tme. Actvatng Press button P or 0 ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The ar condtonng swtches automatcally to the followng functons: maxmum blowng and heatng power ar flows onto the wndsheld and the front sde wndows the ar recrculaton mode s swtched off Deactvatng Press button P or 0 ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. Defrostng s turned off. 183

186 Controls n detal Clmate control Ar recrculaton mode Swtch to ar recrculaton mode to prevent unpleasant odors from enterng the vehcle from the outsde. Ths settng cuts off the ntake of outsde ar and recrculates the ar n the passenger compartment. Warnng! G When the outsde temperature s below 41 F (5 C), only swtch to ar recrculaton mode for short perods to prevent wndow foggng. Wndow foggng may mpar vsblty and endanger you and others. Actvatng Press button, ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. If you keep button, pressed the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* wll close. Warnng! G Never operate the sde wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof* f there s the possblty of anyone beng harmed by the closng procedure. In the event that the closng procedure causes potental danger, the closng of the sde wndows can be mmedately halted by pressng or pullng the respectve wndow swtch. The closng of the tlt/sldng sunroof* can be mmedately halted by movng the tlt/sldng sunroof* swtch n the overhead control panel n any drecton. The closng of the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* can be reversed by agan pressng and holdng the, button. 184

187 Controls n detal Clmate control The ar recrculaton mode s actvated automatcally at hgh outsde temperatures. The ndcator lamp on the, button s not lt when the ar recrculaton mode s automatcally swtched on. After approx. 30 mnutes, outsde ar s added to the ar nsde the vehcle. If you have turned off the ar condtonng ( page 185) or the outsde temperature s below 41 F (5 C), the ar recrculaton mode wll not swtch on automatcally. Deactvatng Press button, ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The ar recrculaton mode s deactvated automatcally: If you keep button, pressed the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* wll return to ther prevous poston. after fve mnutes f the outsde temperature s below approxmately 41 F (5 C) after fve mnutes f the ar condtonng s turned off after 30 mnutes f the outsde temperature s above approxmately 41 F (5 C) At outsde temperatures above 79 F (26 C) the system wll not automatcally swtch back to outsde ar. A quantty of outsde ar s added after approxmately 30 mnutes. Ar condtonng The ar condtonng s operatonal whle the engne s runnng and cools the nteror ar to the temperature set by the operator. Condensaton may drp out from underneath the vehcle. Ths s normal and not an ndcaton of a malfuncton. Warnng! G If you turn off the coolng functon, the vehcle wll not be cooled when weather condtons are warm. The wndows can fog up more quckly. Wndow foggng may mpar vsblty and endanger you and others. 185

188 Controls n detal Clmate control Deactvatng It s possble to deactvate the ar condtonng (coolng) functon of the clmate control system. The ar n the vehcle wll then no longer be cooled or dehumdfed. Clmate control panel desgn A Press button ± ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The coolng functon swtches off after a short delay. Clmate control panel desgn B Press button 2 ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The coolng functon swtches off after a short delay. Actvatng Most ar can fog up the wndows. You can dehumdfy the ar wth the ar condtonng. Clmate control panel desgn A Press button ± ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. Clmate control panel desgn B Press button 2 ( page 179). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The ar condtonng uses the refrgerant R134a. Ths refrgerant s free of CFCs whch are harmful to the ozone layer.! If the ar condtonng cannot be turned on agan, ths ndcates that the ar condtonng s losng refrgerant. The compressor has turned tself off. Have the ar condtonng checked at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 186

189 Controls n detal Clmate control Rear passenger compartment adjustable ar vents The ar condtonng for the rear passenger compartment s controlled va the clmate control panel ( page 179). The temperature at the center ar vents for the rear passenger compartment 1 and 3 s the same as at the dashboard center ar vents. The ar vents for the rear passenger compartment are located n the rear center console. 1 Left center ar vent 2 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for center ar vents 3 Rght center ar vent Adjustng ar dstrbuton Push the slde for the left center vent 1 or rght center vent 3 to the left, rght, up, or down. The ar flow s drected n the correspondng drecton. Adjustng ar volume For draft-free ventlaton, push sldes 1 and 3 upward. Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down. The ar volume s ncreased or decreased. 187

190 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* 188

191 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Item 1 Left sde defroster vent, fxed 2 Left sde ar vent, adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for left sde ar vent 4 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for left center ar vent 5 Left center ar vent, adjustable 6 Rght center ar vent, adjustable 7 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for rght center ar vent 8 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for rght sde ar vent 9 Rght sde ar vent, adjustable a Rght sde defroster vent, fxed b Automatc clmate control panel For draft-free ventlaton, move the slders for the ar vents 2, 5, 6, and 9 to the mddle poston. Dependng on producton date, your vehcle s equpped wth ether automatc clmate control panel desgn A or B. Automatc clmate control panel desgn A Automatc clmate control panel desgn B Item 1 Left sde ar dstrbuton control 2 Defrostng 3 Temperature control, left, rasng 4 Dsplay 5 Ar volume control, rasng 6 Temperature control, rght, rasng 7 Rear wndow defroster 8 Rght sde ar dstrbuton control 9 Charcoal flter a AC coolng on/off (AC OFF or A/C) Resdual heat/ventlaton b Temperature control, rght, lowerng c Ar volume control, lowerng d Temperature control, left, lowerng e Ar recrculaton f Automatc clmate control on/off (complete system) g Ar dstrbuton and ar volume (automatc mode) 189

192 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Feature avalablty s based on prelmnary nformaton at tme of prntng. The automatc clmate control may not be avalable as optonal equpment on all models. The automatc clmate control s operatonal whenever the engne s runnng. You can operate the clmate control system n ether the automatc or manual mode. The system cools or heats the nteror dependng on the selected nteror temperature and the current outsde temperature. Warnng G When operatng the automatc clmate control, the ar that enters the passenger compartment through the ar vents n the footwell can be very hot or very cold (dependng on the set temperature). Ths may cause burns or frostbte on unprotected skn n the mmedate area of the ar vents. Always keep suffcent dstance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell ar vents. If necessary change the ar flow usng the ar dstrbuton controls to drect the ar away from the footwell ar vents ( page 192). Nearly all dust partcles, pollutants and odors are fltered out before outsde ar enters the passenger compartment through the ar dstrbuton system. The ar condtonng wll not engage (no coolng) f the mode AC OFF s actvated or mode A/C s deactvated ( page 198). Warnng! G Follow the recommended settngs for heatng and coolng gven on the followng pages. Otherwse the wndows could fog up, mparng vsblty and endangerng you and others. Severe condtons (e.g. strong ar polluton) may requre replacement of the flter before ts scheduled nterval. A clogged flter wll reduce the ar volume to the nteror. If the vehcle nteror s hot, ventlate the nteror before drvng off, see Openng (Summer openng feature) ( page 247). Keep the ar ntake grlle n front of the wndsheld free of snow and debrs. Do not obstruct ar flow by placng objects on the ar flow-through exhaust slots below the rear wndow. 190

193 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Deactvatng the automatc clmate control system Deactvatng It s possble to deactvate the automatc clmate control system. Press button ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The automatc clmate control system s deactvated. When the ar condtonng s swtched off, the outsde ar supply and crculaton are also swtched off. Only choose ths settng for a short tme. Otherwse the wndows could fog up. Reactvatng Press button ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The automatc clmate control system s reactvated. Settng the temperature Use temperature controls 3 and d for the left sde or 6 and b for the rght sde ( page 189) to separately adjust the ar temperature on each sde of the passenger compartment. You should rase or lower the temperature settng n small ncrements, preferably startng at 72 F (22 C). When operatng the automatc clmate control system n automatc mode, you wll only rarely need to adjust the temperature, ar volume and ar dstrbuton. 191

194 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Dsplay 1 Temperature, left 2 Blower speed 3 Temperature, rght Increasng Push temperature control 3 and/or 6 ( page 189). 192 The automatc clmate control system wll correspondngly adjust the nteror ar temperature. Decreasng Push temperature control b and/or d ( page 189). The automatc clmate control system wll correspondngly adjust the nteror ar temperature. Adjustng ar dstrbuton Use the button U for automatc mode or ar dstrbuton controls 1 and 8 ( page 189) to separately adjust the ar dstrbuton on each sde of the passenger compartment. The followng symbols are found on the controls: Symbol Z b Y a Functon Drects ar to the wndsheld and the sde defroster vents Drects ar nto the entre vehcle nteror Drects ar to the footwells Drects ar through the center, sde and rear passenger compartment ar vents Adjustng manually Turn ar dstrbuton control 1 or 8 ( page 189) to the desred symbol. The ndcator lamp on the button U goes out. The automatc ar dstrbuton s swtched off. The ar dstrbuton s controlled accordng to the selected control settng. Adjustng automatcally Press button U ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The ar volume s controlled automatcally for the entre vehcle, and the ar dstrbuton s controlled automatcally for each separate half of the vehcle.

195 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Wndsheld fogged on the outsde Swtch the wndsheld wpers on ( page 51). Swtch to manual mode. Turn ar dstrbuton control 1 or 8 to a or Y ( page 189). Adjustng ar volume Use button U for automatc mode or ar volume controls or Q ( page 189) to adjust ar volume manually. Adjustng manually Seven blower speeds are avalable. Press ar volume control or Q ( page 189) untl the requested blower speed s attaned. The ndcator lamp on the button U goes out. The automatc ar dstrbuton remans swtched on. Adjustng automatcally Press button U ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The ar volume s controlled automatcally for the entre vehcle, and the ar dstrbuton s controlled automatcally for each separate half of the vehcle. 193

196 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Defrostng These settngs should only be selected for a short tme. Actvatng Press button P or 0 ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The ar condtonng swtches automatcally to the followng functons: maxmum blowng and heatng power ar flows onto the wndsheld and the front sde wndows the ar recrculaton mode s swtched off Deactvatng Press button P or 0 ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. Defrostng s turned off. The prevous settngs are once agan n effect. Maxmum coolng MAXCOOL If the left and rght ar dstrbuton controls as well as the arflow volume control are set to U ( page 189) and there s a hgh need for coolng, the dsplay MAXCOOL appears. Ths provdes the fastest possble coolng of the vehcle nteror (when sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* are closed). 194

197 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Ar recrculaton mode Swtch to ar recrculaton mode to prevent unpleasant odors from enterng the vehcle from the outsde. Ths settng cuts off the ntake of outsde ar and recrculates the ar n the passenger compartment. Warnng! Actvatng Press button, ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. G When the outsde temperature s below 41 F (5 C), only swtch to ar recrculaton mode for short perods to prevent wndow foggng. Wndow foggng may mpar vsblty and endanger you and others. If you keep button, pressed the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* wll close. Warnng! G Never operate the sde wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof* f there s the possblty of anyone beng harmed by the closng procedure. In the event that the closng procedure causes potental danger, the closng of the sde wndows can be mmedately halted by pressng or pullng the respectve wndow swtch. The closng of the tlt/sldng sunroof* can be mmedately halted by movng the tlt/sldng sunroof* swtch n the overhead control panel n any drecton. The closng of the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* can be reversed by agan pressng and holdng the button,. The ar recrculaton mode s actvated automatcally: at hgh outsde temperatures f the concentraton of carbon monoxde and ntrogen oxde n the outsde ar ncreases, for example n a tunnel (charcoal flter must be actvated for the ar recrculaton mode to be actvated automatcally) The ndcator lamp on the button, s not lt when the ar recrculaton mode s automatcally swtched on. After approx. 30 mnutes, outsde ar s added to the ar nsde the vehcle. If you have turned off the ar condtonng ( page 198) or the outsde temperature s below 41 F (5 C), the ar recrculaton mode wll not swtch on automatcally. 195

198 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Deactvatng Press button, ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. If you keep button, pressed the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* wll return to ther prevous poston. The ar recrculaton mode s deactvated automatcally: after fve mnutes f the outsde temperature s below approxmately 41 F (5 C) after fve mnutes f the ar condtonng s turned off after 30 mnutes f the outsde temperature s above approxmately 41 F (5 C) At outsde temperatures above 79 F (26 C) the system wll not automatcally swtch back to outsde ar. A quantty of outsde ar s added after approxmately 30 mnutes. Charcoal flter An actvated charcoal flter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from ar enterng the passenger compartment. The charcoal flter can be actvated or deactvated. The system swtches automatcally to the ar recrculaton mode, f the carbon monoxde (CO) or ntrogen oxde (NO X ) concentraton of the outsde ar ncreases beyond a predetermned level. The automatc ar recrculaton mode does not functon f the AC OFF mode s actvated (ndcator lamp on button llumnated) or A/C mode s deactvated (ndcator lamp on button 2 not lt), or f the outsde temperature has fallen below 41 F (5 C). 196

199 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Actvatng Press button e ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. If you keep button e pressed the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* wll close. The actvated charcoal flter should be swtched off when wndows fog up on the nsde, or f the passenger compartment needs to be quckly heated or cooled down. Warnng! G Never operate the sde wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof* f there s the possblty of anyone beng harmed by the closng procedure. In the event that the closng procedure causes potental danger, the closng of the sde wndows can be mmedately halted by pressng or pullng the respectve wndow swtch. The closng of the tlt/sldng sunroof* can be mmedately halted by movng the tlt/sldng sunroof* swtch n the overhead control panel n any drecton. The closng of the sde wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* can be reversed by agan pressng and holdng the button e. Deactvatng Press button e ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. If you keep button e pressed the sde wndows an tlt/sldng sunroof* wll return to ther prevous poston. 197

200 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Ar condtonng The ar condtonng s operatonal whle the engne s runnng and cools the nteror ar to the temperature set by the operator. Condensaton may drp out from underneath the vehcle. Ths s normal and not an ndcaton of a malfuncton. Warnng! G If you turn off the coolng functon, the vehcle wll not be cooled when weather condtons are warm. The wndows can fog up more quckly. Wndow foggng may mpar vsblty and endanger you and others. Deactvatng It s possble to deactvate the ar condtonng (coolng) functon of the automatc clmate control system. The ar n the vehcle wll then no longer be cooled or dehumdfed. Automatc clmate control panel desgn A Press button ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The coolng functon swtches off after a short delay. Automatc clmate control panel desgn B Press button 2 ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The coolng functon swtches off after a short delay. Actvatng Most ar can fog up the wndows. You can dehumdfy the ar wth the ar condtonng. Automatc clmate control panel desgn A Press button ( page 189) agan. The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The coolng functon s swtched on. Automatc clmate control panel desgn B Press button 2 ( page 189) agan. The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. The coolng functon s swtched on. 198

201 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* The ar condtonng uses the refrgerant R134a. Ths refrgerant s free of CFCs whch are harmful to the ozone layer.! If the ar condtonng cannot be turned on agan, ths ndcates that the ar condtonng s losng refrgerant. The compressor has turned tself off. Have the ar condtonng checked at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Resdual heat and ventlaton (avalable on automatc clmate control panel desgn A only) Wth the engne swtched off, t s possble to contnue to heat or ventlate the nteror for up to 30 mnutes. Ths feature makes use of the resdual heat produced by the engne. Actvatng Swtch off gnton ( page 56). Press button ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button comes on. Deactvatng Press button ( page 189). The ndcator lamp on the button goes out. The resdual heat s automatcally turned off: when the gnton s swtched on after about 30 mnutes f the battery voltage drops How long the system wll provde heatng depends on the coolant temperature the temperature set by the operator The blower wll run at speed settng 1 regardless of the ar dstrbuton control settng. 199

202 Controls n detal Automatc clmate control* Rear passenger compartment adjustable ar vents The ar condtonng for the rear passenger compartment s controlled va the automatc clmate control panel ( page 189). The temperature at the center ar vents for the rear passenger compartment 1 and 3 s the same as at the dashboard center ar vents. The ar vents for the rear passenger compartment are located n the rear center console. 1 Left center ar vent 2 Thumbwheel for ar volume control for center ar vents 3 Rght center ar vent Adjustng ar dstrbuton Push the slde for the left center vent 1 or rght center vent 3 to the left, rght, up, or down. The ar flow s drected n the correspondng drecton. Adjustng ar volume For draft-free ventlaton, push sldes 1 and 3 upward. Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down. The ar volume s ncreased or decreased. 200

203 Audo system Audo and telephone, operaton These nstructons are ntended to help you become famlar wth your Mercedes-Benz audo system. They contan useful tps and a detaled descrpton of the user functons. Warnng! G In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should enter system settngs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the system only when road and traffc condtons permt. Always pay full attenton to traffc condtons frst before operatng system controls whle drvng. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your car s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. Operatng safety Warnng! G Any alteratons made to electronc components can cause malfunctons. The rado, amplfer, CD changer*, satellte rado*, and telephone* are nterconnected. When one of the components s not operatonal or has not been removed/replaced properly, the functon of other components may be mpared. Ths condton mght serously mpar the operatng safety of your vehcle. We recommend that you have any servce work on electronc components carred out by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Controls n detal Audo system 201

204 Controls n detal Audo system Operatng and dsplay elements 202

205 Controls n detal Audo system Item Page 1 CD changer mode selector AUX mode selector Sngle CD mode selector Rado mode selector 4 Mute functon (rado) 213 Pause (CD) Volume dstrbuton Sound settngs Dsplay 8 Alphanumerc keypad Item Page 9 Speed dalng memory (telephone) n descendng order a Acceptng a call 231 (telephone) b Telephone mode selector 226 c Speed dalng memory 227 (telephone) n ascendng order d Termnatng a call 231 (telephone) e CD slot f CD ejecton 221 Item Page g Soft keys 204 h Volume 205 j Swtchng on/off 204 k Manual tunng / seek 211 tunng (rado) Track search, reverse (CD) 224 l Manual tunng / seek 211 tunng (rado) Track search, fast forward (CD)

206 Controls n detal Audo system Button and soft key operaton In these nstructons, the alphanumerc keypad (rght sde of rado panel) and the functon buttons (left sde of rado panel) are referred to as buttons. The four keys below the dsplay panel are referred to as soft keys.! Do not press drectly n the dsplay face. Otherwse, the dsplay wll be damaged. Operaton Swtchng the unt on/off Swtchng on Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 1 or 2. or If the audo system was on as you removed the SmartKey from the starter swtch, the audo system wll automatcally come back on as you turn the SmartKey to poston 1 or 2. Press M button. If the rado s swtched on wthout the key n the starter swtch, t wll automatcally swtch off agan after approx. 30 mnutes. If your vehcle s equpped wth a telephone, the dsplay may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network). 204

207 Controls n detal Audo system Swtchng off or Remove SmartKey from starter swtch. Press M button. Adjustng the volume Should excessvely hgh temperatures occur whle the audo system s beng operated, the dsplay wll dm. If temperatures contnue to rse, HIGH TEMP wll appear n the dsplay, after whch the audo system wll be swtched off for a coolng-down perod. Turn rotary control of N button. The volume wll ncrease or decrease dependng on the drecton turned. If your vehcle equpment ncludes a Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone*, you can adjust ts volume separately from the volume of the audo system whle the telephone s beng used. Adjustng sound functons The bass and treble functons are called up by pressng the O button. Settngs for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands, weather band, CD mode and telephone mode. Bass Press O button repeatedly untl BASS appears n the dsplay. Press + or soft key to ncrease or decrease tone level accordngly. or Press RES soft key brefly to reset bass tones to ther center level. The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu eght seconds after the last soft key s pressed. 205

208 Controls n detal Audo system Adjustng treble or Press O button repeatedly untl TREBLE appears n the dsplay. Press + or soft key to ncrease or decrease tone level accordngly. Press RES soft key brefly to reset treble tones to ther center level. The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu eght seconds after the last soft key s pressed. Sound system* You can ether program the sound settngs manually ( page 205) or choose settngs va preset sound characterstcs. You can select from among the followng settngs: STANDARD: conventonal stereo sound. SURROUND: the sound s set for better three-dmensonal acoustc characterstcs. SPEECH: the sound s optmzed for the spoken word. Press O button repeatedly untl STANDARD, SURROUND, or SPEECH appears n the dsplay. Press X or Y soft key repeatedly untl the desred sound settng has been reached. The sound s set accordngly. or Press RES soft key brefly. The sound settng s reset dependng on the sound source actvated. Rado mode: STANDARD CD/AUX mode: SURROUND Telephone: SPEECH The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu eght seconds after the last soft key s pressed. 206

209 Controls n detal Audo system Returnng sound functons to factory settngs or Press O button to call up settngs menu n the dsplay. Press RES soft key brefly; the respectve sound functon s reset to ts center level. Press and hold RES soft key untl RESET appears n the dsplay. The sound settngs for bass and treble are returned to ther center level and the volume s set to a predefned level. Vehcles wth sound system*: The sound settng s reset dependng on the sound source actvated. Rado mode: STANDARD CD/AUX mode: SURROUND Telephone: SPEECH The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu four seconds after the last soft key s pressed. Adjustng volume dstrbuton Call up fader and balance functons by pressng the P button. Fader Press P button repeatedly untl FADER appears n the dsplay. or Press V or W soft key. The volume s dstrbuted accordngly between the front and rear of the vehcle. Press RES soft key brefly. The fader s reset to ts center level. The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu eght seconds after the last soft key s pressed. 207

210 Controls n detal Audo system Adjustng balance or Press P button repeatedly untl BALANCE appears n the dsplay. Press X or Y soft key. The volume s dstrbuted between the left and rght sdes of the vehcle. Press RES soft key brefly. The balance s reset to ts center level. The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu eght seconds after the last button s pressed. Returnng volume dstrbuton to factory settngs Press P button to call up settngs menu n the dsplay. or Press RES soft key brefly; the respectve volume dstrbuton s reset to ts center (flat) level. Press and hold RES soft key untl RESET appears n the dsplay. The volume dstrbuton settngs for fader and balance are set to ther center level. The rado swtches back to the standard rado menu four seconds after the last soft key s pressed. Telephone* mutng If your vehcle equpment ncludes a Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone*, you can adjust ts volume separately from the volume of the audo system whle the telephone s beng used. 208

211 Controls n detal Audo system Connectng an external audo source (AUX) to the rado* An optonal dealer-nstalled cnch-connector* for connectng an external audo source may become avalable for your vehcle model. Feature descrpton s based on prelmnary nformaton at tme of prntng. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for avalablty. You can adjust the volume ( page 205), the sound settngs ( page 205) and the volume dstrbuton ( page 207) for the AUX nput. Callng up AUX mode Press and hold Q button untl AUX appears n the dsplay. Cancelng AUX mode Press any audo source button. Rado operaton Selectng rado mode Press b button. Callng up wavebands You can choose from among the FM, AM, and WB wavebands. Weather band ( page 213). FM waveband: AM waveband: MHz KHz Callng up wavebands for rados wthout SAT or Press FM or AM soft key to swtch between FM and AM. The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another. Press WB soft key. The weather band menu s called up. The waveband currently selected appears n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. 209

212 Controls n detal Audo system Callng up wavebands for rados wth SAT Press FM, AM, or WB soft key repeatedly untl desred waveband has been selected. The FM, AM, and WB wavebands are called up one after another. The waveband currently selected appears n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. Selectng a staton The followng optons are avalable for selectng a staton: Drect frequency nput ( page 210) Manual tunng ( page 211) Automatc seek tunng ( page 211) Scan search ( page 211) Staton memory ( page 212) Automatc staton memory (Autostore) ( page 212) The staton search proceeds n the followng frequency ncrements: 200 khz n FM range 10 khz n AM range Drect frequency nput Select desred waveband. Press * button. Enter desred frequency wth buttons 1 to R. 210

213 Controls n detal Audo system Manual tunng You can only enter frequences wthn the respectve waveband. If a button s not pressed wthn four seconds, the rado wll return to the last staton tuned. Select desred waveband. Press S or T button for approx. three seconds. Press button repeatedly untl desred frequency has been reached. Step-by-step staton tunng takes place n ascendng or descendng order. Each tme the button s pressed, the rado tunes further by 0.2 MHz. Durng manual tunng, the rado s muted. Automatc seek tunng Select desred waveband. Press S or T button brefly. The rado wll tune to the next hghest or next lowest recevable frequency. If no staton s receved after two consecutve scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the frequency from whch t began. Scan search Startng scan search Select desred waveband. Press SC soft key. SC wll appear n the dsplay. The rado brefly tunes n all recevable statons on the waveband selected. 211

214 Controls n detal Audo system Endng scan search Press SC soft key or S or T. The staton last played wll be selected and SC dsappears from the dsplay. Staton memory You can store ten AM and ten FM statons n the memory. Storng statons Tune n desred staton. Press and hold desred staton button 1 to R untl a bref sgnal tone s heard. The frequency s stored on the selected staton button. Callng up statons Press desred staton button 1 to R brefly. Autostore automatc staton memory The Autostore memory functon provdes an addtonal memory level. The staton memory for manually stored statons s not overwrtten. Callng up Autostore memory level and storng statons Press AS soft key brefly. The rado swtches to the Autostore memory level. AS and SEARCH appear n the dsplay and the rado fnds the ten statons wth the strongest sgnals. These statons are stored on the staton buttons 1 to R n order of sgnal strength. 212

215 Controls n detal Audo system Callng up statons Press desred staton button 1 to R. Leavng the Autostore memory level Press FM or AM soft key brefly. Interruptng rado mode The rado mode s nterrupted by an ncomng call on the telephone* ( page 231). Mute on Press U button. The rado mode s nterrupted and MUTED appears n the dsplay. Mute off Press U button. The rado mode s agan actve. Weather band Press WB soft key. The weather band staton last receved s tuned n. Selectng a weather band staton drectly Select desred weather band staton wth buttons 1 to 7. If a staton cannot be tuned n, a search s automatcally started. Search Press S or T button to tune n the next recevable weather band staton. If no weather band staton s receved after three consecutve scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the channel wth whch t began and NO WB FOUND appears n the dsplay. If ths happens, swtch back to standard rado mode. 213

216 Controls n detal Audo system Scan search Startng scan search Press SC soft key. SC wll appear n the dsplay. The rado brefly tunes n all recevable weather band statons. Endng scan search Press SC soft key or S or T. The weather band staton last played wll be selected and SC dsappears from the dsplay. Introducton to satellte rado* (USA only) SIRIUS satellte rado provdes 100 channels of dgtal-qualty rado, among others musc, sports, news, and entertanment, free of commercals. SIRIUS satellte rado uses a fleet of hgh-power satelltes to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to coast, n the contguous U.S. Ths dverse, satellte-delvered programmng s avalable for a monthly subscrpton fee. For more nformaton and servce avalablty call the SIRIUS Servce Center ( page 219), or contact Addtonal satellte rado equpment and a subscrpton to a satellte rado servce provder are requred for the satellte rado operaton descrbed here. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for detals and avalablty for your vehcle. Note that categores and channels shown n llustratons are dependent on programmng content delvered by the servce provder. Programmng content s subject to change. Therefore, channels and categores shown n llustratons and descrptons contaned n ths manual may dffer from the channels and categores delvered by the servce provder. 214

217 Controls n detal Audo system Satellte rado servce may be unavalable or nterrupted from tme to tme for a varety of reasons, such as envronmental or topographc condtons and other thngs beyond the servce provder s or our control. Servce mght also not be avalable n certan places (e.g., n tunnels, parkng garages, or wthn or next to buldngs) or near other technologes. Program categores The channels are categorzed. Categores allow you to tune to statons broadcastng a certan type of program (category mode) ( page 217). Callng up the SAT man menu Press SAT soft key. SAT s dsplayed n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. Pror to actvaton of the satellte rado servce ( page 215). After actvaton of satellte rado servce ( page 215). Pror to actvaton of the satellte rado servce The telephone number of the SIRIUS Servce Center ( ) s dsplayed. Press ESN soft key. The twelve-dgt electronc seral number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* nstalled n your vehcle s dsplayed. Ths nformaton s requred to call the SIRIUS Servce Center for an actvaton request. Credt card nformaton may also be requred for your applcaton. The actvaton process takes approxmately fve to ten mnutes after callng the SIRIUS Servce Center. After actvaton of the satellte rado servce The satellte rado man menu appears. The rado staton selected last s audble, provded t can be receved. 215

218 Controls n detal Audo system The system wll tune to a default staton f no staton had been selected prevously. The frst channel 001 s called up and the PTY system changes to All categores. If no staton can be receved, ACQUIRING appears n the dsplay. If the Satellte rado servce s not actvated, ACQUIRING wll also appear n the rado dsplay and NO SAT wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay. Selectng a staton The followng optons are avalable: Selectng a staton usng the selected category ( page 217). Tunng va staton presets ( page 216). Tunng va scan search ( page 218). Tunng va manual channel nput ( page 216). Tunng va the program category lst ( page 217). Tunng va staton presets Ten satellte rado staton presets are avalable. You can access the presets va number keys. Accessng va number keys Enter number of preset you wsh to select, e.g. 1. The rado plays the staton stored under ths number and the PTY functon changes to the category correspondng to the staton. Tunng va manual channel nput Example: tunng n channel

219 Controls n detal Audo system Press * button. Input lne appears n the man rado menu. Use number keys to enter desred channel wthn eght seconds, e.g The system tunes to channel 16. The staton you have selected begns to play. You can only enter avalable channel numbers. Tunng va the program category lst The category lst contans all currently recevable categores of programs. It s arranged alphabetcally. Selectng a category Press PTY soft key. The current PTY category of the staton s dsplayed. Press <<< or >>> soft key. Ths swtches between the ndvdual categores. When changng the category, the channel selected last n the new category becomes audble. or The system wll automatcally swtch to a staton of the selected category f the currently selected staton s not of the selected category. Otherwse, the currently selected staton remans tuned. Tunng a staton wthn the selected category The channels dentfed for the currently selected category are arranged numercally. Only one entry s vsble at a tme. Press S or T button brefly. The next staton wthn the category s started. Press and hold S or T button for approx. three seconds untl desred staton has been reached. 217

220 Controls n detal Audo system Tunng va scan search Scan search s characterzed as follows: Scan search plays a channel for approx. eght seconds and then skps to the next channel wthn the current category. Scan search can be termnated manually. Press SC soft key. The search starts. SC appears n the dsplay. Press SC soft key agan. The search stops. Obtanng addtonal text nformaton Addtonal text nformaton (artst, ttle) related to the current channel can be dsplayed. Press INF soft key. The ttle beng played s dsplayed. Press INF soft key agan. The name of the artst performng the ttle beng played s dsplayed. If a button s not pressed wthn four seconds, the rado wll return to the standard dsplay. Storng statons Tune n desred staton. Press and hold desred staton button 1 to R untl a bref sgnal tone s heard. The frequency s stored on the selected staton button. The rado saves the current staton at the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears n the status lne, e.g. S3. There are ten presets avalable. An exstng entry s overwrtten n the memory lst when a new entry s gven. 218

221 Controls n detal Audo system Callng up the ESN nformaton menu Press INF soft key. Press ESN soft key. The twelve-dgt electronc seral number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* nstalled n your vehcle s dsplayed. Press RET soft key to ext the menu. CD mode Safety precautons Warnng! G The sngle CD player and the CD changer* are Class 1 laser products. There s a danger of nvsble laser radaton f the housng s opened or damaged. Do not open the housng. The sngle CD player and the CD changer* do not contan any parts that can be servced by the user. For safety reasons, have any servce work whch may be necessary performed only by qualfed personnel. Warnng! G In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should nsert CDs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only f permtted by road, weather and traffc condtons. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. General notes The system may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. Playng coped CDs may cause malfunctons durng playback. 219

222 Controls n detal Audo system! If you affx stckers to the CDs, they can become warped due to the heat that develops n the CD drve or CD changer. In certan stuatons, the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drve. Such damage s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty.! Your CD drve or CD changer has been desgned to play CDs whch correspond to the EN standard. You can therefore only use CDs wth a maxmum thckness of 1.3 mm. If you nsert thcker data carrers, e.g. ones that have data on both sdes (one sde wth DVD data, the other sde wth audo data), they cannot be ejected and wll damage the drve. Do not use CDs wth an eght cm dameter, not even wth a CD adapter. Attemptng to play CDs wth an eght cm dameter or playng such CDs wth an adapter may cause damage to the CD drve. Such damage s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Should excessvely hgh or low temperatures occur whle n CD changer mode*, CD TEMP wll appear n the dsplay, and the CD wll be muted untl the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to contnue operaton. The sngle CD player and the CD changer* play audo CDs. Tps on handlng CDs Handle CDs carefully to prevent nterference durng playback. Avod scratches, fngerprnts and dust on the CDs. Do not wrte on CDs or apply any labels or other materal to them. Clean CDs from tme to tme wth a commercally avalable cleanng cloth. Never wpe the CD n a crcular moton; nstead, wpe t n a straght lne startng n the center and movng outward. Do not use solvents, ant-statc sprays, etc. for cleanng. Replace the CD n ts case after use. Protect CDs from heat and drect sunlght. 220

223 Controls n detal Audo system Operatng the sngle CD player n the audo system unt Loadng a CD The sngle CD player n the audo system unt has capacty for one CD. The CD slot for loadng the drve s located underneath the soft keys. Make sure the system s swtched on. Insert CD nto CD slot. The label sde of the CD must face upwards. The system automatcally pulls the CD nto the CD slot. The audo CD begns to play.! If a CD s already loaded, t must be ejected before nsertng a new CD. Insertng a second CD n the slot wth another CD stll loaded wll cause damage to the CD drve not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Ejectng a CD If a CD has been nserted ncorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD0 wll appear n the dsplay. Make sure the system s swtched on. Press EJECT button. The system ejects the CD. NO CD wll appear n the dsplay. Remove CD from slot. If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot wthn approx. 15 seconds, the system automatcally pulls the CD back n and plays t. If a CD s pulled back n, press EJECT button for fve seconds; the CD wll then be ejected. Operatonal readness of CD changer* If a CD changer* has been nstalled n the vehcle, t can be operated from the front control panel of the audo system. A loaded magazne must be nstalled to play CDs. The CD changer s located n the glove box. Loadng/unloadng the CD magazne The CD changer* may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. Slde changer door to the rght and press g button. Magazne wll be ejected. 221

224 Controls n detal Audo system 1 CD 2 CD changer 3 CD tray 4 CD magazne Remove magazne 4 and pull CD tray 3 fully out. Place CD 1 n recess of tray, label sde up. Push tray nto magazne n drecton of arrow. CDs whch have been nserted mproperly or are unreadable wll not be played. Push magazne nto CD changer* 2 n drecton of arrow and close sldng door. Playng CDs Sngle CD player n the audo unt Press button. CD 0 wll appear n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. The CD wll resume playback at the pont where t was swtched off. CD changer* Press Q button. CD and the selected magazne slot number appear n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. If you have not removed a CD snce the last tme the CD audo source was actvated, the last CD lstened to wll begn to play at the pont where t was swtched off. After the last track on a CD has fnshed, the next CD s automatcally played. 222

225 Controls n detal Audo system Playng tracks You have the followng optons: Audo system wth CD changer*: selectng CDs Drect track entry Track skp forward/reverse Fast forward/reverse Scan Random tracks Repeat track Selectng CDs n the audo unt wth CD changer* You can select from among the nserted CDs wth buttons R to 6. R = CD player n the audo unt 1 to 6 = CDs n the CD changer* The magazne slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD n the dsplay, and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK. Drect track entry You can make a drect selecton from among the tracks on a CD. If there s no CD n the selected magazne slot, NO CD appears n the dsplay wth the correspondng slot number. Press * button. Enter track number usng buttons 1 to R. 223

226 Controls n detal Audo system The number of the track beng played appears next to TRACK n the dsplay. You can only enter avalable track numbers. Skppng tracks forward/backward Skppng tracks forward Press S button brefly. The next track wll be played. Skppng tracks backward Press T button brefly. If the track has been playng for more than ten seconds, the unt skps back to the begnnng of the track currently playng. If less than ten seconds have been played, the unt skps back to the begnnng of the prevous track. Pressng the T or S button repeatedly wll result n multple tracks beng skpped. Fast forward/reverse Fast forward Press and hold S button untl desred pont has been reached. Reverse Press and hold T button untl desred pont has been reached. The track number and the relatve tme of the track s shown n the dsplay durng the search. Scan Startng scan Press SC soft key. SC wll appear n the dsplay. Each track on the current CD wll be played for approx. eght seconds n ascendng order. Endng scan Press SC soft key or T or S. Random play The random functon (RDM) plays the tracks of the current CD n random order. When you start the RDM functon, the RPT functon s automatcally swtched off. 224

227 Controls n detal Audo system Swtchng on random Swtchng on repeat Swtchng on pause functon Press RDM soft key. Press RPT soft key. RDM appears n the dsplay. A randomly selected track s played. Swtchng off random RPT appears n the dsplay. Swtchng off repeat Press RPT soft key agan. Press RDM soft key agan. Repeat The track beng played s repeated untl the repeat functon s swtched off. Pause functon The CD changer mode s nterrupted by an ncomng call on the telephone* ( page 231). Press U button. The CD changer mode s nterrupted and PAUSE appears n the dsplay. When you start the RPT functon, the RDM functon s automatcally swtched off. Swtchng off pause functon Press U button. The CD changer mode s actve agan. 225

228 Controls n detal Audo system Track and tme dsplay GSM network phones Swtchng on the telephone Press T soft key. The number of the track beng played and the elapsed playng tme appear n the dsplay. Press T soft key agan. The total number of tracks and the total playng tme of the CD appear n the dsplay. Press T soft key. The standard CD playback menu appears n the dsplay. Usng your Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone*, a number of functons and operatng steps can be performed and dsplayed n the audo system dsplay. Further operatng nstructons not covered here can be found n the operatng nstructons for the multfuncton steerng wheel and the cellular telephone*. If your audo system s set up for telephone operaton, the t symbol wll appear n the dsplay. When you nsert your Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone* nto the telephone cradle, you wll be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds ( page 227). Ths dsplay dsappears when you press any button. When your moble telephone s nserted nto the telephone cradle, you wll see the recepton strength n the upper rght-hand corner of the dsplay. Swtchng on the telephone Press h button. If the telephone was prevously swtched off, PROCESSING appears n the dsplay and you wll then be prompted to enter your PIN. Swtchng off the telephone Press h button for approx. three seconds. PROCESSING appears n the dsplay untl the telephone s off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears n the dsplay. 226

229 Controls n detal Audo system PIN entry If the PIN s entered ncorrectly three tmes, NEED PUK wll appear n the dsplay. Enter PUK va your telephone. Please refer to the separate telephone operatng nstructons for more nformaton. Placng a call Enterng a telephone number and startng the dalng process Enter PIN number usng buttons 1 to R. If necessary, correct number entered wth the CLR soft key. Press soft key brefly to delete the last dgt entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. Press OK soft key after enterng correct PIN. Adjustng the volume Turn rotary control of N button durng a telephone call. The volume wll ncrease or decrease dependng on the drecton turned. The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audo mode. Enter desred telephone number usng buttons 1 to R. The number can have up to 32 dgts, but only twelve of these are vsble n the dsplay. READY or ROAMING wll appear n the dsplay. Adjustng sound Adjust sound durng a telephone call. Sound adjustment ( page 205). 227

230 Controls n detal Audo system If necessary, correct number entered wth the CLR soft key. Press soft key brefly to delete the last dgt entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. After correct telephone number has been entered, press s button. If the telephone number has been saved together wth a name n the telephone book, the name wll appear n the dsplay. Phone book The numbers stored n the phone book of the telephone can be called up ether by name or number. In addton, ncomng calls are stored n the phone book. Ths s only possble, however, when the call nformaton transmtted ncludes the number of the person callng. If the telephone number s not transmtted, NO NUMBER wll be stored n the phone book. Searchng and callng up telephone book entres by name You can access your moble telephone s phone book usng the audo system. You can access both the man entres and the sub-entres of your phone book. or or Press MEM soft key or press button or ƒ. Press desred numercal key 2 to 9. The stored entres are selected accordng to the alphabetcal order of the ntal letters (e.g. for S -Schneder, press button 7 four tmes). Press and hold button or ƒ. The system jumps from one ntal letter to the next n ascendng or descendng order. Press and hold button or ƒ untl desred ntal letter has been reached. 228

231 Controls n detal Audo system Press button or ƒ repeatedly untl desred entry has been reached. The stored entres are selected n alphabetcal order wth the sub-entres. Several sub-entres can be stored for each man entry (name). These entres are marked by a correspondng abbrevaton that appears n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. The followng abbrevatons for sub-entres are possble: CEL = Moble phone HOM = Home WOR = Work FAX = Fax PAG = Pager TEL = Man When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. Vewng the telephone number of a telephone book entry Search for desred entry. Press NUM soft key. The telephone number of the phone book entry appears n the dsplay. Returnng calls receved Press MEM soft key or press button or ƒ. Press RCV soft key (receved calls). The number of receved calls and then the call last receved appear brefly n the dsplay. Select desred telephone number wth button or ƒ. The letter R and the number of the memory poston appear n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. The numbers are stored n the order of the calls receved. When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. 229

232 Controls n detal Audo system Speed dal Redal Press s button. If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dal numbers n your telephone, you can also enter these wth buttons 1 to R on the rado head unt. Press desred button 1 to R brefly. Press s button. The call wll be made. Turbo dal If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dal numbers n your telephone, you can also enter these wth buttons 1 to R on the rado head unt. If the number you have daled s busy, you can agan place calls to the last ten telephone numbers daled usng the redal functon. If you have actvated the automatc redal functon on your telephone, the number of the person beng called s automatcally redaled after a short watng perod f there s a busy sgnal. Refer to the separate operatng nstructons for the moble telephone. Manual redal The telephone number last daled wll appear n the dsplay. Select desred telephone number wth button or ƒ. The letter L and the number of the memory poston appears n the left-hand corner of the dsplay. The numbers are stored n the order of the calls receved. When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. Press desred button 1 to R untl the call s made. 230

233 Controls n detal Audo system Acceptng an ncomng call If the telephone s actve n the background (recepton symbol s vsble n the dsplay), the audo source s muted when an ncomng call s receved. A rngng tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number, or the name under whch the telephone number has been saved n the phone book, appears n the dsplay. If the caller s number s not transmtted wth the call, CALL wll appear n the dsplay. Press s button. The call s accepted. Mutng a call It s possble to mute a call; the caller s then no longer able to hear you. Mute on Press MUT soft key. MIC MUTE wll appear n the dsplay. Mute off Press MUT soft key agan. Termnatng a call Press t button. The current call s termnated and the muted audo source becomes actve agan. Talkng wth two callers at the same tme If you wsh to receve or place another call durng an already actve call, you can accept or place the second call and swtch between the callers or combne them nto one call. Note that the features descrbed here are dependng on avalablty from your moble phone servce provder. or Placng/acceptng a second call Place new call by enterng telephone number manually. Press s button. You are connected to the second caller; the frst caller s kept on hold. 231

234 Controls n detal Audo system Press s button to accept a second call. You wll be notfed of the second call acoustcally, but you wll not see ths n the dsplay. You are connected wth the second caller; the frst caller s kept on hold. Swtchng between calls Press 2 and s buttons. Ths swtches between the calls. The non-actve call s kept on hold. Termnatng a call Press t button. The current call s termnated. You are agan connected wth the caller prevously placed on hold. Combnng two calls Press 3 and s buttons. The calls are combned nto one call. Termnatng a combned call Press t button. The connecton to both callers s termnated. TDMA or CDMA network phones Usng your Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone*, a number of functons and operatng steps can be performed and dsplayed n the audo system dsplay. Further operatng nstructons not covered here can be found n the operatng nstructons for the multfuncton steerng wheel and the moble telephone*. If your audo system s set up for telephone operaton, the t symbol wll appear n the dsplay. When you nsert your Mercedes-Benz specfed moble telephone* nto the telephone cradle, you wll be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds ( page 233). Ths dsplay dsappears when you press any button. When your moble telephone s nserted nto the telephone cradle, you wll see the recepton strength n the upper rght-hand corner of the dsplay. 232

235 Controls n detal Audo system Swtchng on the telephone Swtchng on the telephone Press h button. If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone, you must now enter the code. Press OK soft key after enterng correct code. The telephone s unlocked. If you have entered an ncorrect code, you must enter the correct code. Swtchng off the telephone Press h button for approx. three seconds. PROCESSING appears n the dsplay untl the telephone s off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears n the dsplay. Adjustng sound Adjust sound durng a telephone call. Sound adjustment ( page 205). Placng a call Enterng a telephone number and startng the dalng process Adjustng the volume Enter code usng buttons 1 to R. If necessary, correct number entered wth the CLR soft key. Press soft key brefly to delete the last dgt entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. Turn rotary control of N button durng a telephone call. The volume wll ncrease or decrease dependng on the drecton turned. The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audo mode. Enter desred telephone number usng buttons 1 to R. The number can have up to 32 dgts, but only twelve of these are vsble n the dsplay. 233

236 Controls n detal Audo system If necessary, correct number entered wth the CLR soft key. Press soft key brefly to delete the last dgt entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. After correct telephone number has been entered, press s button. If the telephone number has been saved together wth a name n the phone book, the name wll appear n the dsplay. Phone book The numbers stored n the phone book of the moble telephone can be called up ether by name or number. In addton, ncomng calls are stored n the phone book. Ths s only possble, however, when the call nformaton transmtted ncludes the number of the person callng. If the telephone number s not transmtted, NO NUMBER wll be stored n the phone book. Searchng and callng up phone book entres by name You can access your moble telephone s phone book wth the audo system. You can access both the man entres and the sub-entres of your phone book. or or Press MEM soft key or press button or ƒ. Press desred numercal key 2 to 9. The stored entres are selected accordng to the alphabetcal order of the ntal letters (e.g. for S -Schneder, press button 7 four tmes). Press and hold button or ƒ. The system jumps from one ntal letter to the next n ascendng or descendng order. Press and hold button or ƒ untl desred ntal letter has been reached. 234

237 Controls n detal Audo system Press button or ƒ repeatedly untl desred entry has been reached. The stored entres are selected n alphabetcal order wth the sub-entres. Several sub-entres can be stored for each man entry (name). These entres are marked by a correspondng abbrevaton that appears n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. The followng abbrevatons for sub-entres are possble: CEL = Moble phone HOM = Home WOR = Work FAX = Fax PAG = Pager TEL = Man When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. Vewng the telephone number of a phone book entry Search for desred entry. Press NUM soft key. The telephone number of the phone book entry appears n the dsplay. Returnng calls receved Press MEM soft key or press button or ƒ. Press RCV soft key (receved calls). The number of receved calls and then the call last receved appear brefly n the dsplay. Select desred telephone number wth button or ƒ. The letter R and the number of the memory poston appear n the upper left-hand corner of the dsplay. The numbers are stored n the order of the calls receved. When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. 235

238 Controls n detal Audo system Speed dal Redal Press s button. If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dal numbers n your telephone, you can also enter these wth buttons 1 to R on the rado unt. Press desred button 1 to R brefly. Press s button. The call wll be made. Turbo dal If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dal numbers n your telephone, you can also enter these wth buttons 1 to R on the rado unt. If the number you have daled s busy, you can agan place calls to the last ten telephone numbers daled usng the redal functon. If you have actvated the automatc redal functon on your moble telephone, the number of the person beng called s automatcally redaled after a short watng perod f there s a busy sgnal. Refer to the separate operatng nstructons for the moble telephone. Manual redal The telephone number last daled wll appear n the dsplay. Select desred telephone number wth button or ƒ. The letter L and the number of the memory poston appears n the left-hand corner of the dsplay. The numbers are stored n the order of the calls receved. When you have selected a number, press s button. The call wll be made. Press desred button 1 to R untl the call s made. 236

239 Controls n detal Audo system Acceptng an ncomng call If the telephone s actve n the background (recepton symbol s vsble n the dsplay), the audo source s muted when an ncomng call s receved. A rngng tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number, or the name under whch the telephone number has been saved n the telephone book, appears n the dsplay. If the caller s number s not relayed, CALL wll appear n the dsplay. Press s button. The call s accepted. Mutng a call It s possble to mute a call; the caller s then no longer able to hear you. Mute on Press MUT soft key. MIC MUTE wll appear n the dsplay. Mute off Press MUT soft key agan. Termnatng a call Press t button. The current call s termnated and the muted audo source becomes actve agan. Acceptng a second ncomng call If you receve another call durng an already actve call, you can accept the second call and swtch between the two. Acceptng a second call Place new call by enterng telephone number manually. You wll be notfed of the second call acoustcally, but you wll not see ths n the dsplay. You are connected to the second caller; the frst caller s kept on hold. 237

240 Controls n detal Audo system Swtchng between calls Placng a second call Termnatng a call Press s button. Ths swtches between the calls. The non-actve call s kept on hold. Termnatng a call Press t button. The current call s termnated. The connecton to the caller prevously kept on hold s also nterrupted; however, reconnecton s ndcated by an acoustc sgnal. If you wsh to place another call durng an already actve call, you can place the second call and swtch between the callers or combne them nto one call. Note that ths feature s dependng on avalablty from your moble phone servce provder. Placng a second call Place a new call by enterng telephone number manually. Press s button. You are connected to the second caller; the frst caller s kept on hold. Press t button. The current call s termnated. The connecton to the caller prevously kept on hold s also nterrupted; however, reconnecton s ndcated by an acoustc sgnal. Combnng two calls Press s button. The calls are combned nto one call. Termnatng a combned call Press t button. The connecton to both callers s termnated. 238

241 Controls n detal Audo system Emergency calls 911 The followng descrbes how to dal a 911 emergency call usng the audo system head unt when a Mercedes-Benz specfed moble phone* s nserted n the phone cradle*. Unless otherwse specfed, the descrptons refer to the audo system head unt. Consult the separate telephone operatng nstructons that came wth your moble phone* for nformaton on how to place a 911 emergency call on the moble phone*. Warnng! G The 911 emergency call system s a publc servce. Usng t wthout due cause s a crmnal offense. The followng condtons must be met for a 911 emergency call: Telephone must be swtched on. The correspondng moble communcatons network must be avalable. Emergency calls may not be possble wth all telephone networks or f certan network servces and/or telephone functons are actve. Check wth your local servce provders. If you cannot make an emergency call, you wll have to ntate rescue measures yourself. GSM network phones Placng a 911 emergency call usng audo head unt wth the phone locked Press h button to swtch to telephone operaton. PIN? appears n the audo dsplay. Enter 911 usng the number keypad on the audo head unt. Press OK soft key or s button for dalng to begn. DIALING appears n the audo dsplay whle the telephone establshes the connecton. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. 239

242 Controls n detal Audo system Placng a 911 emergency call usng audo head unt wth the phone unlocked Press h button to swtch to telephone operaton. Enter 911 usng the number keypad on the audo head unt. Press s button for dalng to begn. DIALING appears n the audo dsplay whle the telephone establshes the connecton. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. If no SIM card s n the moble phone, NO SERVICE appears n the audo dsplay. In that case, you only can make an emergency call on the moble phone tself, wthout the use of the head unt. TDMA/CDMA network phones Placng a 911 emergency call usng audo head unt wth the phone locked Press h button to swtch to telephone operaton. CODE? appears n the audo dsplay. Enter 911 usng the number keypad on the audo head unt. Press OK soft key or s button for dalng to begn. DIALING appears n the audo dsplay whle the telephone establshes the connecton. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. Placng a 911 emergency call usng audo head unt wth the phone unlocked Press h button to swtch to telephone operaton. Enter 911 usng the number keypad on the audo head unt. Press s button for dalng to begn. DIALING appears n the audo dsplay whle the telephone establshes the connecton. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. 240

243 Power wndows Openng and closng the wndows The sde wndows are opened and closed electrcally. The swtches for all the sde wndows are on the drver s door. The swtches for the respectve wndows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors. 1 Left front wndow 2 Rght front wndow 3 Rght rear wndow 4 Left rear wndow 5 Rear wndow overrde swtch ( page 80) Warnng! G When closng the wndows, make sure there s no danger of anyone beng harmed by the closng procedure. The closng of the door wndows can be mmedately halted by releasng the swtch or, f swtch was pulled past the resstance pont and released, by ether pressng or pullng the respectve swtch. If the wndow encounters an obstructon that blocks ts path n a crcumstance where you pulled the swtch past the resstance pont and released t to close the wndow, the automatc reversal functon wll stop the wndow and open t slghtly. Controls n detal Power wndows If the wndow encounters an obstructon that blocks ts path n a crcumstance where you are closng the wndow by pullng and holdng the swtch, or by pressng and holdng button on the SmartKey, the automatc reversal functon wll not operate. When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment can cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. 241

244 Controls n detal Power wndows You can also open or close the wndows usng the SmartKey (summer openng/convenence closng feature) ( page 243). You can close and reopen the wndows usng the ar recrculaton button, n the clmate control panel ( page 179) or automatc clmate control panel* ( page 189). You can close and reopen the wndows usng the charcoal flter button e n the automatc clmate control panel* ( page 189). Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Openng the wndows Press swtch 1 to 4 to the resstance pont. The correspondng wndow wll move downwards untl you release the swtch. Closng the wndows Pull swtch 1 to 4 to the resstance pont. The correspondng wndow wll move upwards untl you release the swtch. Warnng! G If you pull and hold the swtch up when closng the wndow, and upward movement of the wndow s blocked by some obstructon ncludng but not lmted to arms, hands, fngers, etc., the automatc reversal wll not operate. Fully openng the wndows (Express-open) Press swtch 1 to 4 past the resstance pont and release. The correspondng wndow opens completely. Fully closng the wndows (Express-close) Pull swtch 1 to 4 past the resstance pont and release. The correspondng wndow closes completely. 242

245 Controls n detal Power wndows! If the upward movement of the wndow s blocked durng the closng procedure, the wndow wll stop and open slghtly. Remove the obstructon, pull the swtch agan past the resstance pont and release. If the wndow stll does not close when there s no obstructon, then pull and hold the swtch agan. The sde wndow wll then close wthout the obstructon sensor functon. Openng and closng the wndows wth Warnng! G the SmartKey The tlt/sldng sunroof* ( Drver s door only: page 247) wll If wthn fve seconds you agan pull the also be opened or closed when the power swtch past the resstance pont and wndows are operated wth the SmartKey. release, the automatc reversal wll not functon. Warnng! G Stoppng wndows Press or pull respectve swtch agan. Never operate the wndows or tlt/sldng sunroof* f there s the possblty of anyone beng harmed by the openng or closng procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potental danger, the procedure can be mmedately halted by releasng the transmt button on the SmartKey. To reverse drecton of movement, press button Πfor openng or for closng. 243

246 Controls n detal Power wndows Am transmtter eye at the drver s door handle. Openng (Summer openng feature) Press and hold button Πafter unlockng the vehcle. The wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* begn to open after approxmately one second. Release the Πbutton to stop procedure. Closng (Convenence feature) Press and hold button after lockng the vehcle. The wndows and tlt/sldng sunroof* begn to close after approxmately one second. Release the button to stop procedure. Make sure all sde wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof* are properly closed before leavng the vehcle. Synchronzng power wndows The power wndows must be resynchronzed each tme after the battery has been dsconnected. f the power wndows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close). Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Pull the power wndow swtches untl the sde wndows are closed. Hold the swtches for approxmately one second. The power wndows are synchronzed. 244

247 Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Openng and closng the power tlt/sldng sunroof The tlt/sldng sunroof can be opened and closed electrcally. The swtch for the tlt/sldng sunroof s on the overhead control panel. Sunroof swtch 1 Push up to rase sunroof at rear 2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear 3 Push forward to slde sunroof closed 4 Push back to slde sunroof open Wth the sunroof closed or tlted open, a screen can be sld nto the roof openng to guard aganst sun rays. When sldng the sunroof open, the screen wll also retract. Screen Warnng! Controls n detal Power tlt/sldng sunroof* G When closng the tlt/sldng sunroof, make sure there s no danger of anyone beng harmed by the closng procedure. The openng/closng procedure of the tlt/sldng sunroof can be mmedately halted by releasng the swtch or, f the swtch was moved past the resstance pont and released, by movng the swtch n any drecton. The tlt/sldng sunroof s made out of glass. In the event of an accdent, the glass may shatter. Ths may result n an openng n the roof. In a vehcle rollover, occupants not wearng ther seat belts or not wearng them properly may be thrown out of the openng. Such an openng also presents a potental for njury for occupants wearng ther seat belts properly as entre body parts or portons of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 245

248 Controls n detal Power tlt/sldng sunroof* When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment can cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury.! To avod damagng the seals, do not transport any objects wth sharp edges whch can stck out of the tlt/sldng sunroof. Do not open the tlt/sldng sunroof f there s snow or ce on the roof, as ths could result n malfunctons. The tlt/sldng sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrcal malfuncton occur ( page 387). You can also open or close the tlt/sldng sunroof usng the SmartKey (summer openng/convenence closng feature) ( page 247). You can close and reopen the tlt/sldng sunroof usng the ar recrculaton button, n the clmate control panel ( page 179) or automatc clmate control panel* ( page 189). You can close and reopen the tlt/sldng sunroof usng the charcoal flter button e n the automatc clmate control panel* ( page 189). Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Openng and closng the power tlt/sldng sunroof To open, close, rase, or lower the tlt/sldng sunroof, move the sunroof swtch to resstance pont n the requred drecton of arrows 1 to 4. Release the sunroof swtch when the tlt/sldng sunroof has reached the desred poston. Fully openng (Express-open) and closng (Express-close) the power tlt/sldng sunroof To open or close the tlt/sldng sunroof, move the sunroof swtch past the resstance pont n the requred drecton of arrow 4 or 3 and release. The tlt/sldng sunroof opens or closes completely. 246

249 Controls n detal Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Stoppng the power tlt/sldng sunroof durng Express-operaton Move the sunroof swtch n any drecton. If the movement of the tlt/sldng sunroof s blocked durng the closng procedure, the tlt/sldng sunroof wll stop and reopen slghtly. Openng and closng the power tlt/sldng sunroof wth the SmartKey The power wndows ( page 243) wll also be opened or closed when you operate the tlt/sldng sunroof wth the SmartKey. Warnng! G Never operate the wndows or tlt/sldng sunroof f there s the possblty of anyone beng harmed by the openng or closng procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potental danger, the procedure can be mmedately halted by releasng the transmt button on the SmartKey. To reverse drecton of movement, press button Πfor openng or for closng. Am transmtter eye at the drver s door handle. Openng (Summer openng feature) Press and hold button Πafter unlockng the vehcle. The wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof begn to open after approxmately one second. Release the Πbutton to stop procedure. 247

250 Controls n detal Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Closng (Convenence feature) Press and hold button after lockng the vehcle. The wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof begn to close after approxmately one second. Release the button to stop procedure. Make sure all sde wndows and the tlt/sldng sunroof are properly closed before leavng the vehcle. Synchronzng the power tlt/sldng sunroof The tlt/sldng sunroof must be synchronzed after the battery has been dsconnected or dscharged after the tlt/sldng sunroof has been closed manually ( page 387) after a malfuncton f the tlt/sldng sunroof does not open smoothly Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Move and hold the sunroof swtch n the drecton of arrow 1 ( page 245) untl the tlt/sldng sunroof s fully rased at the rear. Hold the sunroof swtch for approxmately one second. Check the Express-open feature ( page 246). If the tlt/sldng sunroof opens completely, the tlt/sldng sunroof s synchronzed. Otherwse repeat the above steps. 248

251 Drvng systems The drvng system of your vehcle s descrbed on the followng pages: Cruse control, wth whch the vehcle can mantan a preset speed For nformaton on the BAS, ABS, and ESP drvng systems, see Drvng safety systems ( page 83). Cruse control Cruse control automatcally mantans the speed you set for your vehcle. Use of cruse control s recommended for drvng at a constant speed for extended perods of tme. You can set or resume cruse control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h). The cruse control functon s operated by means of the cruse control lever. The cruse control lever s the uppermost lever on the left-hand sde of the steerng column ( page 22). Warnng! Controls n detal Drvng systems G Cruse control s a convenence system desgned to assst the drver durng vehcle operaton. The drver s and must reman at all tmes responsble for the vehcle speed and for safe brake operaton. Only use cruse control f the road, traffc and weather condtons make t advsable to travel at a steady speed. The use of cruse control can be dangerous on wndng roads or n heavy traffc because condtons do not allow safe drvng at a steady speed. The use of cruse control can be dangerous on slppery roads. Rapd changes n tre tracton can result n wheel spn and loss of control. Deactvate cruse control when drvng n fog. The Resume functon should only be operated f the drver s fully aware of the prevously set speed and wshes to resume ths partcular preset speed. 249

252 Controls n detal Drvng systems 1 Sets current or hgher speed 2 Sets current or lower speed 3 Cancels cruse control 4 Resumes at last set speed Settng current speed 250 Accelerate or decelerate to the desred speed. Brefly lft 1 or depress 2 the cruse control lever. The current speed s set. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruse control s actvated. Cancelng cruse control There are several ways to cancel cruse control: or On uphll or downhll grades, cruse control may not be able to mantan the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed wll be resumed. Step on the brake pedal. Cruse control s canceled. The last speed set s stored for later use. Brefly push the cruse control lever to poston 3. Cruse control s canceled. The last speed set s stored for later use.! Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: Movng the gear selector lever to poston N whle drvng also cancels cruse control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to poston N whle drvng, except to coast when the vehcle s n danger of skddng (e.g. on cy roads). Vehcles wth manual transmsson: The set cruse controlled speed s swtched off when declutchng exceeds four seconds durng downshftng a gear. The last stored speed s canceled when you turn off the engne.

253 Controls n detal Drvng systems Settng a hgher speed Lft cruse control lever to poston 1 and hold t up untl the desred speed s reached. Release cruse control lever. The new speed s set. Settng a lower speed Depress cruse control lever to poston 2 and hold t down untl the desred speed s reached. Depressng the accelerator pedal does not deactvate cruse control. After bref acceleraton (e.g. for passng), cruse control wll resume the last speed set. Release cruse control lever. The new speed s set. Fne adjustment n 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) ncrements Faster Brefly tp cruse control lever n drecton of arrow 1. Slower Vehcles wth automatc transmsson: When you use the cruse control lever to decelerate, the transmsson wll automatcally downshft f the engne s brakng power does not brake the vehcle suffcently. Brefly tp cruse control lever n drecton of arrow 2. Settng to last stored speed ( Resume functon) Warnng! Brefly push cruse control lever to poston 4. G The speed stored n memory should only be set agan f prevalng road condtons permt. Possble acceleraton or deceleraton dfferences arsng from returnng to preset speed could cause an accdent and/or serous njury to you and others. The cruse control resumes the last set speed. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. 251

254 Controls n detal Loadng Roof rack* Only mount the roof rack between the fastenng ponts (see arrows). Warnng! G Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehcle model to avod damage to the vehcle. Follow manufacturer s nstallaton nstructons. Secure the roof rack accordng to manufacturer s nstructons for nstallaton.! Load the roof rack n such a way that the vehcle cannot be damaged whle drvng. Make sure you can fully rase the tlt/sldng sunroof*. you can fully open the trunk. Sk sack* (Canada only) 1 Handle 2 Cover 3 Armrest Unfoldng and loadng Fold armrest 3 down (arrow). Pull handle 1 and swng cover 2 down. 252

255 Controls n detal Loadng 4 Hook and loop fastener 5 Button From trunk, slde sks nto sk sack. Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4. Pull sk sack nto passenger compartment and unfold. Open trunk ld. Press button 5. The flap opens downward. Warnng! G The sk sack s desgned for up to four pars of sks. Do not load the sk sack wth other objects. Always fasten the sk sack securely. In an accdent, an unfastened sk sack can cause njury to vehcle occupants. 253

256 Controls n detal Loadng 6 Strap Tghten strap 6 by pullng at the loose end (arrow) untl the sks n the sk sack are tghtly secured. 7 Hook 8 Eye Connect hook 7 to eye 8. Tghten strap by pullng at the loose end (arrow). Unloadng and foldng Loosen the straps. Dsconnect hook 7 from eye 8. Unload sks. Close flap n trunk. Fold and flatten sk sack lengthwse. Place folded sk sack nsde recess of backrest. Fasten hook and loop fastener. Close sk sack compartment cover. 254

257 Controls n detal Loadng Removng the sk sack You can remove the sk sack for cleanng or dryng. 1 Button 2 Sk sack frame 3 Flap Open trunk ld. Press button 1. The flap 3 opens downward. Press button 1 frmly untl sk sack frame 2 s released. Pull sk sack frame 2 wth sk sack out. Installng the sk sack Install the sk sack n the reverse order. Push sk sack frame 2 wth sk sack nward untl the sk sack frame snaps nto place. Close flap 3. Warnng! Close trunk ld. G Never drve vehcle wth trunk open whle the sk sack s removed. Deadly carbon monoxde (CO) gases may enter vehcle nteror, resultng n unconscousness and death. To prevent unauthorzed persons from accessng the trunk, always close the flap. Splt rear bench seat* To expand the cargo area, you can fold down the left and rght rear seat backrests. The two sectons can be folded down separately. Warnng! G When expandng the luggage area, always fold the seat cushons fully forward. Unless you are transportng cargo, the backrests must reman properly locked n the uprght poston. In an accdent, durng hard brakng or sudden maneuvers, loose tems wll be thrown around nsde the vehcle, and cause njury to vehcle occupants unless the tems are securely fastened n the vehcle. Always use the cargo te down rngs* ( page 258). 255

258 Controls n detal Loadng Foldng the backrest forward The release handle 1 s located n the trunk. Returnng the backrest to orgnal poston Pull release handle 2. Pull release handle 1. Fully retract and fold rearward head restrants ( page 110). Fold seat cushon 3 forward. Fold backrest 4 forward. Fold backrest 2 rearward untl t engages. Fold seat cushon 1 rearward untl t locks nto poston. 256

259 Controls n detal Loadng Warnng! G Loadng nstructons If the backrest s not locked nto poston, a red ndcator 3 wll be vsble. Check for secure lockng by pushng and pullng on the backrest. If a red ndcator s vsble wth the backrest up, then the backrest s not properly locked nto poston. Always lock backrest n ts uprght poston when rear seat bench s occuped, cargo s beng carred n the trunk, or the extended cargo compartment s not n use. Check for secure lockng by pushng and pullng on the backrest. In an accdent, durng hard brakng or sudden maneuvers, loose tems wll be thrown around nsde the vehcle, and cause njury to vehcle occupants unless the tems are securely fastened n the vehcle. To help avod personal njury durng a collson or sudden maneuver, exercse care when transportng cargo. To prevent unauthorzed persons from access to the trunk, always lock backrest n ts uprght poston. The total load weght ncludng vehcle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load lmt or vehcle capacty weght ndcated on the correspondng placard located on the drver s door B-pllar. The handlng characterstcs of a fully loaded vehcle depend greatly on the load dstrbuton. It s therefore recommended to load the vehcle accordng to the llustratons shown, wth the heavest tems beng placed towards the front of the vehcle. 257

260 Controls n detal Loadng Always place tems beng carred aganst front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possble. The heavest porton of the cargo should always be kept as low as possble snce t nfluences the handlng characterstcs of the vehcle. Warnng! G Always fasten tems beng carred as securely as possble. In an accdent, durng hard brakng or sudden maneuvers, loose tems wll be thrown around nsde the vehcle and can cause njury to vehcle occupants unless the tems are securely fastened n the vehcle. To help avod personal njury durng a collson or sudden maneuver, exercse care when transportng cargo. Never drve vehcle wth trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxde (CO) gases may enter vehcle nteror resultng n unconscousness and death. The trunk s the preferred place to carry objects. The enlarged cargo area should only be used for tems whch do not ft n the trunk alone. Cargo te-down rngs* The four cargo te-down rngs are located n the trunk. Cargo te-down rngs Carefully secure cargo by applyng even load on all rngs wth rope suffcent strength to hold down the cargo. Always follow loadng nstructons ( page 257). 258

261 Useful features Storage compartments Glove box Controls n detal Useful features Warnng! G To help avod personal njury durng a collson or sudden maneuver, exercse care when stowng objects n the vehcle. Put luggage or cargo n the trunk f possble. Do not ple luggage or cargo hgher than the seat backs. Do not place anythng on the shelf below the rear wndow. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Keep compartment lds closed. Ths wll help to prevent stored objects from beng thrown about and njurng vehcle occupants durng an accdent. 1 Glove box ld release 2 Glove box Openng the glove box Pull ld release 1. The glove box ld opens downward. Closng the glove box Push ld up to close. 1 Unlockng 2 Lockng Lockng the glove box Insert mechancal key ( page 383) nto the glove box lock and turn t to poston 2. Unlockng the glove box Turn mechancal key n the glove box lock to poston

262 Controls n detal Useful features Armrest storage compartments 1 Handle 2 Button, passenger sde 3 Button, drver s sde Openng storage compartment Pull handle 1 and lft armrest. Closng storage compartment Press armrest down untl t engages nto place. Openng telephone compartment Press button 3 on drver s sde or button 2 on passenger sde and lft armrest. Closng telephone compartment Press armrest down untl t engages nto place. Changng nclnaton of armrest 1 Handle Pull up on armrest. Lowerng armrest Pull handle 1 to lower armrest. 260

263 Controls n detal Useful features Armrest n the rear passenger compartment Pull the top of the armrest out and fold t down. Cup holders n front of seat armrest Warnng! G In order to help prevent spllng lquds on vehcle occupants, only use contaners that ft nto the cup holder. Use lds on open contaners and do not fll contaners to a heght where the contents, especally hot lquds, could spll durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent. When not n use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause njury to you or others when contacted durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent. Keep n mnd that objects placed n the cup holder may come loose durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent and be thrown around n the vehcle nteror. Objects thrown around n the vehcle nteror may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. Underneath the swvelng cup holder s another statonary cup holder. You can only use ths when the swvelng cup holder s pulled out and completely turned outward. Sldng out the swvelng cup holder Push button 1. The cup holder sldes upward. 261

264 Controls n detal Useful features Turnng the swvelng cup holder outward! No objects should be n the swvelng cup holder when the swvelng cup holder s slded upward. Otherwse the swvelng cup holder or the objects could be damaged. Turn the cup holder n the drecton of arrow 2 untl t engages. You can now use both cup holders. Turnng the swvelng cup holder nward and sldng t n Turn the cup holder n the drecton of arrow 3 untl t engages. Turn the cup holder n the drecton of arrow 4 untl t engages.! No objects should be n the statonary cup holder when the swvelng cup holder s turned nward and pushed n. Otherwse the swvelng cup holder or the objects could be damaged. Cup holder n rear seat armrest Warnng! G In order to help prevent spllng lquds on vehcle occupants, only use contaners that ft nto the cup holder. Use lds on open contaners and do not fll contaners to a heght where the contents, especally hot lquds, could spll durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent. When not n use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause njury to you or others when contacted durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent. Keep n mnd that objects placed n the cup holder may come loose durng brakng, vehcle maneuvers, or n an accdent and be thrown around n the vehcle nteror. Objects thrown around n the vehcle nteror may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. 262

265 Controls n detal Useful features Parcel net n front passenger footwell A small convenence parcel net s located n the front passenger footwell. It s for small and lght tems, such as road maps, mal, etc. Ashtrays Center console ashtray Warnng! G 1 Cup holder Openng cup holder Brefly press the front of cup holder 1. The cup holder sldes out slghtly. Pull out the cup holder untl t stops. Closng cup holder Slde cup holder 1 n untl t engages. Do not place heavy or fragle objects, or objects havng sharp edges, n the parcel net. In an accdent, durng hard brakng or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around nsde the vehcle, and cause njury to vehcle occupants. 1 Cover plate 2 Sldng button 3 Ashtray nsert Brefly press the bottom of cover plate 1. The cover plate opens automatcally. 263

266 Controls n detal Useful features Removng ashtray nsert Warnng! G Remove front ashtray only wth vehcle standng stll. Set the parkng brake to secure vehcle from movement. Move gear selector lever to poston N (manual transmsson: second gear). Wth gear selector lever n poston N (manual transmsson: second gear) turn off the engne. Renstallng ashtray nsert Push the ashtray nsert 3 down nto the retaner untl t engages. Push down cover plate 1 to close ashtray. The cover plate engages. Rear seat ashtray Removng ashtray nsert Push button 1 to dsengage ashtray nsert 2 and remove t. Renstallng ashtray nsert Push the ashtray nsert 2 down nto the retaner untl t engages. Push at top of cover 3 to close ashtray. Secure vehcle from movement by settng the parkng brake. Move the gear selector lever to poston N (manual transmsson: second gear). Now you have more room to take out the ashtray nsert. Push sldng button 2 to the rght. The ashtray nsert 3 sldes out slghtly. Remove the ashtray nsert. 1 Button 2 Ashtray nsert 3 Cover Pull at top of cover

267 Controls n detal Useful features Cgarette lghter Warnng! G Electrcal outlet n the rear passenger compartment 1 Cover plate 2 Cgarette lghter Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Brefly press the bottom of cover plate 1. The cover plate opens automatcally. Push n cgarette lghter 2. The cgarette lghter wll pop out automatcally when hot. Never touch the heatng element or sdes of the lghter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. When leavng the vehcle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch, take t wth you, and lock the vehcle. Do not leave chldren unattended n the vehcle, or wth access to an unlocked vehcle. Unsupervsed use of vehcle equpment may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury. The lghter socket can be used to accommodate electrcal accessores up to a maxmum 85 W. Push down cover plate 1 to close ashtray. The cover plate engages. 1 Electrcal outlet 2 Cover Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Pull at top of cover 2. Flp cover 1 to the left and nsert electrcal plug (cgarette lghter type). The electrcal outlet can be used to accommodate electrcal consumers (e.g. ar pump, auxlary lamps) up to a maxmum of 180 W. 265

268 Controls n detal Useful features Telephone* Warnng! Rado transmtters, such as a portable telephone or a ctzens band unt, should only be used nsde the vehcle f they are connected to an antenna that s nstalled on the outsde of the vehcle. The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for nformaton on the nstallaton of an approved external antenna. Refer to the rado transmtter operaton nstructons regardng use of an external antenna. 266 G Never operate rado transmtters equpped wth a bult-n or attached antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne s runnng. Dong so could lead to a malfuncton of the vehcle s electronc system, possbly resultng n an accdent and personal njury. Warnng! G Please do not forget that your prmary responsblty s to drve the vehcle. A drver s attenton to the road must always be hs/her prmary focus when drvng. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe locaton and stop before placng or takng a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone 1 whle drvng, please use the hands-free devce and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Some jursdctons prohbt the drver from usng a cellular telephone whle drvng a vehcle. Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpt Management and Data System) 1 f road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requrements. You can take and place telephone calls usng the s and t buttons on the steerng wheel. To carry out other telephone functons, use the control system ( page 158). See separate operatng manual for nstructons on how to use the telephone.

269 Controls n detal Useful features Tele Ad*! The ntal actvaton of the Tele Ad system may only be performed by completng the subscrber agreement and placng an acquantance call usng the button. Falure to complete ether of these steps wll result n a system that s not actvated. If you have any questons regardng actvaton, please call the Response Center at (n the USA) or (n Canada). The Tele Ad system (Telematc Alarm Identfcaton on Demand) The Tele Ad system conssts of three types of response: automatc and manual emergency roadsde assstance and nformaton The Tele Ad system s operatonal provdng that the vehcle s battery s charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage s avalable. The speaker volume of a Tele Ad call can be adjusted when usng the volume control on the multfuncton steerng wheel. To rase, press button æ and to lower, press button ç. The volume can also be adjusted usng the volume knob on your audo system or COMAND* head unt. To actvate, press the SOS button, the Roadsde Assstance button or the Informaton button, dependng on the type of response requred. The SOS button s located above the nteror rear vew mrror. The Roadsde Assstance button and the Informaton button are located below the center armrest cover. Shortly after the completon of your Tele Ad acquantance call, you wll receve a user ID and password. By vstng and selectng Tele Ad (USA only), you wll have access to account nformaton, remote door unlock and more. 267

270 Controls n detal Useful features The Tele Ad system utlzes the cellular network for communcaton and the GPS (Global Postonng System) satelltes for vehcle locaton. If ether of these sgnals are unavalable, the Tele Ad system may not functon and f ths occurs, assstance must be summoned by other means. System self-check Intally, after swtchng on gnton, malfunctons are detected and ndcated (the ndcator lamps n the SOS button, the Roadsde Assstance button and the Informaton button stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on). The message Tele Ad malfuncton. Drve to workshop appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Warnng! G If the ndcator lamps n the SOS button, n the Roadsde Assstance button and/or n the Informaton button reman llumnated constantly n red and/or the message Tele Ad malfuncton. Drve to workshop s dsplayed n the multfuncton dsplay after the system self-check, a malfuncton n the system has been detected. If a malfuncton s ndcated as outlned above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Emergency calls An emergency call s ntated automatcally followng an accdent n whch the emergency tensonng devces (ETDs) or ar bags deploy. An emergency call can also be ntated manually by openng the cover next to the nteror rear vew mrror labeled SOS, then brefly pressng the button located under the cover. See ( page 269) for nstructons on ntatng an emergency call manually. Once the emergency call s n progress, the ndcator lamp n the SOS button wll begn to flash. The message Connectng call appears n the multfuncton dsplay and the audo system s muted. When the connecton s establshed, the message Call connected appears n the multfuncton dsplay. All nformaton relevant to the emergency, such as the locaton of the vehcle (determned by the GPS satellte locaton system), vehcle model, dentfcaton number and color are generated. 268

271 Controls n detal Useful features A voce connecton between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehcle wll be establshed automatcally soon after the emergency call has been ntated. The Response Center wll attempt to determne more precsely the nature of the emergency provded they can speak to an occupant of the vehcle. The Tele Ad system s avalable f t has been actvated and s operatonal. Actvaton requres a subscrpton for montorng servces, connecton and cellular ar tme the relevant cellular phone network and GPS sgnals are avalable and pass the nformaton on to the Response Center Locaton of the vehcle on a map s only possble f the vehcle s able to receve sgnals from the GPS satellte network and pass the nformaton on to the Response Center. Warnng! G If the ndcator lamp n the SOS button s flashng contnuously and there was no voce connecton to the Response Center establshed, then the Tele Ad system could not ntate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network s not avalable). The message Call faled. appears n the multfuncton dsplay for approxmately ten seconds. Should ths occur, assstance must be summoned by other means. Intatng an emergency call manually 1 Cover 2 SOS button Brefly press on cover 1. The cover wll open. Press SOS button 2 brefly. The ndcator lamp n SOS button 2 wll flash untl the emergency call s concluded. Wat for a voce connecton to the Response Center. Close cover 1 after the emergency call s concluded. 269

272 Controls n detal Useful features Warnng! G If you feel at any way n jeopardy when n the vehcle (e.g. smoke or fre n the vehcle, vehcle n a dangerous road locaton), please do not wat for voce contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehcle and move to a safe locaton. The Response Center wll automatcally contact local emergency offcals wth the vehcle s approxmate locaton f they receve an automatc SOS sgnal and cannot make voce contact wth the vehcle occupants. Roadsde Assstance button Located below the center armrest cover s the Roadsde Assstance button. Press and hold button (for longer than two seconds). A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadsde Assstance dspatcher wll be ntated. The button wll flash whle the call s n progress. The message Connectng call wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay and the audo system s muted. When the connecton s establshed, the message Call connected appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The Tele Ad system wll transmt data generatng the vehcle dentfcaton number, model, color and locaton (subject to avalablty of cellular and GPS sgnals). A voce connecton between the Roadsde Assstance dspatcher and the occupants of the vehcle wll be establshed. Descrbe the nature of the need for assstance. The Mercedes-Benz Roadsde Assstance dspatcher wll ether dspatch a qualfed Mercedes-Benz techncan or arrange to tow your vehcle to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. For servces such as labor and/or towng, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadsde Assstance manual for more nformaton. The followng s only avalable n the USA: Sgn and Drve servces: Servces such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tre wth the vehcle spare tre are obtanable. 270

273 Controls n detal Useful features The ndcator lamp on the Roadsde Assstance button remans llumnated n red for approxmately ten seconds durng the system self-check after swtchng on gnton (together wth the SOS button and the Informaton button ). See system self-check ( page 268) when the ndcator lamp does not come on n red or stays on longer than approxmately ten seconds. If the ndcator lamp on the Roadsde Assstance button s flashng contnuously and there was no voce connecton to the Response Center establshed, then the Tele Ad system could not ntate a Roadsde Assstance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network s not avalable). The message Call faled. appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Informaton button Located below the center armrest cover s the Informaton button. Roadsde Assstance calls can be termnated usng the t button on the multfuncton steerng wheel or the respectve button for endng a telephone call on the audo system or COMAND* head unt. Press and hold button (for longer than two seconds). A call to the Customer Assstance Center wll be ntated. The button wll flash whle the call s n progress. The message Connectng call wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay and the audo system s muted. When the connecton s establshed, the message Call connected appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The Tele Ad system wll transmt data generatng the vehcle dentfcaton number, model, color and locaton (subject to avalablty of cellular and GPS sgnals). A voce connecton between the Customer Assstance Center representatve and the occupants of the vehcle wll be establshed. Informaton regardng the operaton of your vehcle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and servces s avalable to you. For more detals concernng the Tele Ad system, please vst and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only). 271

274 Controls n detal Useful features The ndcator lamp on the Informaton button remans llumnated n red for approxmately ten seconds durng the system self-check after swtchng on gnton (together wth the SOS button and the Roadsde Assstance button ). See system self-check ( page 268) when the ndcator lamp does not come on n red or stays on longer than approxmately ten seconds. If the ndcator lamp on the Informaton button s flashng contnuously and there was no voce connecton to the Response Center establshed, then the Tele Ad system could not ntate an Informaton call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network s not avalable). The message Call faled. appears n the multfuncton dsplay. Informaton calls can be termnated usng the t button on the multfuncton steerng wheel or the respectve button for endng a telephone call on the audo system or COMAND* head unt.! If the ndcator lamps do not start flashng after pressng one of the buttons or reman llumnated (n red) at any tme, the Tele Ad system has detected a malfuncton or the servce s not currently actve, and may not ntate a call. Vst your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at (n the USA) or (n Canada) as soon as possble. Upgrade scenaro An emergency call s possble even f other servces are actve.! If the ndcator lamp contnues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at (n the USA) or (n Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assstance at FOR-MERCedes ( ) n the USA or Customer Servce at n Canada. 272

275 Controls n detal Useful features The ndcator lamp n the respectve button flashes untl the call s concluded. Calls can only be termnated by a Response Center or Customer Assstance Center representatve except Roadsde Assstance and Informaton calls, whch can also be termnated by pressng button t on the multfuncton steerng wheel or the respectve button for endng a telephone call on the audo system or COMAND* head unt. When a Tele Ad call has been ntated, the audo system or the COMAND* system audo s muted and the selected mode (rado or CD) pauses. The optonal cellular phone (f nstalled) swtches off. If you must use ths phone, the vehcle must be parked. Dsconnect the coled cord and place the call. The COMAND* navgaton system (f engaged) wll contnue to run. The dsplay n the nstrument cluster s avalable for use, and spoken commands are only avalable by pressng the RPT button on the COMAND* unt. A pop-up wndow wll appear n the COMAND* dsplay to ndcate that a Tele Ad call s n progress. Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehcle unntentonally (e.g. SmartKey nsde vehcle), and the reserve SmartKey s not handy: Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at (n the USA) or (n Canada). You wll be asked to provde your password whch you provded when you completed the subscrber agreement. Then return to your vehcle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a mnmum of 20 seconds untl the SOS button s flashng. The message Connectng call appears n the multfuncton dsplay. As an alternatve, you may unlock the vehcle va Internet usng the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completon of your acquantance call. The Response Center wll then unlock your vehcle wth the remote door unlockng feature. 273

276 Controls n detal Useful features The remote door unlock feature s avalable f the relevant cellular phone network s avalable. The SOS button wll flash and the message Connectng call wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay to ndcate recept of the door unlock command. Once the vehcle s unlocked, a Response Center specalst wll attempt to establsh voce contact wth the vehcle occupants. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorzaton was receved by the Response Center, you must wat 15 mnutes before pullng the trunk recessed handle agan. 274 Stolen Vehcle Recovery servces In the event your vehcle was stolen: Report the ncdent to the polce. The polce wll ssue a numbered ncdent report. Pass ths number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along wth your password ssued to you when you subscrbed to the servce. The Response Center wll then attempt to covertly contact the vehcle s Tele Ad system. Once the vehcle s located, the Response Center wll contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehcle s locaton wll only be provded to law enforcement. When the ant-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call s ntated automatcally to the Response Center. See ant-theft alarm system* ( page 89) and tow-away alarm* ( page 91). Garage door opener* The bult-n remote control s capable of operatng up to three separately controlled devces, for example garage door openers, gate openers, or other devces compatble wth HomeLnk or some other systems. You can program the sgnal transmtter buttons.

277 Controls n detal Useful features Remote control ntegrated nto the nteror rear vew mrror 1 Indcator lamp Sgnal transmtter button 5 Hand-held transmtter button 6 Hand-held remote control transmtter (not part of the vehcle equpment) Warnng! G Before programmng the ntegrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the devce to prevent potental harm or damage. When programmng a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programmng a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the ntegrated remote control wth any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as requred by U.S. federal safety standards (ths ncludes any garage door opener model manufactured before Aprl 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - sgnalng the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Certan types of garage door openers are ncompatble wth the ntegrated opener. If you should experence dffcultes wth programmng the transmtter, contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assstance Center (n the USA only) at FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Servce (n Canada) at

278 Controls n detal Useful features USA only: Ths devce comples wth Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause harmful nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. Canada only: Ths devce comples wth RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operaton s subject to the followng two condtons: (1) Ths devce may not cause nterference, and (2) ths devce must accept any nterference receved, ncludng nterference that may cause undesred operaton of the devce. Any unauthorzed modfcaton to ths devce could vod the user s authorty to operate the equpment. Programmng or reprogrammng the ntegrated remote control Step 1: Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Step 2: If you have prevously programmed an ntegrated sgnal transmtter button and wsh to retan ts programmng, proceed to step 3. Otherwse, press and hold the two outer sgnal transmtter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when the ndcator lamp 1 begns to flash after approxmately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). Ths procedure erases any prevous settngs for all three channels and ntalzes the memory. If you later wsh to program a second and/or thrd hand-held transmtter to the remanng two sgnal transmtter buttons, do not repeat ths step and begn drectly wth step

279 Controls n detal Useful features Step 3: Hold the end of the hand-held remote control transmtter 6 of the devce you wsh to tran approxmately 2 to 5 n (5 to12 cm) away from the surface of the ntegrated remote control located on the nteror rear vew mrror, keepng the ndcator lamp 1 n vew. Step 4: Usng both hands, smultaneously press the hand-held transmtter button 5 and the desred ntegrated sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons untl completng step 5. The ndcator lamp 1 on the ntegrated remote control wll flash, frst slowly and then rapdly. Step 5: When the ndcator lamp 1 flashes rapdly, release both buttons. Step 6: The ndcator lamp 1 flashes the frst tme the sgnal transmtter button s programmed. If ths button has already been programmed, the ndcator lamp wll only start flashng after 20 seconds. Press and hold the just-traned ntegrated sgnal transmtter button and observe the ndcator lamp 1. If the ndcator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programmng s complete and your devce should actvate when the ntegrated sgnal transmtter button s pressed and released. Step 7: If the ndcator lamp 1 flashes rapdly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant lght, contnue wth programmng steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equpped wth the rollng code feature. To program the remanng two buttons, repeat the steps above startng wth step

280 Controls n detal Useful features Rollng code programmng To tran a garage door opener (or other rollng code devces) wth the rollng code feature, follow these nstructons after completng the Programmng porton (steps 1 through 6) of ths text. (A second person may make the followng tranng procedures qucker and easer.) Step 8: Locate tranng button on the garage door opener motor head unt. Exact locaton and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Dependng on manufacturer, the tranng button may also be referred to as learn or smart button. If there s dffculty locatng the transmttng button, refer to the garage door opener operator s manual. Step 9: Press tranng button on the garage door opener motor head unt. The tranng lght s actvated. You have 30 seconds to ntate the followng step. Step 10: Frmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed ntegrated sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 11: Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second tme to complete the tranng process. Some garage door openers (or other rollng code equpped devces) may requre you to perform ths procedure a thrd tme to complete the tranng. Step 12: Confrm the garage door operaton by pressng the programmed ntegrated sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 13: To program the remanng two buttons, repeat the steps above startng wth step 3. Gate operator/canadan programmng Canadan rado-frequency laws requre transmtter sgnals to tme-out (or qut) after several seconds of transmsson whch may not be long enough for the ntegrated sgnal transmtter to pck up the sgnal durng programmng. Smlar to ths Canadan law, some U.S. gate operators are desgned to tme-out n the same manner. 278

281 Controls n detal Useful features If you lve n Canada or f you are havng dffcultes programmng a gate operator (regardless of where you lve) by usng the programmng procedures, replace step 4 wth the followng: Step 4: Contnue to press and hold the ntegrated sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4) whle you press and re-press ( cycle ) your hand-held remote control transmtter 6 every two seconds untl the frequency sgnal has been learned. Upon successful tranng, the ndcator lamp 1 wll flash slowly and then rapdly after several seconds. Proceed wth programmng step 5 and step 6 to complete. Operaton of ntegrated remote control Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Select and press the approprate ntegrated sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4) to actvate the remote controlled devce. The ntegrated remote control transmtter contnues to send the sgnal as long as the button s pressed up to 20 seconds. Erasng the ntegrated remote control memory Swtch on gnton ( page 33). Smultaneously hold down the sgnal transmtter buttons 2 and 4, for approxmately 20 seconds, untl the ndcator lamp 1 flashes rapdly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. The codes of all three channels are erased. If you sell your vehcle, erase the codes of all three channels. 279

282 Controls n detal Useful features Reprogrammng a sngle ntegrated sgnal transmtter button To program a devce usng a sgnal transmtter button prevously traned, follow these steps: Press and hold the desred sgnal transmtter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button. The ndcator lamp wll begn to flash after 20 seconds. Wthout releasng the ntegrated sgnal transmtter button, proceed wth programmng startng wth step

283 Operaton The frst 1000 mles (1500 km) Drvng nstructons At the gas staton Engne compartment Tres and wheels Wnter drvng Mantenance Vehcle care 281

284 Operaton The frst 1000 mles (1500 km) In the Operaton secton you wll fnd detaled nformaton on operatng, mantanng and carng for your vehcle. The more cautously you treat your vehcle durng the break-n perod, the more satsfed you wll be wth ts performance later on. Drve your vehcle durng the frst 1000 mles (1500 km) at varyng but moderate vehcle and engne speeds. Durng ths perod, avod heavy loads (full throttle drvng) and excessve engne speeds (no more than 2 / 3 of maxmum rpm n each gear). Shft gears n a tmely manner. Avod acceleratng by kck-down. Do not attempt to slow the vehcle down by shftng to a lower gear usng the gear selector lever. Select postons 3, 2 or 1 only when drvng at moderate speeds (for hll drvng). Select C as the preferred shft program ( page 169) for the frst 1000 mles (1500 km). After 1000 mles (1500 km) you may gradually ncrease vehcle and engne speeds to the permssble maxmum. All of the above nstructons, as may apply to your vehcle type, also apply when drvng the frst 1000 mles (1500 km) after the engne or the rear dfferental has been replaced. Always obey applcable speed lmts. 282

285 Drvng nstructons Drve sensbly save fuel Drnkng and drvng Pedals Operaton Drvng nstructons Fuel consumpton, to a great extent, depends on drvng habts and operatng condtons. To save fuel you should: Keep tres at the recommended tre nflaton pressures. Remove unnecessary loads. Remove roof rack when not n use. Allow engne to warm up under low load use. Avod frequent acceleraton and deceleraton. Have all mantenance work performed at the ntervals specfed n the Mantenance Booklet and as requred by the mantenance servce dsplay. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Fuel consumpton s also ncreased by drvng n cold weather, n stop-and-go traffc, on short trps and n hlly area. Warnng! G Drnkng and drvng and/or takng drugs and drvng are very dangerous combnatons. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptons and judgement. The possblty of a serous or even fatal accdent are greatly ncreased when you drnk or take drugs and drve. Do not drnk or take drugs and drve or allow anyone to drve who has been drnkng or takng drugs. Warnng! Power assstance G Keep drver s foot area clear at all tmes. Objects stored n ths area may mpar pedal movement. Warnng! G Wth the engne not runnng, there s no power assstance for the brake and steerng systems. In ths case, t s mportant to keep n mnd that a consderably hgher degree of effort s necessary to brake and steer the vehcle. 283

286 Operaton Drvng nstructons Brakes Warnng! G After drvng n heavy ran for some tme wthout applyng the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the frst brakng acton may be somewhat reduced and ncreased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtan expected brakng effect. Mantan a safe dstance from vehcles n front. Restng your foot on the brake pedal wll cause excessve and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result n the brakes overheatng, thereby sgnfcantly reducng ther effectveness. It may not be possble to stop the vehcle n suffcent tme to avod an accdent. To help prevent brake dsk corroson after drvng on wet road surfaces (partcularly salted roads), t s advsable to brake the vehcle wth consderable force pror to parkng. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. If your brake system s normally only subject to moderate loads, you should occasonally test the effectveness of the brakes by applyng above-normal brakng pressure at hgher speeds. Ths wll also enhance the grp of the brake pads.! Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. Refer to the descrpton of the Brake Assst System (BAS) ( page 84). If the parkng brake s released and the brake warnng lamp n the nstrument cluster stays on, the brake flud level n the reservor s too low. Brake pad wear or a leak n the system may be the reason for low brake flud n the reservor. Have the brake system nspected mmedately. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. All checks and servce work on the brake system should be carred out by qualfed techncans only. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Only nstall brake pads and brake flud recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Warnng! G If other than recommended brake pads are nstalled, or other than recommended brake flud s used, the brakng propertes of the vehcle can be degraded to an extent that safe brakng s substantally mpared. Ths could result n an accdent. 284

287 Operaton Drvng nstructons! When drvng down long and steep grades, releve the load on the brakes by shftng nto a lower gear to use the engne s brakng power. Ths helps prevent overheatng of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. After hard brakng, t s advsable to drve on for some tme, rather than mmedately parkng, so that the ar stream wll cool down the brakes faster. Drvng off Apply the brakes to test them brefly after drvng off. Perform ths procedure only when the road s clear of other traffc. Warm up the engne smoothly. Do not place full load on the engne untl the operatng temperature has been reached. When startng off on a slppery surface, do not allow a drve wheel to spn for an extended perod wth the ESP swtched off. Dong so may cause serous damage to the drvetran whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty.! Smultaneously depressng the accelerator pedal and applyng the brake reduces engne performance and causes premature brake and drvetran wear. Parkng! Set the parkng brake whenever parkng or leavng the vehcle. In addton, move gear selector lever to poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). When parkng on hlls, always turn front wheels towards the road curb. Warnng! G Do not park ths vehcle n areas where combustble materals such as grass, hay or leaves can come nto contact wth the hot exhaust system, as these materals could be gnted and cause a vehcle fre. To reduce the rsk of personal njury as a result of vehcle movement, before turnng off the engne and leavng the vehcle always: Keep rght foot on brake pedal. Frmly depress parkng brake pedal. Move the gear selector lever to poston P (manual transmsson: frst or reverse gear). Slowly release brake pedal. When parked on an nclne, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch to poston 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Take the SmartKey wth you and lock the vehcle when leavng. 285

288 Operaton Drvng nstructons Tres Warnng! G If you feel a sudden sgnfcant vbraton or rde dsturbance, or you suspect that possble damage to your vehcle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warnng flashers, carefully slow down, and drve wth cauton to an area whch s a safe dstance from the road. Inspect the tres and the vehcle underbody for possble damage. If the vehcle or tres appear unsafe, have t towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tre dealer for repars. Treadwear ndcators (TWI) are requred by law. These ndcators are located n sx places on the tread crcumference and become vsble at a tread depth of approxmately 1 / 16 n (1.6 mm), at whch pont the tre s consdered worn and should be replaced. The treadwear ndcator appears as a sold band across the tread. Warnng! G Although the applcable federal motor vehcle safety laws consder a tre to be worn when the treadwear ndcators (TWI) become vsble at approxmately 1 / 16 n (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tres to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1 / 8 n (3 mm), the adheson propertes on a wet road are sharply reduced. Dependng upon the weather and/or road surface (condtons), the tre tracton vares wdely. Specfed tre nflaton pressures must be mantaned. Ths apples partcularly f the tres are subjected to hgh loads (e.g. hgh speeds, heavy loads, hgh ambent temperatures). Warnng! Hydroplanng G Do not drve wth a flat tre. A flat tre affects the ablty to steer or brake the vehcle. You may lose control of the vehcle. Contnued drvng wth a flat tre or drvng at hgh speed wth a flat tre wll cause excessve heat buld-up and possbly a fre. Dependng on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplanng may occur, even at low speeds and wth new tres. Reduce vehcle speed, avod track grooves n the road and apply brakes cautously n the ran. 286

289 Operaton Drvng nstructons Tre tracton The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or cy road s always lower than on a dry road. You should pay partcular attenton to the condton of the road whenever the outsde temperatures are close to the freezng pont. Warnng! G If ce has formed on the road, tre tracton wll be substantally reduced. Under such weather condtons, drve, steer and brake wth extreme cauton. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radal-ply tres wth a mnmum tread depth of approxmately 1 / 6 n (4 mm) on all four wheels for the wnter season to ensure normal balanced handlng characterstcs. On packed snow, they can reduce your stoppng dstance compared to summer tres. Stoppng dstance, however, s stll consderably greater than when the road s not covered wth snow or ce. Exercse approprate cauton.! Avod spnnng of a drve wheel. Ths may cause serous damage to the drvetran whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Tre speed ratng Regardless of the tre speed ratng, local speed lmts should be obeyed. Use prudent drvng speeds approprate to prevalng condtons. Warnng! G Even when permtted by law, never operate a vehcle at speeds greater than the maxmum speed ratng of the tres. Exceedng the maxmum speed for whch tres are rated can lead to sudden tre falure, causng loss of vehcle control and possbly resultng n an accdent and/or personal njury and possble death, for you and for others. 287

290 Operaton Drvng nstructons C 230 Kompressor (Canada only), C240, C2404MATIC, C320(USAonly), C3204MATIC Your vehcle s factory equpped wth H -rated tres, whch have a speed ratng of 130 mph (210 km/h). An electronc speed lmter prevents your vehcle from exceedng a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). C230KompressorSport, C320Sport Your vehcle s factory equpped wth W -rated tres, whch have a speed ratng of 168 mph (270 km/h). An electronc speed lmter prevents your vehcle from exceedng a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). 288 For nformaton on speed ratng for wnter tres, see Wnter tres ( page 332). For addtonal general nformaton on tre speed markngs on tre sdewall, see Tre speed ratng ( page 320). Wnter drvng nstructons The most mportant rule for slppery or cy roads s to drve sensbly and to avod abrupt acceleraton, brakng and steerng maneuvers. Do not use the cruse control system under such condtons. When the vehcle s n danger of skddng, move gear selector lever to poston N or n case of manual transmsson declutch. Try to keep the vehcle under control by correctve steerng acton. For nformaton on drvng wth snow chans, see Snow chans ( page 333). Warnng! G On slppery road surfaces, never downshft n order to obtan brakng acton. Ths could result n drve wheel slp and reduced vehcle control. Your vehcle s ABS wll not prevent ths type of control loss.

291 Operaton Drvng nstructons Road salts and chemcals can adversely affect brakng effcency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brakng effect. Depressng the brake pedal perodcally when travelng at length on salt-strewn roads can brng road-salt-mpared brakng effcency back to normal. If the vehcle s parked after beng drven on salt-treated roads, the brakng effcency should be tested as soon as possble after drvng s resumed. Warnng! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carryng out these brakng maneuvers. Warnng! G If the vehcle becomes stuck n snow, make sure snow s kept clear of the exhaust ppe and from around the vehcle wth the engne runnng. Otherwse, deadly carbon monoxde (CO) gases may enter vehcle nteror resultng n unconscousness and death. To assure suffcent fresh ar ventlaton, open a wndow slghtly on the sde of the vehcle not facng the wnd. Warnng! G The outsde temperature ndcator s not desgned to serve as an ce-warnng devce and s therefore unsutable for that purpose. Indcated temperatures just above the freezng pont do not guarantee that the road surface s free of ce. For more nformaton, see Wnter drvng ( page 332). Standng water! Do not drve through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before drvng through water, determne ts depth. Never accelerate before drvng nto water. The bow wave could force water nto the engne and auxlary equpment, thus damagng them. If you must drve through standng water, drve slowly to prevent water from enterng the passenger compartment or the engne compartment. Water n these areas could cause damage to electrcal components or wrng of the engne or transmsson, or could result n water beng ngested by the engne through the ar ntake causng severe nternal engne damage. Any such damage s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. 289

292 Operaton Drvng nstructons Passenger compartment Warnng! Drvng abroad G Always fasten tems beng carred as securely as possble. In an accdent, durng hard brakng or sudden maneuvers, loose tems wll be thrown around nsde the vehcle, and cause njury to vehcle occupants unless the tems are securely fastened n the vehcle. The trunk s the preferred place to carry objects. Abroad, there s an extensve Mercedes-Benz servce network at your dsposal. If you plan to drve nto areas whch are not lsted n the ndex of your Mercedes-Benz Center drectory, you should request pertnent nformaton from an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Control and operaton of rado transmtters COMAND*, rado and telephone* Warnng! G Please do not forget that your prmary responsblty s to drve the vehcle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpt Management and Data System), rado or telephone 1 f road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requrements Telephones* and two-way rados Warnng! G Never operate rado transmtters equpped wth a bult-n or attached antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne s runnng. Dong so could lead to a malfuncton of the vehcle s electronc system, possbly resultng n an accdent and personal njury. Rado transmtters, such as a portable telephone or a ctzens band unt should only be used nsde the vehcle f they are connected to an antenna that s nstalled on the outsde of the vehcle. Refer to the rado transmtter operaton nstructons regardng use of an external antenna. 290

293 Operaton Drvng nstructons Catalytc converter Your Mercedes-Benz s equpped wth monolthc-type catalytc converters, an mportant element n conjuncton wth the oxygen sensors to acheve substantal control of the pollutants n the exhaust emssons. Keep your vehcle n proper operatng condton by followng our recommended mantenance nstructons as outlned n your Mantenance Booklet.! To prevent damage to the catalytc converters, only use premum unleaded gasolne n ths vehcle. Any notceable rregulartes n engne operaton should be repared promptly. Otherwse, excessve unburned fuel may reach the catalytc converter, causng t to overheat and potentally start a fre. Warnng! G As wth any vehcle, do not dle, park or operate ths vehcle n areas where combustble materals such as grass, hay or leaves can come nto contact wth the hot exhaust system, as these materals could be gnted and cause a vehcle fre. Emsson control Certan systems of the engne serve to keep the toxc components of the exhaust gases wthn permssble lmts requred by law. These systems, of course, wll functon properly only when mantaned strctly accordng to factory specfcatons. Any adjustments on the engne should, therefore, be carred out only by qualfed Mercedes-Benz Center authorzed techncans. Engne adjustments should not be altered n any way. Moreover, the specfed servce jobs must be carred out regularly accordng to Mercedes-Benz servcng requrements. For detals refer to the Mantenance Booklet. 291

294 Operaton Drvng nstructons Warnng! G Inhalaton of exhaust gas s hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contans carbon monoxde, and nhalng t can cause unconscousness and lead to death. Do not run the engne n confned areas (such as a garage) whch are not properly ventlated. If you thnk that exhaust gas fumes are enterng the vehcle whle drvng, have the cause determned and corrected mmedately. If you must drve under these condtons, drve only wth at least one wndow fully open at all tmes. Coolant temperature Durng severe operatng condtons and stop-and-go cty traffc, the coolant temperature may rse close to approxmately 248 F (120 C). The engne should not be operated wth the coolant temperature over 248 F (120 C). Dong so may cause serous engne damage whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Warnng! G Drvng when your engne s badly overheated can cause some fluds, whch may have leaked nto the engne compartment, to catch fre. You could be serously burned. Steam from an overheated engne can cause serous burns and can occur just by openng the hood. Stay away from the engne f you see or hear steam comng from t. Turn off the engne, get out of the vehcle and do not stand near the vehcle untl the engne has cooled down. 292

295 At the gas staton Refuelng Warnng! G Gasolne s hghly flammable and posonous. It burns volently and can cause serous njury. Whenever you are around gasolne, avod nhalng fumes and skn contact, extngush all smokng materals. Never allow sparks, flame or smokng materals near gasolne! Warnng! G Flexble Fuel Vehcles only (dentfed by a label readng Premum gasolne or E85 only! on fuel fller flap): Ethanol fuel (E85) and ts vapors are hghly flammable, posonous and burn easly. Ethanol fuel can cause serous njures f gnted or f you come nto contact wth t or nhale fumes of t. Avod nhalaton of ethanol fumes and skn contact wth ethanol. Extngush all open flames before fuelng. Never smoke or create sparks close to ethanol. Operaton At the gas staton The fuel fller flap s located on the rght-hand sde of the vehcle towards the rear. Lockng/unlockng the vehcle wth the SmartKey automatcally locks/unlocks the fuel fller flap. 1 To open the fuel fller flap 2 To nsert the fuel fller cap 3 Tre nflaton pressure table Turn the engne off by turnng the SmartKey to poston 0. Remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. 293

296 Operaton At the gas staton Open the fuel fller flap by pushng at the pont ndcated by arrow 1. The fuel fller flap sprngs open. Turn fuel cap counterclockwse and hold on to t untl possble pressure s released. Take off cap and set t n drecton of arrow 2 n the recess on the fuel fller flap. To prevent fuel vapors from escapng nto open ar, fully nsert fller nozzle unt. Only fll your tank untl the fller nozzle unt cuts out do not top up or overfll. Warnng! Replace fuel cap by turnng t clockwse. You wll hear when fuel cap s tghtened. Close fuel fller flap. G Overfllng of the fuel tank may create pressure n the system whch could cause a gas dscharge. Ths could cause the gas to spray back out when removng the fuel pump nozzle, whch could cause personal njury. Only use premum unleaded gasolne wth a mnmum Posted Octane Ratng of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Informaton on gasolne qualty can normally be found on the fuel pump. More nformaton on gasolne can be found n the Factory Approved Servce Products pamphlet. Flexble Fuel Vehcles are dentfed by a label readng Premum gasolne or E85 only! on fuel fller flap. For more nformaton, see Flexble Fuel Vehcles ( page 435). Leavng the engne runnng and the fuel cap open can cause the ú malfuncton ndcator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfuncton ndcator lamp (Canada only) to llumnate. For more nformaton, see Practcal hnts ( page 346) and ( page 347). 294

297 Operaton At the gas staton Check regularly and before a long trp 1 Coolant 2 Brake flud (fuse box cover removed) 3 Wndsheld washer and headlamp cleanng system* Openng the hood, see ( page 296). Coolant For normal replenshng, use water (potable water qualty). For more nformaton, see Coolant level ( page 301) and see Fuels, coolants, lubrcants, etc. ( page 431). Brake flud! If you fnd that the brake flud n the brake flud reservor has fallen to the mnmum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thckness and leaks mmedately. Notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center mmedately. Do not add brake flud as ths wll not solve the problem. For more nformaton, see Practcal hnts ( page 345). Removng fuse box cover ( page 414). Wndsheld washer and headlamp cleanng system* For more nformaton on fllng up the washer reservor, see Wndsheld washer system and headlamp cleanng system* ( page 303). Engne ol level For more nformaton on engne ol level, see Engne ol ( page 297). Vehcle lghtng Check functon and cleanlness. For more nformaton on replacng lght bulbs, see Replacng bulbs ( page 390). Exteror lamp swtch ( page 117). Tre nflaton pressure More nformaton on tre nflaton pressure ( page 315). 295

298 Operaton Engne compartment Hood Warnng! G Do not pull the release lever whle the vehcle s n moton. Otherwse the hood could be forced open by passng ar flow. Openng The hood lock release lever s located to the left of the steerng wheel under the dashboard. Pull lever 1 downwards. The hood s unlocked and handle 2 wll extend out of the radator grlle.! To avod damage to the wndsheld wpers or hood, never open the hood f the wper arms are folded forward away from the wndsheld. 2 Handle for openng the hood Pull handle 2 to ts stop out of radator grlle. Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on the handle) and then release t. The hood wll be automatcally held open at shoulder heght by gas-flled struts. Warnng! G To help prevent personal njury, stay clear of movng parts when the hood s open and the engne s runnng. Make sure the hood s properly closed before drvng. When closng the hood, use extreme cauton not to catch hands or fngers. The radator fan may contnue to run for approxmately 30 seconds or even restart after the engne has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. 1 Hood lock release lever 296

299 Operaton Engne compartment Warnng! G If you see flames or smoke comng from the engne compartment, or f the coolant temperature gauge ndcates that the engne s overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehcle and do not open the hood untl the engne has cooled. If necessary, call the fre department. Warnng! G The engne s equpped wth a transstorzed gnton system. Because of the hgh voltage t s dangerous to touch any components (gnton cols, spark plug sockets, dagnostc socket) of the gnton system wth the engne runnng whle startng the engne f gnton s on and the engne s turned manually Closng Warnng! G Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. Let the hood drop from a heght of approxmately 1ft (30cm). The hood wll lock audbly. Check to make sure the hood s fully closed. If you can rase the hood at a pont above the headlamps, then t s not properly closed. Open t agan and let t drop wth somewhat greater force. Engne ol The amount of ol your engne needs wll depend on a number of factors, ncludng drvng style. Hgher ol consumpton can occur when the vehcle s new the vehcle s drven frequently at hgher engne speeds Engne ol consumpton checks should only be made after the vehcle break-n perod. Do not use any specal lubrcant addtves, as these may damage the drve assembles. Usng specal addtves not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. More nformaton on ths subject s avalable at any Mercedes-Benz Center. 297

300 Operaton Engne compartment Checkng engne ol level wth the control system When checkng the ol level the vehcle must be parked on level ground wth the engne at operatng temperature, the vehcle must have been statonary for at least fve mnutes wth the engne turned off wth the engne not at operatng temperature yet, the vehcle must have been statonary for at least 30 mnutes wth the engne turned off To check the engne ol level va the multfuncton dsplay, do the followng: Swtch on gnton ( page 33). The standard dsplay ( page 129) should appear n the multfuncton dsplay. Press button k or j on the steerng wheel untl the followng message s seen n the multfuncton dsplay: One of the followng messages wll subsequently appear n the ndcator: Engne ol level OK Add 1.0 qt engne ol for max. ol level (Canada: 1.0 l) Add 1.5 qts engne ol for max. ol level (Canada: 1.5 l) Add 2.0 qts engne ol for max. ol level (Canada: 2.0 l) If you want to nterrupt the checkng procedure, press the k or j button on the multfuncton steerng wheel. If necessary, add engne ol. For addng engne ol see ( page 299). More nformaton on engne ol can be found n the Techncal data secton ( page 431) and ( page 433). Other dsplay messages If the SmartKey s not turned to poston 2 n the starter swtch, the followng message wll appear: Swtch gnton on to check engne ol level Swtch on gnton ( page 33). 298

301 Operaton Engne compartment If you see the message: Observe watng tme If engne s at operatng temperature, wat fve mnutes before repeatng check procedure. If engne s not at operatng temperature yet, wat 30 mnutes before repeatng check procedure. If you see the message: Engne ol level Not when engne on Turn off the engne. If the engne s at operatng temperature, wat fve mnutes before checkng ol. If the engne s not at operatng temperature yet, you must wat 30 mnutes before checkng ol. If there s excess engne ol wth the engne at operatng temperature, the followng message wll appear: Engne ol level Reduce ol level Have excess ol sphoned or draned off. Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center.! Excess ol must be sphoned or draned off. It could cause damage to the engne and catalytc converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. More nformaton on messages n the dsplay concernng engne ol can be found n the Practcal hnts secton ( page 368) and ( page 369). Addng engne ol! Only use approved engne ols and ol flters requred for vehcles wth Mantenance System (U.S. vehcles) or FSS (Canada vehcles). For a lstng of approved engne ols and ol flters, refer to the Factory Approved Servce Products pamphlet n your vehcle lterature portfolo, or contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Usng engne ols and ol flters of specfcaton other than those expressly requred for the Mantenance System (U.S. vehcles) or FSS (Canada vehcles), or changng of ol and ol flter at change ntervals longer than those called for by the Mantenance System (U.S. vehcles) or FSS (Canada Vehcles) wll result n engne damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. 299

302 Operaton Engne compartment C 230 Kompressor (all models) 1 Fller cap Unscrew fller cap 1 from fller neck. Add engne ol as requred. Be careful not to overfll wth ol. Be careful not to spll any ol when addng. Avod envronmental damage caused by ol enterng the ground or water. Screw fller cap 1 back on fller neck. C 240 (all models) and C 320 (all models) 1 Fller cap! Excess ol must be sphoned or draned off. It could cause damage to the engne and catalytc converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Unscrew fller cap 1 from fller neck. Add engne ol as requred. Be careful not to overfll wth ol. Be careful not to spll any ol when addng. Avod envronmental damage caused by ol enterng the ground or water.! Excess ol must be sphoned or draned off. It could cause damage to the engne and catalytc converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Screw fller cap 1 back on fller neck. More nformaton on engne ol can be found n the Techncal data secton ( page 431) and ( page 433). Transmsson flud level The transmsson flud level does not need to be checked. If you notce transmsson flud loss or gear shftng malfunctons, have an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmsson. 300

303 Operaton Engne compartment Coolant level The engne coolant s a mxture of water and antcorroson/antfreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehcle must be parked on level ground and the engne must be cool. The coolant expanson tank s located on the passenger sde of the engne compartment. Warnng! G In order to avod any possbly serous burns: Use extreme cauton when openng the hood f there are any sgns of steam or coolant leakng from the coolng system, or f the coolant temperature gauge ndcates that the coolant s overheated. Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservor f coolant temperature s above 158 F (70 C). Allow engne to cool down before removng cap. The coolant reservor contans hot flud and s under pressure. Usng a rag, slowly open the cap approxmately 1 / 2 turn to releve excess pressure. If opened mmedately, scaldng hot flud and steam wll be blown out under pressure. Do not spll antfreeze on hot engne parts. Antfreeze contans ethylene glycol whch may burn f t comes nto contact wth hot engne parts. 1 Coolant expanson tank 2 Cap Usng a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approxmately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure. Contnue turnng the cap to the left and remove t. The coolant level s correct f the level for cold coolant: reaches the black top part of the reservor for warm coolant: s approx. 0.6 n (1.5 cm) hgher Add coolant as requred. Replace and tghten cap. For more nformaton on coolant, see Coolants ( page 437). 301

304 Operaton Engne compartment Battery Your vehcle s battery s located n the engne compartment on the rght hand sde ( page 404). The battery should always be suffcently charged n order to acheve ts rated servce lfe. Refer to Mantenance Booklet for battery mantenance ntervals. If you use your vehcle mostly for short-dstance trps, you wll need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacng the battery, always use batteres approved by Mercedes-Benz. If you do not ntend to operate your vehcle for an extended perod of tme, consult an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center about steps you need to observe. GObserve all safety nstructons and precautons when handlng automotve batteres. ARsk of exploson D Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. B Battery acd s caustc. Do not allow t to come nto contact wth skn, eyes or clothng. In case t does, mmedately flush affected area wth clear water and seek medcal help f necessary. E Wear C Keep F Follow eye protecton. chldren away. the nstructons n ths Operator s Manual. Batteres contan materals that can harm the envronment f dsposed of mproperly. Recyclng of batteres s the preferred method of dsposal. Many states requre sellers of batteres to accept old batteres for recyclng. 302

305 Operaton Engne compartment Wndsheld washer system and headlamp cleanng system* The wndsheld washer reservor s located n the engne compartment. 1 Washer flud reservor cap Flud for the wndsheld washer system and the headlamp cleanng system* s suppled from the wndsheld washer reservor. It has a capacty of: 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) n vehcles wthout headlamp cleanng system* 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) n vehcles wth headlamp cleanng system* Durng all seasons, add MB Wndsheld Washer Concentrate S to water. Premx the wndsheld washer flud n a sutable contaner. Refll the reservor wth MB Wndsheld Washer Concentrate and water (or commercally avalable premxed wndsheld washer solvent/antfreeze, dependng on ambent temperatures). Always use washer solvent/antfreeze where temperatures may fall below the freezng pont. Falure to do so could result n damage to the washer system/reservor.! Only use washer flud whch s sutable for plastc lenses. Improper washer flud can damage the plastc lenses of the headlamps. Warnng! G Washer solvent/antfreeze s hghly flammable. Do not spll washer solvent/antfreeze on hot engne parts, because t may gnte and burn. You could be serously burned. For more nformaton, see Wndsheld washer and headlamp cleanng system* ( page 439). 303

306 Operaton Tres and wheels See an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for nformaton on tested and recommended rms and tres for summer and wnter operaton. They can also offer advce concernng tre servce and purchase. Warnng! 304 G Replace rms or tres wth the same desgnaton, manufacturer and type as shown on the orgnal part. See an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for further nformaton. If ncorrectly szed rms and tres are mounted: The wheel brakes or suspenson components can be damaged. The operatng clearance of the wheels and the tres may no longer be correct. Warnng! G Worn, old tres can cause accdents. If the tre tread s badly worn, or f the tres have sustaned damage, replace them. When replacng rms, only use genune Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specfed for the partcular rm type. Falure to do so can result n the bolts loosenng and possbly an accdent. Retreaded tres are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, snce prevous damage cannot always be recognzed on retreads. The operatng safety of the vehcle cannot be assured when such tres are used. Important gudelnes Only use sets of tres and rms of the same type and make. Tres must be of the correct sze for the rm. Break n new tres for approxmately 60 mles (100 km) at moderate speeds. Regularly check the tres and rms for damage. Dented or bent rms can cause tre nflaton pressure loss and damage to the tre beads. If vehcle s heavly loaded, check tre nflaton pressure and correct as requred. Do not allow your tres to wear down too far. Adheson propertes on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1 / 8 n (3 mm). When replacng ndvdual tres, you should mount new tres on the front wheels frst (on vehcles wth same-szed wheels all around).

307 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre care and mantenance Warnng! G Regularly check the tres for damage. Damaged tres can cause tre nflaton pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehcle. Worn, old tres can cause accdents. If the tre tread s badly worn, or f the tres have sustaned damage, replace them. Regularly check your tre nflaton pressure at least once a month. For more nformaton on checkng tre nflaton pressure see Recommended tre nflaton pressure ( page 313). Tre nspecton Every tme you check your tre nflaton pressure, you should also nspect your tres for wear and damage for the followng: excessve treadwear ( page 306) cord or fabrc showng through the tre s rubber bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks, or splts n the tread or sde of the tre Replace the tre f you fnd any of the above condtons. Make sure you also nspect the spare tre perodcally for condton and tre nflaton pressure. Spare tres wll age and become worn over tme even f never used, and thus should be nspected and replaced when necessary. Lfe of tre The servce lfe of a tre s dependent upon varyng factors ncludng but not lmted to: Drvng style Tre nflaton pressure Dstance drven Warnng! G Tres and spare tre should be replaced after sx years, regardless of the remanng tread. 305

308 Operaton Tres and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tres to wear down too far. Adheson propertes on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1 / 8 n (3 mm). Treadwear ndcators (TWI) are requred by law. These ndcators are located n sx places on the tread crcumference and become vsble at a tread depth of approxmately 1 / 16 n (1.6 mm), at whch pont the tre s consdered worn and should be replaced. Recommended mnmum tre tread depth: Summer tres 1 / 8 n (3 mm) Wnter tres 1 / 6 n (4 mm) Warnng! G Although the applcable federal motor safety laws consder a tre to be worn when the treadwear ndcators (TWI) become vsble at approxmately 1 / 16 n (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tres to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1 / 8 n (3 mm), the adheson propertes on a wet road are sharply reduced. Dependng upon the weather and/or road surface (condtons), the tre tracton vares wdely. 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indcator) The treadwear ndcator appears as a sold band across the tread. Storng tres! Keep unmounted tres n a cool, dry place wth as lttle exposure to lght as possble. Protect tres from contact wth ol, grease and gasolne. Cleanng tres! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tres. The ntense jet of water can result n damage to the tre. Always replace a damaged tre. 306

309 Operaton Tres and wheels Drecton of rotaton Undrectonal tres offer added advantages, such as better hydroplanng performance. To beneft, however, you must make sure the tres rotate n the drecton specfed. An arrow on the sdewall ndcates the ntended drecton of rotaton (spnnng) of the tre. Spare wheels may be mounted aganst the drecton of rotaton (spnnng) even wth a undrectonal tre for temporary use only untl the regular drve wheel has been repared or replaced. Always observe and follow applcable temporary use restrctons and speed lmtatons ndcated on the spare wheel. Loadng the vehcle Two labels on your vehcle show how much weght t may properly carry. The Tre and Loadng Informaton placard (Example A) or the Vehcle Tre Informaton placard (Example B) can be found on the drver s door B-pllar. Ths placard tells you mportant nformaton about the number of people that can be n the vehcle and the total weght that can be carred n the vehcle. It also contans nformaton on the proper sze and recommended tre nflaton pressures for the orgnal equpment tres on your vehcle. The Certfcaton label, also found on the drver s door B-pllar tells you about the gross weght capacty of your vehcle, called the Gross Vehcle Weght Ratng (GVWR). The GVWR ncludes the weght of the vehcle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certfcaton label also tells you about the front and rear axle weght capacty, called the Gross Axle Weght Ratng (GAWR). The GAWR s the total allowable weght that can be carred by a sngle axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for ether the front axle or rear axle. 307

310 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre and Loadng Informaton Placard (Example A) Warnng! G 1 Drver s door B-pllar Followng s a dscusson on how to work wth the nformaton contaned on the two placards wth regards to loadng your vehcle. Do not overload the tres by exceedng the specfed load lmt or vehcle capacty weght as ndcated on the placard on the drver s door B-pllar. Overloadng the tres can overheat them, possbly causng a blowout. Overloadng the tres can also result n handlng or steerng problems, or brake falure. Your vehcle s equpped wth ether the Tre and Loadng Informaton placard (Example A) or the Vehcle Tre Informaton placard (Example B). Data shown on placard examples s for llustraton purposes only. Load lmt data s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n the llustratons below. Refer to placard on vehcle for actual data specfc to your vehcle. 1 Load lmt nformaton on the Tre and Loadng Informaton placard The placard showng the load lmt nformaton s located on the drver s door B-pllar. If your vehcle s equpped wth the Tre and Loadng Informaton placard (Example A), locate the statement The combned weght of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX klograms or XXX lbs. on ths placard. The combned weght of all occupants, cargo/luggage and traler tongue load (f applcable) should never exceed the weght referenced n that statement. 308

311 Operaton Tres and wheels Placard (Example B) 1 Load lmt nformaton on the Vehcle Tre Informaton placard The placard showng the load lmt nformaton s located on the drver s door B-pllar. If your vehcle s equpped wth the Vehcle Tre Informaton placard (Example B), locate the headng Vehcle Capacty Weght on ths placard. The combned weght of all occupants, cargo/luggage and traler tongue (f applcable) should never exceed the weght lsted next to vehcle capacty weght. Seatng capacty The seatng capacty gves you mportant nformaton on the number of occupants that can be n the vehcle. Observe front and rear seatng capacty. Your vehcle s equpped wth ether placard Example A or placard Example B located on the drver s door B-pllar ( page 308). Data shown on placard examples s for llustraton purposes only. Seatng data s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n the llustratons below. Refer to placard on vehcle for actual data specfc to your vehcle. Placard (Example A) 1 Seatng capacty Placard (Example B) 1 Seatng capacty 309

312 Operaton Tres and wheels Steps for determnng correct load lmt The followng steps have been developed as requred of all manufacturers under Ttle 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulatons, Part 575 pursuant to the Natonal Traffc and Motor Vehcle Safety Act of Step 1 (Vehcles equpped wth placard Example A) Locate the statement The combned weght of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehcle s placard. Step 1 (Vehcles equpped wth placard Example B) Locate the headng Vehcle Capacty Weght on your vehcle s placard. Step 2 Determne the combned weght of the drver and passengers that wll be rdng n your vehcle. Step 3 Subtract the combned weght of the drver and passengers from XXX klograms or XXX lbs. Step 4 The resultng fgure equals the avalable amount of cargo and luggage load capacty. For example, f the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there wll be fve 150 lbs passengers n your vehcle, the amount of avalable cargo and luggage load capacty s 650 lbs ( (5 x150) = 650 lbs). Step 5 Determne the combned weght of luggage and cargo beng loaded on the vehcle. That weght may not safely exceed the avalable cargo and luggage load capacty calculated n step 4. Step 6 (f applcable) If your vehcle wll be towng a traler, load from your traler wll be transferred to your vehcle. Consult ths manual to determne how ths reduces the avalable cargo and luggage load capacty of your vehcle ( page 312). The followng table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capactes wth varyng seatng confguratons and number and sze of occupants. The followng examples use a load lmt of 1500 lbs. Ths s for llustraton purposes only. Make sure you are usng the actual load lmt for your vehcle stated on the vehcle s placard ( page 308). 310

313 Operaton Tres and wheels Example Combned weght lmt of occupants and cargo from placard Number of occupants (drver and passengers) The hgher the weght of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacty s avalable. For more nformaton, see Traler tongue load ( page 312). Seatng confguraton lbs 5 front: 2 rear: lbs 3 front: 1 rear: 2 Occupants weght Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 140 lbs Occupant 5: 120 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs Combned weght of all occupants Avalable cargo/luggage and traler tongue weght (total load lmt or vehcle capacty weght from placard mnus combned weght of all occupants) 750 lbs 1500 lbs lbs = 750 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs lbs = 960 lbs lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs lbs = 1350 lbs 311

314 Operaton Tres and wheels Certfcaton label Even after careful determnaton of the combned weght of all occupants, cargo and the traler tongue load (f applcable) ( page 312) as to not exceed the permssble load lmt, you must make sure that your vehcle never exceeds the Gross Vehcle Weght Ratng (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weght Ratng (GAWR) for ether the front or rear axle. You can obtan the GVWR and GAWR from the Certfcaton label. The Certfcaton Label can be found on the drver s door B-pllar, see Techncal data ( page 420). Gross Vehcle Weght Ratng (GVWR): The total weght of the vehcle, all occupants, all cargo, and the traler tongue load ( page 312) must never exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weght Ratng (GAWR): The total allowable weght that can be carred by a sngle axle (front or rear). To assure that your vehcle does not exceed the maxmum permssble weght lmts (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehcle (ncludng drver, passengers and all cargo and, f applcable, traler fully loaded) weghed on a sutable commercal scale. Traler tongue load The tongue load of any traler s an mportant weght to measure because t affects the load you can carry n your vehcle. If a traler s towed, the tongue load must be added to the weght of all occupants rdng and any cargo you are carryng n the vehcle. The tongue load typcally s ten percent of the traler weght and everythng loaded n t. Your Mercedes-Benz has been desgned prmarly to carry passengers and ther cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend traler towng wth your vehcle. 312

315 Operaton Tres and wheels Recommended tre nflaton pressure Warnng! G Follow recommended tre nflaton pressures. Do not undernflate tres. Undernflated tres wear excessvely and/or unevenly, adversely affect handlng and fuel economy, and are more lkely to fal from beng overheated. Do not overnflate tres. Overnflated tres can adversely affect handlng and rde comfort, wear unevenly, ncrease stoppng dstance, and result n sudden deflaton (blowout) because they are more lkely to become punctured or damaged by road debrs, potholes etc. Your vehcle s equpped wth ether the Tre and Loadng Informaton placard (Example A) or the Vehcle Tre Informaton placard (Example B) located on the drver s door B-pllar ( page 308). The tre nflaton pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tres. The tres can be consdered cold f the vehcle has been parked for at least three hours or drven less than one mle (1.6 km). Follow recommended cold tre nflaton pressures lsted on placard. Keepng the tres properly nflated provdes the best handlng, tread lfe and rdng comfort. In addton to the tre placard on the drver s door B-pllar, also consult the fuel fller flap for any addtonal nformaton pertanng to specal drvng stuatons. For more nformaton, see Important notes on tre nflaton pressure ( page 314). Data shown on placard examples s for llustraton purposes only. Tre data s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n the llustratons below. Refer to placard on vehcle for actual data specfc to your vehcle. 313

316 Operaton Tres and wheels Placard (Example A) Placard (Example B) Important notes on tre nflaton pressure Warnng! G 1 Tre and Loadng Informaton placard wth recommended cold tre nflaton pressures Placard (Example A) lsts the recommended cold tre nflaton pressures for maxmum loaded vehcle weght. The tre nflaton pressures lsted apply to the tres nstalled as orgnal equpment. 1 Vehcle Tre Informaton placard wth recommended cold tre nflaton pressures Placard (Example B) lsts the recommended cold tre nflaton pressures for maxmum loaded vehcle weght. The tre nflaton pressures lsted apply to the tres nstalled as orgnal equpment. Placard (Example B) may lst recommended cold tre nflaton pressures for dfferent vehcle loads. If the tre nflaton pressure repeatedly drops: Check the tres for punctures from foregn objects. Check to see whether ar s leakng from the valves or from around the rm. Tre temperature and tre nflaton pressure are also ncreased whle drvng, dependng on the drvng speed and the tre load. If you wll be drvng your vehcle at hgh speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or hgher, where t s legal and condtons allow, consult the placard on the nsde of the fuel fller flap on how to adjust the cold tre nflaton pressure. If you do not adjust the tre nflaton pressure, excessve heat can buld up and result n sudden tre falure. 314

317 Operaton Tres and wheels Be sure to readjust the tre nflaton pressure for normal drvng speeds. You should wat untl the tres are cold before adjustng the tre nflaton pressure. Some vehcles may have supplemental tre nflaton pressure nformaton for vehcle loads less than the maxmum loaded vehcle condton. If such nformaton s provded, t can be found on the placard located on the nsde of the fuel fller flap. Tre nflaton pressure changes by approxmately 1.5 ps (0.1 bar) per 18 F (10 C) of ar temperature change. Keep ths n mnd when checkng tre nflaton pressure where the temperature s dfferent from the outsde temperature. Checkng tre nflaton pressure Regularly check your tre nflaton pressure at least once a month. Check and adjust the tre nflaton pressure when the tres are cold. The tres can be consdered cold f the vehcle has been parked for at least three hours or drven less than one mle (1.6 km). If you check the tre nflaton pressure when the tres are warm (the vehcle has been drven for several mles or sttng less than three hours), the readng wll be approxmately 4 ps (0.3 bar) hgher than the cold readng. Ths s normal. Do not let ar out to match the specfed cold tre nflaton pressure. Otherwse, the tre wll be undernflated. Follow the steps below to acheve correct tre nflaton pressure: Remove the cap from the valve on one tre. Frmly press a tre gauge onto the valve. Read tre nflaton pressure on tre gauge and check aganst the recommended tre nflaton pressure on the placard on the drver s door B-pllar ( page 314). If necessary, add ar to acheve the recommended tre nflaton pressure. 315

318 Operaton Tres and wheels If you have overflled the tre, release tre nflaton pressure by pushng the metal stem of the valve wth e.g. a tp of a pen. Then recheck the tre nflaton pressure wth the tre gauge. Install the valve cap. Repeat ths procedure for each tre. The recommended tre nflaton pressures for your vehcle can be found on the tre placard located on the drver s door B-pllar. The tre nflaton pressures are not lsted n the owner s manual. Warnng! G Follow recommended tre nflaton pressures. Do not overnflate tres. Overnflatng tres can result n sudden deflaton (blowout) because they are more lkely to become punctured or damaged by road debrs, potholes, etc. Do not undernflate tres. Undernflated tres wear unevenly, adversely affect handlng and fuel economy, and are more lkely to fal from beng overheated. Do not overload the tres by exceedng the specfed load lmt or vehcle capacty weght as ndcated on the placard on the drver s door B-pllar. Overloadng the tres can overheat them, possbly causng a blowout. Potental problems assocated wth undernflated and overnflated tres Undernflated tre nflaton pressure Undernflated tres can: cause excessve and uneven tre wear adversely affect fuel economy lead to tre falure from beng overheated adversely affect handlng characterstcs Warnng! G Follow recommended tre nflaton pressures. Do not undernflate tres. Undernflated tres wear excessvely and/or unevenly, adversely affect handlng and fuel economy, and are more lkely to fal from beng overheated. 316

319 Operaton Tres and wheels Overnflated tre nflaton pressure Overnflated tres can: adversely affect handlng characterstcs cause uneven tre wear be more prone to damage from road hazards adversely affect rde comfort ncrease stoppng dstance Warnng! G Follow recommended tre nflaton pressures. Do not overnflate tres. Overnflated tres can adversely affect handlng and rde comfort, wear unevenly, ncrease stoppng dstance, and result n sudden deflaton (blowout) because they are more lkely to become punctured or damaged by road debrs, potholes etc. Tre labelng Besdes tre name (sales desgnaton) and manufacturer name, a number of markngs can be found on a tre. Followng are some explanatons for the markngs on your vehcle s tres: 1 Unform Qualty Gradng Standards ( page 325) 2 DOT, Tre Identfcaton Number (TIN) ( page 322) 3 Maxmum tre load ( page 323) 4 Maxmum tre nflaton pressure ( page 324) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tre ply materal ( page 327) 7 Tre sze desgnaton, load and speed ratng ( page 318) 8 Load dentfcaton ( page 321) 9 Tre name For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. For more nformaton, see Rms and Tres ( page 424). 317

320 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre sze desgnaton, load and speed ratng 1 Tre wdth 2 Aspect rato n % 3 Radal tre code 4 Rm dameter 5 Tre load ratng 6 Tre speed ratng For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. General: Dependng on the desgn standards used, the tre sze molded nto the sdewall may have no letter or a letter precedng the tre sze desgnaton. No letter precedng the sze desgnaton (as llustrated above): Passenger car tre based on European desgn standards. Letter P precedng the sze desgnaton: Passenger car tre based on U.S. desgn standards. Letter LT precedng the sze desgnaton: Lght Truck tre based on U.S. desgn standards. Letter T precedng the sze desgnaton: Temporary spare tres whch are hgh pressure compact spares desgned for temporary emergency use only. Tre wdth The tre wdth 1 ( page 318) ndcates the nomnal tre wdth n mm. Aspect rato The aspect rato 2 ( page 318) s the dmensonal relatonshp between tre secton heght and secton wdth and s expressed n percentage. The aspect rato s arrved at by dvdng secton heght by secton wdth. Tre code The tre code 3 ( page 318) ndcates the tre constructon type. The R stands for radal tre type. Letter D means dagonal or bas ply constructon; letter B means belted-bas ply constructon. At the tre manufacturer s opton, any tre wth a speed capablty above 149 mph (240 km/h) can nclude a ZR n the sze desgnaton (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For addtonal nformaton, see Tre speed ratng ( page 320). 318

321 Operaton Tres and wheels Rm dameter The rm dameter 4 ( page 318) s the dameter of the bead seat, not the dameter of the rm edge. Rm dameter s ndcated n nches (n). Tre load ratng The tre load ratng 5 ( page 318) s a numercal code assocated wth the maxmum load a tre can support. For example, a load ratng of 91 corresponds to a maxmum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tre s desgned to support. See also Maxmum tre load ( page 323) where the maxmum load assocated wth the load ndex s ndcated n klograms and lbs. Warnng G The tre load ratng must always be at least half of the GAWR ( page 328) of your vehcle. Otherwse, tre falure may be the result whch may cause an accdent and/or serous personal njury to you or others. Always replace rms and tres wth the same desgnaton, manufacturer and type as shown on the orgnal part. Warnng! G Do not overload the tres by exceedng the specfed load lmt or vehcle capacty weght as ndcated on the placard located on the drver's door B-pllar. Overloadng the tres can overheat them, possbly causng a blowout. Overloadng the tres can also result n handlng or steerng problems, or brake falure. For addtonal nformaton on tre load ratng, see Load dentfcaton ( page 321). Tre load ratng 5 ( page 318) and Tre speed ratng 6 ( page 318) are also referred to as servce descrpton. 319

322 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre speed ratng The tre speed ratng 6 ( page 318) ndcates the approved maxmum speed for the tre. Warnng! G Even when permtted by law, never operate a vehcle at speeds greater than the maxmum speed ratng of the tres. Exceedng the maxmum speed for whch tres are rated can lead to sudden tre falure, causng loss of vehcle control and possbly resultng n an accdent and/or personal njury and possble death, for you and for others. Summer tres At the tre manufacturer s opton, any Index Q Speed ratng up to 100 mph (160 km/h) tre wth a speed capablty above 149 mph (240 km/h) can nclude a ZR n the sze desgnaton (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determne the R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) maxmum speed capablty of the tre, S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the servce descrpton for the tre must T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) be referred to. The servce descrpton H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) s comprsed of the tre load ratng 5 ( page 318) and the tre speed V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) ratng 6 ( page 318). W Y (Y) ZR up to 168 mph (270 km/h) up to 186 mph (300 km/h) above 186 mph (300 km/h) above 149 mph (240 km/h) If your tre ncludes ZR n the sze desgnaton and no servce descrpton 5 and 6 ( page 318) s gven, the tre manufacturer must be consulted for the maxmum speed capablty. Tre load ratng 5 ( page 318) and Tre speed ratng 6 ( page 318) are also referred to as servce descrpton. 320

323 Operaton Tres and wheels If a servce descrpton 5 and 6 ( page 318) s gven, the speed capablty s lmted by the speed symbol n the servce descrpton. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In ths example, 97Y s the servce descrpton. The letter Y desgnates the speed ratng and the speed capablty of the tre s lmted to 186 mph (300 km/h). Any tre wth a speed capablty above 186 mph (300 km/h) must nclude a ZR n the sze desgnaton AND the servce descrpton must be placed n parenthess. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The (Y) speed ratng n parenthess desgnates the maxmum speed capablty of the tre as beng above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tre manufacturer for the actual maxmum permssble speed of the tre. All-season and wnter tres Index Speed ratng Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h) The markng M+S next to the servce descrpton desgnates tres wth mud and snow capabltes. Load dentfcaton 1 Load dentfcaton For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. 321

324 Operaton Tres and wheels In addton to tre load ratng, specal load nformaton may be molded nto the tre sdewall followng the letter desgnatng the tre speed ratng 1 ( page 321). No specfcaton gven: absence of any text (lke n above example) ndcates a standard load (SL) tre. XL or Extra Load: desgnates an extra load (or renforced) tre. Lght Load: desgnates a lght load tre. C, D, E: desgnates load range assocated wth the maxmum load a tre can carry at a specfed pressure. DOT, Tre Identfcaton Number (TIN) U.S. tre regulatons requre each new tre manufacturer or tre retreader to mold a TIN nto or onto a sdewall of each tre produced. The TIN s a unque dentfer whch facltates efforts by tre manufactures to notfy purchasers n recall stuatons or other safety matters concernng tres and gves purchasers the means to easly dentfy such tres. The TIN s comprsed of Manufacturer s dentfcaton mark, Tre sze, Tre type code, and Date of manufacture. 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer s dentfcaton mark 3 Tre sze 4 Tre type code (at the opton of the tre manufacturer) 5 Date of manufacture For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. 322

325 Operaton Tres and wheels DOT (Department of Transportaton) A tre brandng symbol 1 ( page 322) whch denotes the tre meets requrements of the U.S. Department of Transportaton. Manufacturer s dentfcaton mark The manufacturer s dentfcaton mark 2 ( page 322) denotes the tre manufacturer. New tres have a mark wth two symbols. Retreaded tres have a mark wth four symbols. For more nformaton on retreaded tres, see ( page 304). Tre sze The code 3 ( page 322) ndcates the tre sze. Tre type code The code 4 ( page 322) may, at the opton of the manufacturer, be used as a descrptve code for dentfyng sgnfcant characterstcs of the tre. Date of manufacture The date of manufacture 5 ( page 322) dentfes the week and year of manufacture. The frst two fgures dentfy the week, startng wth 01 to represent the frst full week of the calendar year. The second two fgures represent the year. For example, 3202 represents the 32nd week of Maxmum tre load 1 Maxmum tre load ratng For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. The maxmum tre load s the maxmum weght the tres are desgned to support. 323

326 Operaton Tres and wheels Warnng! G Do not overload the tres by exceedng the specfed load lmt or vehcle capacty weght as ndcated on the placard located on the drver s door B-pllar. Overloadng the tres can overheat them, possbly causng a blowout. Overloadng the tres can also result n handlng or steerng problems, or brake falure. For more nformaton on tre load ratng ( page 319). For nformaton on calculatng total and cargo load capactes ( page 310). Maxmum tre nflaton pressure 1 Maxmum permssble tre nflaton pressure For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. Ths s the maxmum permssble tre nflaton pressure for the tre. Always follow the recommended tre nflaton pressure ( page 313) for proper tre nflaton. Warnng! G Never exceed the max. tre nflaton pressure. Follow recommended tre nflaton pressures. Do not undernflate tres. Undernflated tres wear excessvely and/or unevenly, adversely affect handlng and fuel economy, and are more lkely to fal from beng overheated. Do not overnflate tres. Overnflated tres can adversely affect handlng and rde comfort, wear unevenly, ncrease stoppng dstance, and result n sudden deflaton (blowout) because they are more lkely to become punctured or damaged by road debrs, potholes etc. 324

327 Operaton Tres and wheels Unform Tre Qualty Gradng Standards (U.S. vehcles) Tre manufacturers are requred to grade tres based on three performance factors: treadwear, tracton, and temperature resstance. Qualty grades can be found, where applcable, on the tre sdewall between tread shoulder and maxmum secton wdth. For example: Treadwear Tracton Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tres must conform to federal safety requrements n addton to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade s a comparatve ratng based on the wear rate of the tre when tested under controlled condtons on a specfed government test course. For example, a tre graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1 / 2 ) tmes as well on the government course as a tre graded 100. The relatve performance of tres depends upon the actual condtons of ther use, however, and may depart sgnfcantly from the norm due to varatons n drvng habts, servce practces and dfferences n road characterstcs and clmate. 1 Treadwear 2 Tracton 3 Temperature resstance For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. 325

328 Operaton Tres and wheels Tracton The tracton grades, from hghest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tre s ablty to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled condtons on specfed government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tre marked C may have poor tracton performance. Warnng! G The tracton grade assgned to ths tre s based on straght-ahead brakng tracton tests, and does not nclude acceleraton, cornerng, hydroplanng, or peak tracton characterstcs. Temperature The temperature grades are A (the hghest), B, and C, representng the tre s resstance to the generaton of heat and ts ablty to dsspate heat when tested under controlled condtons on a specfed ndoor laboratory test wheel. Sustaned hgh temperature can cause the materal of the tre to degenerate and reduce tre lfe, and excessve temperature can lead to sudden tre falure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance whch all passenger car tres must meet under the Federal Motor Vehcle Safety Standard No Grades B and A represent hgher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the mnmum requred by law. Warnng! G The temperature grade for ths tre s establshed for a tre that s properly nflated and not overloaded. Excessve speed, undernflaton, or excessve loadng, ether separately or n combnaton, can cause excessve heat buld-up and possble tre falure. 326

329 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre ply materal 1 Ples n sdewall 2 Ples under tread For llustraton purposes only. Actual data on tres s specfc to each vehcle and may vary from data shown n above llustraton. Ths markng tells you about the type of cord and number of ples n the sdewall and under the tread. Tre and loadng termnology Accessory weght The combned weght (n excess of those standard tems whch may be replaced) of automatc transmsson, power steerng, power brakes, power wndows, power seats, rado, and heater, to the extent that these tems are avalable as factory-nstalled equpment (whether nstalled or not). Ar pressure The amount of ar nsde the tre pressng outward on each square nch of the tre. Ar pressure s expressed n pounds per square nch (ps), or klopascal (kpa) or bars. Aspect rato Dmensonal relatonshp between tre secton heght and secton wdth expressed n percentage. Bar Another metrc unt for ar pressure. There are pounds per square nch (ps) to 1 bar; there are 100 klopascals (kpa) to 1 bar. Bead The tre bead contans steel wres wrapped by steel cords that hold the tre onto the rm. Cold tre nflaton pressure Tre nflaton pressure when your vehcle has been sttng for at least three hours or drven no more than one mle (1.6 km). 327

330 Operaton Tres and wheels Curb weght The weght of a motor vehcle wth standard equpment ncludng the maxmum capacty of fuel, ol, and coolant, and, f so equpped, ar condtonng and addtonal optonal equpment, but wthout passengers and cargo. DOT (Department of Transportaton) A tre brandng symbol whch denotes the tre meets requrements of the U.S. Department of Transportaton. GAWR (Gross Axle Weght Ratng) The GAWR s the maxmum permssble axle weght. The gross vehcle weght on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle ndcated on the certfcaton label located on the drver s door B-pllar. GVW (Gross Vehcle Weght) The GVW comprses the weght of the vehcle ncludng fuel, tools, spare wheel, nstalled accessores, passengers and cargo and, f applcable, traler tongue load. The GWV must never exceed the GWVR ndcated on the certfcaton label located on the drver s door B-pllar. GVWR (Gross Vehcle Weght Ratng) Ths s the maxmum permssble vehcle weght of the fully loaded vehcle (weght of the vehcle ncludng all optons, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, f applcable, traler tongue load). It s ndcated on certfcaton label located on the drver s door B-pllar. Klopascal (kpa) The metrc unt for ar pressure. There are 6.9 kpa to one ps; another metrc unt for ar pressure s bars. There are 100 klopascals (kpa) to one bar. Maxmum load ratng The maxmum load n klograms and pounds that can be carred by the tre. Maxmum loaded vehcle weght The sum of curb weght, accessory weght, vehcle capacty weght and producton optons weght. Maxmum tre nflaton pressure Ths number s the greatest amount of ar pressure that should ever be put n the tre under normal drvng condtons. 328

331 Operaton Tres and wheels Normal occupant weght The number of occupants the vehcle s desgned to seat, multpled by 68 klograms (150 lbs). Occupant dstrbuton The dstrbuton of occupants n a vehcle at ther desgnated seatng postons. Producton optons weght The combned weght of those nstalled regular producton optons weghng over 5 lbs (2.3 klograms) n excess of those standard tems whch they replace, not prevously consdered n curb weght or accessory weght, ncludng heavy duty brakes, rde levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specal trm. PSI (Pounds per square nch) A standard unt of measure for ar pressure -> bar, klopascal (kpa). Recommended tre nflaton pressure Recommended tre nflaton pressure lsted on placard located on drver s door B-pllar for normal drvng condtons. Provdes best handlng, tread lfe and rdng comfort. Rm A metal support for a tre or a tre and tube assembly upon whch the tre beads are seated. Sdewall The porton of a tre between the tread and the bead. TIN (Tre Identfcaton Number) Unque dentfer whch facltates efforts by tre manufacturers to notfy purchasers n recall stuatons or other safety matters concernng tres and gves purchases the means to easly dentfy such tres. The TIN s comprsed of Manufacturer s dentfcaton mark, Tre sze, Tre type code and Date of manufacture. Tre load ratng Numercal code assocated wth the maxmum load a tre can support. Tre ply composton and materal used Ths ndcates the number of ples or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabrc n the tre tread and sdewall. Tre manufacturers also must ndcate the ply materals n the tre and sdewall, whch nclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 329

332 Operaton Tres and wheels Tre speed ratng Part of tre desgnaton; ndcates the speed range for whch a tre s approved. Tracton Force exerted by the vehcle on the road va the tres. The amount of grp provded. Tread The porton of a tre that comes nto contact wth the road. Treadwear ndcators Narrow bands, sometmes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tre when only 1 / 6 n (1.6 mm) of tread remans. Unform Tre Qualty Gradng Standards A tre nformaton system that provdes consumers wth ratngs for a tre s tracton, temperature and treadwear. Ratngs are determned by tre manufacturers usng government testng procedures. The ratngs are molded nto the sdewall of the tre. Vehcle capacty weght Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 klograms (150 lbs) tmes the vehcle s desgnated seatng capacty. Vehcle maxmum load on the tre Load on an ndvdual tre that s determned by dstrbutng to each axle ts share of the maxmum loaded vehcle weght and dvdng t by two. 330

333 Operaton Tres and wheels Rotatng tres Warnng! G Rotate front and rear wheels only f the tres are of the same dmenson. If your vehcle s equpped wth mxed-sze tres (dfferent tre dmensons front vs. rear), tre rotaton s not possble. Tre rotaton can be performed on vehcles wth tres of the same dmenson all around. If your vehcle s equpped wth tres of the same dmenson all around, tres can be rotated, observng a a front-to-rear rotaton pattern that wll mantan the ntended rotaton (spnnng) drecton of the tre ( page 307). In some cases, such as when your vehcle s equpped wth mxed-sze tres (dfferent tre dmenson front vs. rear), tre rotaton s not possble. If applcable to your vehcle s tre confguraton, tres can be rotated accordng to the tre manufacturer s recommended ntervals n the tre manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located n your vehcle lterature portfolo. If none s avalable, tres should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 mles (5000 to km), or sooner f necessary, accordng to the degree of tre wear. The same rotaton (spnnng) drecton must be mantaned ( page 307). Rotate tres before the characterstc tre wear pattern becomes vsble (shoulder wear on front tres and tread center wear on rear tres). Thoroughly clean the mountng face of wheels and brake dsks,.e. the nner sde of the wheels/tres, durng each rotaton. Check for and ensure proper tre nflaton pressure. Warnng! G Have the tghtenng torque checked after changng a wheel. Wheels could become loose f not tghtened wth a torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). Only use genune Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specfed for your vehcle s rms. For nformaton on wheel change, see the Practcal hnts secton ( page 377) and ( page 399). 331

334 Operaton Wnter drvng Before the onset of wnter, have your vehcle wnterzed at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Ths servce ncludes: Check of antcorroson and antfreeze concentraton. Addton of cleanng concentrate to the water of the wndsheld and headlamp cleanng system. Add MB Concentrate S to a premxed wndsheld washer solvent/antfreeze whch s formulated for below freezng temperatures ( page 439). Battery test. Battery capacty drops wth decreasng ambent temperature. A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engne can be started, even at low ambent temperatures. Tre change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radal-ply tres wth a mnmum tread depth of approxmately 1 / 6 n (4 mm) on all four wheels for the wnter season. Wnter tres Always use wnter tres at temperatures below 45 F (7 C) and whenever wntry road condtons preval. Use of wnter tres s the only way to acheve the maxmum effectveness of the ABS, ESP, and 4MATIC n wnter operaton. For safe handlng, make sure that all mounted wnter tres are of the same make and have the same tread desgn. Warnng! G Wnter tres wth a tread depth under 1 / 6 n (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer sutable for wnter operaton. Always observe the speed ratng of the wnter tres nstalled on your vehcle. If the maxmum speed for whch your tres are rated s below the speed ratng of your vehcle, you must place a notce to ths effect where t wll be seen by the drver. Such notces are avalable from your tre dealer or from any authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G If you use your spare tre when wnter tres are ftted on the other wheels, be aware that the dfference n tre characterstcs may very well mpar turnng stablty and that overall drvng stablty may be reduced. Adapt your drvng style accordngly. Have the spare tre replaced wth a wnter tre at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 332

335 Operaton Wnter drvng Block heater (Canada only) The engne s equpped wth a block heater. The electrcal cable may be nstalled at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Snow chans Snow chans should only be drven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chans as soon as possble when drvng on roads wthout snow. Please observe the followng gudelnes when usng snow chans: When drvng wth snow chans, you may wsh to deactvate the ESP ( page 85) before settng the vehcle n moton. Ths wll mprove the vehcle s tracton. Use of snow chans s not permssble wth all wheel/tre combnatons. Only use snow chans that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll be glad to advse you on ths subject. Use of snow chans may be prohbted dependng on locaton. Always check local and state laws before nstallng snow chans.! Even on vehcles wth all-wheel-drve use snow chans on rear tres only. Use of snow chans s not permssble wth tre szes: 245/40 R17 91W T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M Snow chans should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer s mountng nstructons. 333

336 Operaton Mantenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehcle servced by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center, n accordance wth the Mantenance Booklet at the tmes called for by the mantenance servce ndcator dsplay. Falure to have the vehcle mantaned n accordance wth the Mantenance Booklet and mantenance servce ndcator at the desgnated tmes/mleage wll result n vehcle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. The mantenance servce ndcator wll notfy you when your next mantenance servce s due. Startng approxmately one month before your next mantenance servce s due, one of the followng messages wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay whle you are drvng or when you swtch on the gnton (example servce A): Servce A n XX Days Servce A n XX Mles (Km) A Servce due now The type of mantenance servce due s ndcated n the multfuncton dsplay: 9 Basc servce (A) Extended servce (B) Vehcles equpped wth FSS (Flexble Servce System) only (Canada vehcles): The nterval between mantenance servces depends on your drvng habts. A gentle drvng style, moderate engne speeds and the avodance of short-dstance trps wll lengthen the nterval between servces. 334

337 Operaton Mantenance Clearng the mantenance servce ndcator The mantenance servce ndcator s automatcally cleared after ten seconds when you swtch on the gnton or when reachng the mantenance servce threshold whle drvng after 30 seconds, once the suggested mantenance servce term has passed You can also clear t yourself. 1 Reset button Press reset button 1 on the nstrument cluster. Mantenance servce term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested mantenance servce term, you wll see the followng message n the multfuncton dsplay: Servce A exceeded by XX Days Servce A exceeded by XX Mles (Km) In addton, a sgnal sounds when the message appears. Any authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll reset the mantenance servce ndcator followng a completed mantenance servce. Callng up the mantenance servce ndcator Swtch on gnton ( page 33). The standard dsplay of the control system appears ( page 129). Press button k or j on the multfuncton steerng wheel untl the mantenance servce ndcator wth the servce symbol 9 or and the servce deadlne appears n the multfuncton dsplay. If the battery s dsconnected, the days of dsconnecton wll not be ncluded n the count shown by the mantenance servce ndcator. To arrve at the true mantenance servce deadlne, you wll need to subtract these days from the days shown n the mantenance servce ndcator. Do not confuse the mantenance servce ndcator wth the engne ol level ndcator :. 335

338 Operaton Mantenance Resettng the mantenance servce ndcator In the event that the mantenance servce on your vehcle s not carred out by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the mantenance servce ndcator reset. The automotve mantenance faclty carryng out the mantenance servce wll fnd the nformaton for resettng the mantenance servce ndcator n the mantenance-relevant nformaton for your vehcle. Such nformaton s avalable from ether your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or drectly from Mercedes-Benz. If the mantenance servce ndcator was nadvertently reset, have an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center correct t. Only reset f the proper mantenance servce has been performed. Resettng the system wthout performng the proper servce as called for by the mantenance servce ndcator wll result n engne damage and/or other vehcle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. 336

339 Vehcle care Cleanng and care of the vehcle Warnng! G Many cleanng products can be hazardous. Some are posonous, others are flammable. Always follow the nstructons on the partcular contaner. Always open your vehcle s doors or wndows when cleanng the nsde. Never use fluds or solvents that are not desgned for cleanng your vehcle. Whle n operaton, even whle parked, your vehcle s subjected to varyng external nfluences whch, f gone unchecked, can attack the pantwork as well as the underbody and cause lastng damage. Such damage s caused not only by extreme and varyng clmatc condtons, but also by: Ar polluton Road salt Tar Gravel and stone chppng To avod pant damage, you should mmedately remove: Grease and ol Fuel Coolant Brake flud Brd droppngs Insects Tree resns, etc. Frequent washng reduces and/or elmnates the aggressveness and potency of the above adverse nfluences. Operaton Vehcle care More frequent washngs are necessary to deal wth unfavorable condtons: near the ocean n ndustral areas (smoke, exhaust emssons) durng wnter operaton You should check your vehcle from tme to tme for stone chppng or other damage. Any damage should be repared as soon as possble to prevent corroson. In dong so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehcle. A prerequste for a thorough check s a washng of the underbody followed by a thorough nspecton. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Your vehcle has been treated at the factory wth a wax-base rustproofng n the body cavtes whch wll last for the lfetme of the vehcle. Post-producton treatment s nether necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possblty of ncompatblty between materals used n the producton process and others appled later. 337

340 Operaton Vehcle care We have selected car-care products and compled recommendatons whch are specally matched to our vehcles and whch always reflect the latest technology. You can obtan Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Scratches, corrosve deposts, corroson or damage due to neglgent or ncorrect care cannot always be removed or repared wth the car-care products recommended here. In such cases t s best to seek ad at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. The followng topcs deal wth the cleanng and care of your vehcle and gve mportant how-to nformaton as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products. Power washer When usng a power washer for cleanng the vehcle, always observe the manufacturer s operatng nstructons.! Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tres. The ntense jet of water can result n damage to the tre. Always replace a damaged tre. Always keep the jet of water movng across the surface. Do not am drectly at electrcal parts, electrcal connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. Tar stans Quckly remove tar stans before they dry and become more dffcult to remove. A tar remover s recommended. Pantwork, panted body components Mercedes-Benz approved Pant Care should be appled when water drops on the pant surface do not bead up, normally every three to fve months, dependng on clmate and washng detergent used. Mercedes-Benz approved Pant Cleaner should be appled f the pant surface shows sgns of embedded drt (.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax f your vehcle s parked n the sun or f the hood s stll hot. Use the approprate MB-Touch-Up Stck for quck and provsonal repars of mnor pant damage (.e. chps from stones, vehcle doors, etc.). 338

341 Operaton Vehcle care Engne cleanng Pror to cleanng the engne compartment, make sure to protect electrcal components and connectors from the ntruson of water and cleanng agents. Corroson protecton, such as MB Antcorroson Wax, should be appled to the engne compartment after every engne cleanng. Before applyng, all control lnkage bushngs and jonts should be lubrcated. The poly-v-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Vehcle washng Do not use hot water or wash your vehcle n drect sunlght. Only use a mld car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo. Thoroughly spray the vehcle wth a dffused jet of water. Drect only a very weak spray towards the ventlaton ntake. Use plenty of water and rnse the sponge and chamos frequently. Rnse wth clear water and thoroughly dry wth a chamos. Do not allow cleanng agents to dry on the fnsh. Due to the wdth of the vehcle, fold n exteror rear vew mrrors pror to runnng the vehcle through an automatc car wash to prevent damage to the mrrors. In the wnter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possble. When washng the underbody, do not forget to clean the nner sdes of the wheels. Ornamental moldngs For regular cleanng and care of very drty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner. Headlamps, tal lamps, sde markers, turn sgnal lenses Use a mld car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, wth plenty of water. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleanng the lenses. Do not attempt to wpe drty lenses wth a dry cloth or sponge. 339

342 Operaton Vehcle care Wper blades Fold wper arms forward. Warnng! G For safety reasons, swtch off wpers and remove SmartKey from starter swtch before cleanng the wper blades. Otherwse, the wper motor could suddenly turn on and cause njury. Clean the wper blade nserts wth a clean cloth and detergent soluton.! Fold the wndsheld wper arms back onto the wndsheld before turnng the SmartKey n the starter swtch. Hold on to the wper when foldng the wper arm back. If released, the force of the mpact from the tensonng sprng could crack the wndsheld. Wndow cleanng Fold wper arms forward. Warnng! G For safety reasons, swtch off wpers and remove SmartKey from starter swtch before cleanng the wndsheld. Otherwse, the wper motor could suddenly turn on and cause njury. Use a wndow cleanng soluton on all glass surfaces. An automotve glass cleaner s recommended.! Fold the wndsheld wper arms back onto the wndsheld before turnng the SmartKey n the starter swtch. Hold on to the wper when foldng the wper arm back. If released, the force of the mpact from the tensonng sprng could crack the wndsheld. Lght alloy wheels Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleanng of the lght alloy wheels. If possble, clean wheels once a week wth Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, usng a soft brstle brush and a strong spray of water. Follow the nstructons on contaner. Only use acd-free cleanng materals. Acd may cause corroson or damage the clear coat. Instrument cluster Use a gentle dshwashng detergent or mld detergent for delcate fabrcs as a washng soluton. Wpe wth a cloth mostened n lukewarm soluton. Do not use scourng agents. 340

343 Operaton Vehcle care Steerng wheel and gear selector lever Wpe wth a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean wth Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Cup holders Use a gentle dshwashng detergent or mld detergent for delcate fabrcs as a washng soluton. Wpe wth a cloth mostened n lukewarm soluton. Do not use scourng agents. Hard plastc trm tems Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interor Care onto soft lnt-free cloth and apply wth lght pressure. Headlner and rear wndow shelf Clean wth soft brstle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner n case of excessve drt. Seat belts The webbng must not be treated wth chemcal cleanng agents. Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbng at temperatures above 176 F (80 C) or n drect sunlght. Warnng! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as ths may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provde adequate protecton. Upholstery Usng aftermarket seat covers or wearng clothng that have the tendency to gve off colorng (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently dscolored. By lnng the seats wth a proper ntermedate cover, contact-dscoloraton wll be prevented. Leather upholstery Wpe leather upholstery wth a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean wth Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercse partcular care when cleanng perforated leather as ts undersde should not become wet. 341

344 Operaton Vehcle care Cloth upholstery Clean wth soft brstle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner n case of excessve drt. MB Tex upholstery Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interor Care onto soft lnt-free cloth and apply wth lght pressure. Plastc and rubber parts Do not use ol or wax on these parts. Wood trms Dampen cloth usng water and use damp cloth to clean wood trms n your vehcle. Do not use solvents lke tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polshes or waxes as these may be abrasve. 342

345 Practcal hnts What to do f Where wll I fnd...? Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Openng/closng n an emergency Replacng SmartKey batteres Replacng bulbs Replacng wper blades Flat tre Battery Jump startng Towng the vehcle Fuses 343

346 Practcal hnts What to do f Lamps n nstrument cluster General nformaton: If any of the followng lamps n the nstrument cluster fals to come on durng the bulb self-check when swtchng on the gnton, have the respectve bulb checked and replaced f necessary. Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton - The yellow ABS malfuncton ndcator lamp comes on whle drvng. The ABS has detected a malfuncton and has swtched off. The BAS and the ESP are also swtched off (see messages n dsplay). Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Wheels may lock durng hard brakng, reducng steerng capablty. The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the ABS avalable. If the ABS control unt s malfunctonng, other systems such as the navgaton system* or the automatc transmsson* may also be malfunctonng. The chargng voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ABS has swtched off. The battery mght not be charged suffcently. Read and observe messages n the dsplay ( page 352). Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. Swtch off electrcal consumers that are currently not needed, e.g. seat heatng*. If necessary, have the generator (alternator) and battery checked. When the voltage s above ths value agan, the ABS s operatonal agan. 344

347 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton ; (USA only) 3 (Canada only) The red brake warnng lamp comes on whle drvng and you hear a warnng sound. The red brake warnng lamp comes on whle drvng. You are drvng wth the parkng brake set. There s nsuffcent brake flud n the reservor. Release the parkng brake ( page 48). Rsk of accdent! Carefully stop the vehcle and notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake flud! Ths wll not solve the problem. Warnng! G Drvng wth the brake warnng lamp llumnated can result n an accdent. Have your brake system checked mmedately f the brake warnng lamp stays on. Don t add brake flud before checkng the brake system. Overfllng the brake flud reservor can result n spllng brake flud on hot engne parts and the brake flud catchng fre. You can be serously burned.! If you fnd that the brake flud n the brake flud reservor has fallen to the mnmum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thckness and leaks. 345

348 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton ú (USA only) The yellow engne malfuncton There s a malfuncton n: ± (Canada only) ndcator lamp comes on whle The fuel management drvng. system The gnton system The emsson control system Systems whch affect emssons Such malfunctons may result n excessve emssons values and may swtch the engne to ts lmp-home (emergency operaton) mode. Have the vehcle checked as soon as possble by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. An on-board dagnostc connector s used by the servce staton to lnk the vehcle to the shop dagnostcs system. It allows the accurate dentfcaton of system malfunctons through the readout of dagnostc trouble codes. It s located n the front left area of the footwell next to the parkng brake pedal. 346

349 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton ú (USA only) ± (Canada only) The yellow engne malfuncton ndcator lamp comes on whle drvng. A loss of pressure has been detected n the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky. Check the fuel cap ( page 293). If t s not closed properly: Close the fuel cap. If t s closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Your fuel tank s empty. After refuellng start, turn off and restart the engne three or four tmes n successon. The lmp-home mode s canceled. You do not need to have your vehcle checked. 347

350 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton v The yellow ESP warnng lamp The ESP s deactvated. Swtch the ESP back on ( page 85). comes on whle drvng. Rsk of accdent! If the ESP cannot be swtched back on, have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. The yellow ESP warnng lamp flashes whle drvng. Adapt your speed and drvng to the prevalng road, weather and traffc condtons. The ESP or tracton control has come nto operaton because of detected tracton loss n at least one tre. When drvng off, apply as lttle throttle as possble. Whle drvng, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and drvng to the prevalng road and weather condtons. Do not deactvate the ESP. Exceptons: ( page 85). Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. 348

351 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton The yellow fuel tank reserve warnng lamp n the fuel gauge ( page 24) comes on whle drvng. < The red seat belt telltale llumnates for a bref perod after startng the engne. The red seat belt telltale llumnates and a warnng chme sounds for approxmately sx seconds after startng the engne. 1 The red SRS ndcator lamp comes on whle drvng. The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark. The telltale remnds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts. The drver s seat belt s not fastened before the engne s started. There s a malfuncton n the restrant systems. The ar bags or emergency tensonng devces (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fal to deploy n an accdent. Refuel at the next gas staton ( page 293). Fasten your seat belt. The telltale goes out. Fasten the drver s seat belt. The telltale goes out. Drve wth added cauton to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G In the event a malfuncton of the SRS s ndcated as outlned above, the SRS may not be operatonal. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center mmedately to have the system checked; otherwse the SRS may not be deployed when needed n an accdent, whch could result n serous or fatal njury, or t mght deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarly whch could also result n an accdent and/or njury to you or to others. 349

352 Practcal hnts What to do f Lamp n center console Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton 56 The front passenger front ar bag off ndcator lamp llumnates and remans llumnated wth the weght of a typcal adult or someone larger than a small ndvdual on the front passenger seat. The system s malfunctonng Have the system checked as soon as possble by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Also note any messages n the multfuncton dsplay and follow correctve steps ( page 354). Warnng! G If the 56 ndcator lamp llumnates and remans llumnated wth the weght of a typcal adult or someone larger than a small ndvdual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. 350

353 Practcal hnts What to do f Problem Possble cause Suggested soluton 56 The front passenger front ar bag off ndcator lamp does not llumnate and/or does not reman llumnated wth the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld n a standard chld restrant or less on the front passenger seat. The system s malfunctonng. Make sure that there s nothng between seat cushon and chld seat and check nstallaton of the chld seat. Make sure that no objects applyng supplemental weght onto the seat are present. If the front passenger front ar bag off ndcator lamp remans out, have the system checked as soon as possble by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a chld on the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. Also note any messages n the multfuncton dsplay and follow correctve steps ( page 354). Warnng! G If the 56 ndcator lamp does not llumnate or remans out wth the weght of a typcal 12-month-old chld n a standard chld restrant or less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a chld on the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. 351

354 Practcal hnts What to do f Vehcle status messages n the multfuncton dsplay Warnng and malfuncton messages appear n the multfuncton dsplay located n the nstrument cluster. Certan warnng and malfuncton messages are accompaned by an audble sgnal. Address these messages accordngly and follow the addtonal nstructons gven n ths Operator s Manual. Selectng the vehcle status message memory menu n the control system ( page 138) dsplays both cleared and uncleared messages. Hgh-prorty messages appear n the multfuncton dsplay n red color. Certan messages of hgh prorty cannot be cleared from the multfuncton dsplay usng the reset button ( page 126) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steerng wheel. Other messages of hgh prorty and messages of less mmedate prorty can be cleared from the multfuncton dsplay usng the reset button ( page 126) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steerng wheel. They are then stored n the vehcle status message memory ( page 138). Remember that clearng a message wll only make the message dsappear. Clearng a message wll not correct the condton that caused the message to appear. Warnng! G All categores of messages contan mportant nformaton whch should be taken note of and, where a malfuncton s ndcated, addressed as soon as possble at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Falure to repar condton noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty, or result n property damage or personal njury. Warnng! G No messages wll be dsplayed f ether the nstrument cluster or the multfuncton dsplay s noperatve. Contact your nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 352

355 Practcal hnts What to do f Swtchng on the gnton causes all nstrument cluster lamps (except low beam headlamp ndcator lamp, hgh beam headlamp ndcator lamp, and turn sgnal ndcator lamps unless actvated) as well as the multfuncton dsplay to come on. Make sure the lamps and multfuncton dsplay are n workng order before startng your journey. On the pages that follow, you wll fnd a complaton of the most mportant warnng and malfuncton messages that may appear n the multfuncton dsplay. For your convenence the messages are dvded nto two sectons: Text messages ( page 354) Symbol messages ( page 362) 353

356 Practcal hnts What to do f Text messages Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual Ar bag s actvated whle drvng even though a chld, small ndvdual, or object below the system s weght threshold s on the front passenger seat, or the front passenger seat s empty. Objects on the seat or forces actng on the seat may make the system sense supplemental weght. Stop the vehcle n a safe locaton as soon as possble and check the followng: Make sure that there s nothng between seat cushon and chld seat and check nstallaton of the chld seat. Make sure that no objects applyng supplemental weght onto the seat are present. The system may recognze such supplemental weght and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat s of a heaver weght than actually present. (Contnued on next page) 354

357 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual If performng any of the above correctve steps s successful, the message Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay, confrmng the stuaton has been remeded. Note that after performng the correctve steps, t may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual to appear. If the message Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual remans on n the multfuncton dsplay and/or the 56 ndcator lamp remans out even after performng the above correctve steps, have the system checked as soon as possble by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! If the message Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual remans on n the multfuncton dsplay and/or the 56 ndcator lamp G remans out even after performng the above correctve steps, do not have any chldren12 years old and under and other small ndvduals use the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. 355

358 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual Ar bag s deactvated whle drvng even though an adult or someone larger than a small ndvdual s occupyng the front passenger seat. Forces actng on the seat may make the system sense a decrease n weght. Stop the vehcle n a safe locaton as soon as possble and check the followng: Do not lean on armrests or lft yourself up usng handle over the door. Ths may make the system sense that an occupant of a lesser weght than actually present s on the front passenger seat. Re-poston yourself. St properly belted n a nearly uprght poston wth your back aganst the seat backrest. If performng any of the above correctve steps s successful, the message Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual wll appear n the multfuncton dsplay, confrmng the stuaton has been remeded. (Contnued on next page) 356

359 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual Note that after performng the correctve steps, t may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front-pass. arbag actvated See Operator s Manual to appear. If the message Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual remans on n the multfuncton dsplay and/or the 56 ndcator lamp remans on even after performng the above correctve steps, have the system checked as soon as possble by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. Warnng! G If the message Front-pass. arbag deactvated See Operator s Manual remans on n the multfuncton dsplay and/or the 56 ndcator lamp remans llumnated even after performng the above correctve steps, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat untl the system has been repared. 357

360 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton ABS malfuncton. Vst workshop. Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. The ABS has detected a malfuncton and has swtched off. The ESP and the BAS are also deactvated. The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the ABS avalable. The ABS or the ABS dsplay s malfunctonng. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Wheels may lock durng hard brakng, reducng steerng capablty. Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Wheels may lock durng hard brakng, reducng steerng capablty. Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. 358

361 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton BAS unavalable See Operator s Manual The chargng voltage has fallen below ten volts. The BAS has swtched off. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. malfuncton. Vst workshop. Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. The battery mght not be charged suffcently. The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the BAS avalable. The BAS has detected a malfuncton and swtched off. The BAS or the BAS dsplay s malfunctonng. If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. When the voltage s above ths value agan, the BAS s operatonal agan. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. 359

362 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton ESP unavalable See Operator s Manual The ESP was deactvated because of a malfuncton or nterrupted power supply. The ABS mght not be operatonal. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the ESP avalable. If the yellow ESP warnng lamp v flashes whle drvng and ths message appears, the electronc tracton system has swtched off to prevent overheatng of the drve wheel brakes. The self-dagnoss has not been completed yet. The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the ESP avalable. The chargng voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ESP has swtched off. The battery mght not be charged suffcently. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the electronc tracton system swtches on agan. The dsplay wll clear after drvng a short dstance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Contnue drvng wth added cauton. If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. When the voltage s above ths value agan, the ESP s operatonal agan. 360

363 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton ESP malfuncton. Vst workshop. The ESP s deactvated because of a malfuncton. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. SRS Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. Restrant system malfuncton Drve to workshop The brake system s stll functonng normally but wthout the ESP avalable. The ESP or the ESP dsplay s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Falure to follow these nstructons ncreases the rsk of an accdent. The system s malfunctonng. Drve wth added cauton to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G In the event a malfuncton of the SRS s ndcated as outlned above, the SRS may not be operatonal. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center mmedately to have the system checked; otherwse the SRS may not be deployed when needed n an accdent, whch could result n serous or fatal njury, or t mght deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarly whch could also result n njury. 361

364 Practcal hnts What to do f Symbol messages Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton # Battery Alternator Vst workshop. The battery s no longer chargng. Possble causes: Stop mmedately and check the poly-v-belt. Low voltage Charge battery Low voltage Swtch off consumers broken poly-v-belt alternator malfunctonng If t s broken: Do not contnue to drve. Otherwse the engne wll overheat due to an noperatve water pump whch may result n damage to the engne. Notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. If t s ntact: Drve mmedately to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. The battery has nsuffcent voltage. Start the engne ( page 46). The battery has nsuffcent voltage. Turn off unnecessary electrcal consumers. 362

365 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton ; (USA only)! (Canada only) Parkng brake Release brake. You are drvng wth the parkng brake set. Release the parkng brake ( page 48). 2 Brake wear Vst workshop. The brake pads have reached ther wear lmt. Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possble. ; (USA only) 3 (Canada only) Brake flud Vst workshop. There s nsuffcent brake flud n the reservor. Rsk of accdent! Stop the vehcle and notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake flud! Ths wll not solve the problem. Warnng! G Drvng wth ths message dsplayed can result n an accdent. Have your brake system checked mmedately. Do not add brake flud before checkng the brake system. Overfllng the brake flud reservor can result n spllng brake flud on hot engne parts and the brake flud catchng fre. You can be serously burned.! If you fnd that the brake flud n the brake flud reservor has fallen to the mnmum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thckness and leaks.! Brake pad thckness must be vsually checked by a qualfed techncan at the ntervals specfed n the Mantenance booklet. 363

366 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton B Coolant The coolant level s too low. Add coolant ( page 301). Check level If you have to add coolant frequently, have the coolng system checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G Do not spll antfreeze on hot engne parts. Antfreeze contans ethylene glycol whch may burn f t comes nto contact wth hot engne parts. You can be serously burned.! Do not gnore the low engne coolant level warnng. Extended drvng wth the message and symbol dsplayed may cause serous engne damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Do not drve wthout suffcent amount of coolant n the coolng system. The engne wll overheat causng major engne damage. 364

367 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Coolant Stop, engne off! The coolant s too hot. Stop the vehcle and turn off the engne. Only start the engne agan after the message dsappears. You could otherwse damage the engne. Warnng! G Drvng when your engne s badly overheated can cause some fluds whch may have leaked nto the engne compartment to catch fre. You could be serously burned. Steam from an overheated engne can cause serous burns and can occur just by openng the hood. Stay away from the engne f you see or hear steam comng from t. Turn off the engne, get out of the vehcle and do not stand near the vehcle untl the engne has cooled down. Durng severe operatng condtons and stop-and-go cty traffc, the coolant temperature may rse close to 248 F (120 C).! The engne should not be operated wth the coolant temperature above 248 F (120 C). Dong so may cause serous engne damage whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. 365

368 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Coolant Stop, engne off! The poly-v-belt could be broken. Stop mmedately and check the poly-v-belt. 366 Coolant Vst workshop. The coolng fan for the coolant s malfunctonng. If t s broken: Do not contnue to drve. Otherwse the engne wll overheat due to an noperatve water pump whch may result n damage to the engne. Notfy an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. If t s ntact: Do not contnue to drve the vehcle wth ths message dsplayed. Dong so could result n serous engne damage that s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Observe the coolant temperature gauge n the nstrument cluster ( page 24). Drve mmedately to the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the coolant temperature gauge n the nstrument cluster ( page 24). Have the fan replaced as soon as possble.

369 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton Ñ G Cruse contr. Drve to workshop Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. ± Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. Cruse control s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. The nstrument cluster dsplay s malfunctonng. The dsplays for several systems have malfunctoned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctoned. Certan electronc systems are unable to relay nformaton to the control system. The followng systems may have faled: Coolant temperature dsplay Tachometer Cruse control dsplay J Doors open You are attemptng to drve wth one or more doors open. Contnue drvng wth added cauton. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Have the electronc systems checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Have the electronc systems checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Close the doors. 367

370 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Suggested soluton : USA only: At next gas staton add 1.0 qt engne ol The engne ol level s too low. Add engne ol ( page 299) and check the engne ol level ( page 298). Canada only: At next gas staton add 1.0 l engne ol Engne ol level Stop, engne off! Engne ol level Reduce ol level Change engne ol Vst workshop. There s no ol n the engne. There s a danger of engne damage. You have added too much engne ol. There s a rsk of damagng the engne or the catalytc converter. It may be that there s water n the engne ol. Carefully brng the vehcle to a halt as soon as possble. Turn off the engne. Add engne ol ( page 299) and check the engne ol level ( page 298). Have ol sphoned or draned off. Observe all legal requrements wth respect to ts dsposal. Have the engne ol checked. 368

371 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Suggested soluton : Engne ol level Vst workshop. The engne ol has dropped to a crtcal level. Check the engne ol level ( page 298) and add ol as requred ( page 299). Ol sensor malfuncton Vst workshop. The measurng system s malfunctonng. If you must add engne ol frequently, have the engne checked for possble leaks. Have the measurng system checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. When the message At next gas staton add 1.0 qt engne ol (Canada: 1.0 l) appears whle the engne s runnng and at operatng temperature, the engne ol level has dropped to approxmately the mnmum level. When ths occurs, the warnng wll frst come on ntermttently and then stay on f the ol level drops further. Vsually check for ol leaks. If no obvous ol leaks are noted, drve to the nearest servce staton where the engne ol should be topped to the requred level wth an approved ol specfed n the Factory Approved Servce Products pamphlet.! The engne ol level warnngs should not be gnored. Extended drvng wth the symbol dsplayed could result n serous engne damage that s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. 369

372 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton 4 Check gas cap. A loss of pressure has been detected n Check the fuel cap ( page 293). See Operator s Manual the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If t s not closed properly: closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky. Close the fuel cap. If t s closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Y Hood open You are drvng wth the hood open. Close the hood ( page 296). I Remove key. You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey. Replace key Drve to workshop No addtonal code avalable for SmartKey. Remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Change the SmartKey. 370

373 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton. 3rd brake lamp The hgh mounted brake lamp s malfunctonng. Ths message wll only Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. appear f all lght emttng dodes have stopped workng. Backup lamp, left The left backup lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Backup lamp, rght The rght backup lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Brake lamp Drve to workshop Brake lamp llumnaton s delayed or lamp s permanently on. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Brake lamp left The left brake lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Brake lamp rght The rght brake lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Dsplay malfuncton. Vst workshop. The dsplay for the lamps or the system s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Front foglamp rght The rght front fog lamp s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Front left sde marker lamp Front rght sder marker lamp The left front sde marker lamp s malfunctonng. The rght front sde marker lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. 371

374 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton. Hgh beam left The left hgh beam lamp s Replace the bulb as soon as possble. malfunctonng. Hgh beam rght The rght hgh beam lamp s Replace the bulb as soon as possble. malfunctonng. Lcense plate lamp, left The left lcense plate lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Lcense plate lamp, rght Lght sensor Drve to workshop Low beam left The rght lcense plate lamp s malfunctonng. The lamp sensor s malfunctonng. The headlamps swtch on automatcally. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. In the control system, set lamp operaton to manual ( page 150). Swtch on the headlamps usng the exteror lamp swtch ( page 117). Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. The left low beam lamp s malfunctonng. Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possble. B-Xenon* headlamp: Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. 372

375 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton. Low beam rght The rght low beam lamp s Halogen headlamp: malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Parkng lamp left front Parkng lamp rght front Rear fog lamp Substtute bulb on Swtch off lghts. Tallamp left Substtute bulb on Tallamp rght Substtute bulb on The left front parkng lamp s malfunctonng. The rght front parkng lamp s malfunctonng. The rear fog lamp s malfunctonng. A substtute bulb s beng used. Headlamps have been turned on wth the drver s door opened and the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch. The left tal lamp s malfunctonng. A substtute bulb s beng used. The rght tal lamp s malfunctonng. A substtute bulb s beng used. B-Xenon* headlamp: Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Swtch off the headlamps. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. 373

376 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton. Turn sgnal left front The left front turn sgnal lamp s malfunctonng. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Turn sgnal rght front Turn sgnal left mrror Turn sgnal rght mrror Turn sgnal left rear Substtute bulb on Turn sgnal rght rear Substtute bulb on The rght front turn sgnal lamp s malfunctonng. The left turn sgnal n the sde mrror s malfunctonng. Ths message wll only appear f all lght emttng dodes have stopped workng. The rght turn sgnal n the sde mrror s malfunctonng. Ths message wll only appear f all lght emttng dodes have stopped workng. The left rear turn sgnal lamp s malfunctonng. A substtute bulb s beng used. The rght rear turn sgnal lamp s malfunctonng. A substtute bulb s beng used. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. Replace the bulb as soon as possble. 374

377 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton < Belt system Drve to workshop The seat belt system s malfunctonng. Vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. _ Steerng ol Vst workshop. The steerng gear ol level s too low. There s a danger of steerng gear damage. Have the system checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G If the level of steerng gear ol n reservor s too low, the steerng power assstance could fal. Much greater effort wll then be needed to turn the steerng wheel. Do not add steerng ol wthout checkng the steerng system. Do not drve the vehcle. Have the system checked at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble. 375

378 Practcal hnts What to do f Dsplay symbol Dsplay message Possble cause Possble soluton K J L Close sld./pop-up sunroof Close sld./pop-up sunroof Tele Ad malfuncton. Drve to workshop You have opened the drver s door wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch and the tlt/sldng sunroof open. You have opened the drver s door wth the SmartKey removed from the starter swtch and the tlt/sldng sunroof open. One or more man functons of the Tele Ad system* are malfunctonng. t Functon unavalable. Ths dsplay appears f button t or s on the multfuncton steerng wheel s pressed and the vehcle s not equpped wth a telephone*. Ê Trunk open Ths message wll appear whenever the trunk ld s open. W Washer flud please refll The flud level has dropped to about 1 / 3 of total reservor capacty. Close the tlt/sldng sunroof ( page 245). Close the tlt/sldng sunroof ( page 245). Have the Tele Ad system* checked by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Close the trunk ld. Add washer flud ( page 303). 376

379 Where wll I fnd...? Frst ad kt The frst ad kt s located n the trunk on the left sde secured by a hook and loop fastener. 1 Frst ad kt 2 Hook and loop fastener Unfasten hook and loop fastener 2. Remove frst ad kt 1. Check expraton dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace mssng/expred tems. Vehcle tool kt The vehcle tool kt s located n the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. The followng s ncluded: Towng eye bolt Wheel wrench Algnment bolt Vehcle jack Spare wheel bolts Spare fuses Collapsble wheel chock A par of gloves Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? Removng the vehcle tool kt Lft up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle n upper edge of trunk. 1 Retanng screw 2 Storage well casng Loosen retanng screw 1 by turnng t counterclockwse. Remove storage well casng

380 Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? 3 Arrow 4 Mnspare wheel 5 Vehcle tool kt storage well casng 6 Vehcle tool kt Remove vehcle tool kt 6. Storng the vehcle tool kt Place vehcle tool kt 6 n vehcle tool kt storage well casng 5. Place storage well casng 2 over the vehcle tool kt storage well casng 5 and turn retanng screw 1 clockwse as far t wll go to secure the Mnspare wheel. Arrow 3 on vehcle tool kt storage well casng 5 must pont n the drecton of travel. Otherwse you cannot place the storage well casng 2 on top and secure the Mnspare wheel wth retanng screw 1.! To prevent damage, always dsengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closng the trunk ld. 378

381 Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? Vehcle jack Warnng! G The vehcle jack s located n the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. The jack s desgned exclusvely for jackng up the vehcle at the jack take-up brackets bult nto both sdes of the vehcle. To help avod personal njury, use the jack only to lft the vehcle durng a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehcle whle t s supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lfted vehcle. Always frmly set parkng brake and block wheels before rasng vehcle wth jack. Do not dsengage parkng brake whle the vehcle s rased. Be certan that the jack s always vertcal (plumb lne) when n use, especally on hlls. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm s fully seated n the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehcle onto suffcent capacty jackstands before workng under the vehcle. Storage poston Remove vehcle jack from ts compartment. Push crank handle up. Operatonal poston Turn crank handle clockwse untl t engages (operatonal poston). Before storng the vehcle jack n ts compartment: It should be fully collapsed. The handle must be folded n (storage poston). 379

382 Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? Settng up the collapsble wheel chock The collapsble wheel chock serves to addtonally secure the vehcle, e.g. whle changng the wheel. Tlt both plates upward 1. Fold the lower plate outward 2. Gude the tabs of the lower plate all the way nto the openngs of the base plate 3. Mnspare wheel The Mnspare wheel s located n the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. Removng the Mnspare wheel Lft up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle n upper edge of trunk. Loosen the retanng screw ( page 377) n the mddle of storage well casng. Remove the storage well casng ( page 377). 1 Tlt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate 380

383 Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? 1 Vehcle tool kt 2 Arrow 3 Mnspare wheel 4 Vehcle tool kt storage well casng Remove vehcle tool kt storage well casng 4. Remove Mnspare wheel 3. Storng the Mnspare wheel Place Mnspare wheel 3 n wheel well. Place vehcle tool kt storage well casng 4 over the Mnspare wheel. Make sure arrow 2 on vehcle tool kt storage well casng 4 ponts n the drecton of travel. Place storage well casng ( page 377) over vehcle tool kt storage well casng 4 and turn the retanng screw ( page 377) clockwse as far t wll go to secure the Mnspare wheel. Arrow 2 on vehcle tool kt storage well casng 4 must pont n the drecton of travel. Otherwse you cannot place the storage well casng ( page 377) on top and secure the Mnspare wheel wth the retanng screw ( page 377).! To prevent damage, always dsengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closng the trunk ld. Warnng! G The dmensons of the Mnspare wheel are dfferent from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehcle handlng characterstcs change when drvng wth a Mnspare wheel mounted. The Mnspare wheel should only be used temporarly, and should be replaced wth a regular road wheel as quckly as possble. 381

384 Practcal hnts Where wll I fnd...? In the case of a flat tre, you may temporarly use the Mnspare wheel when observng the followng restrctons: Do not exceed a vehcle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Drve to the nearest tre repar faclty to have the flat tre repared or replaced as approprate. Do not operate vehcle wth more than one Mnspare wheel mounted. For more nformaton, see Rms and Tres ( page 424). Spare wheel bolts 1 Wheel bolt for lght alloy rms 2 Wheel bolt for Mnspare wheel or other steel rms (located n trunk wth spare wheel)! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mountng the Mnspare wheel or other steel rms. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Mnspare wheel or other steel rms wll physcally damage the vehcle s brakes. Warnng! G Make sure to use the orgnal length wheel bolts when remountng the orgnal wheel after t has been repared. 382

385 Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Unlockng the vehcle Removng the mechancal key Practcal hnts Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Unlockng the drver s door If you are unable to unlock the vehcle wth the SmartKey, open the drver s door and the trunk usng the mechancal key. Unlockng the drver s door and/or the trunk wth the mechancal key wll trgger the ant-theft alarm system*. To cancel the alarm, do one of the followng: Press button Πor on the SmartKey. Insert the SmartKey n the starter swtch. 1 Mechancal key lockng tab 2 Mechancal key Move lockng tab 1 n drecton of arrow. Slde mechancal key 2 out of the housng. 1 Unlockng Insert the mechancal key nto the drver s door lock untl t stops. Turn the mechancal key counterclockwse to poston 1. The drver s door s unlocked. 383

386 Practcal hnts Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Unlockng and openng the trunk A mnmum heght clearance of 5.71 ft (1.74 m) s requred to open the trunk ld. The trunk ld lock s located next to the handle above the rear lcense plate recess. 1 Unlockng n an emergency 2 Handle Insert the mechancal key nto the trunk ld lock untl t stops. Turn the mechancal key counterclockwse to poston 1. The trunk ld unlocks. Pull on handle 2. The trunk ld opens.! The trunk ld swngs open upwards automatcally. Always make sure there s suffcent overhead clearance. Turn the mechancal key back and remove t from the trunk ld lock. Lockng the vehcle If you are unable to lock the vehcle wth the SmartKey, do the followng: Close the passenger doors and the trunk ld. Press the central lockng swtch n the center console ( page 104). Check to see whether the lockng knobs on the passenger doors have moved down. If necessary push them down manually. Except for the drver s door, the vehcle should now be locked. 384

387 Practcal hnts Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Fuel fller flap In case the central lockng system does not release the fuel fller flap, you can open t manually. Warnng! G 1 Lockng Insert the mechancal key nto the drver s door lock untl t stops. Turn the mechancal key clockwse to poston 1. The drver s door s locked. If you operate the emergency release button, be careful of the sharp edges so that you do not njure yourself. The release button s on the rght-hand sde of the luggage compartment behnd the sde trm. 1 Sde trm 2 Release button Open the trunk ld. Remove the sde trm 1 from the rght-hand sde of the luggage compartment. Turn release button 2 clockwse as far as wll go. The fuel fller flap s released. Open the fuel fller flap from outsde. 385

388 Practcal hnts Unlockng/lockng n an emergency Manually unlockng the transmsson gear selector lever In the case of power falure the transmsson gear selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehcle. Slde out the swvelng cup holder ( page 261). Insert a tool 1 (e.g. flat blade screwdrver) nto the openng. Perform the followng two steps smultaneously: Press tool 1 forward n the drecton of the arrow. Move gear selector lever from poston P. Remove tool 1 from the openng. The gear selector lever s locked agan when movng t to poston P. 1 Tool 386

389 Openng/closng n an emergency Power tlt/sldng sunroof* Practcal hnts Openng/closng n an emergency You can open or close the tlt/sldng sunroof manually should an electrcal malfuncton occur. The tlt/sldng sunroof drve s located behnd the lens 1 of the nteror overhead lght. Remove SmartKey from the starter swtch. Pry of lens 1 usng a flat blade screwdrver. Slde both lockng tabs 2 n drecton of the arrows. Lower the rear of the cover and remove. Remove the cover. Take the crank 3 out of the Operator s Manual pouch. Do not dsconnect electrcal connectors. Insert crank 3 through hole on the left sde. Turn crank 3 clockwse to: slde sunroof closed rase sunroof at the rear Turn crank 3 counterclockwse to: slde sunroof open lower sunroof at the rear Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly. The tlt/sldng sunroof must be synchronzed after beng operated manually ( page 248). 387

390 Practcal hnts Replacng SmartKey batteres If the batteres n the SmartKey are dscharged, the vehcle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It s recommended to have the batteres replaced at an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Warnng! G Keep the batteres out of reach of chldren. If a battery s swallowed, seek medcal help mmedately. Batteres contan materals that can harm the envronment f dsposed of mproperly. Recyclng of batteres s the preferred method of dsposal. Many states requre sellers of batteres to accept old batteres for recyclng. When nsertng the batteres, make sure they are clean and free of lnt. When replacng batteres, always replace both batteres. The requred replacement batteres are avalable at any Mercedes-Benz Center. 388

391 Practcal hnts Replacng SmartKey batteres SmartKey Replacement batteres: Lthum, type CR 2025 or equvalent. Remove the mechancal key ( page 383). Insert mechancal key 1 n sde openng and push grey slde. Battery compartment 2 s unlatched. Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housng n drecton of arrow. Remove the batteres. Usng a lnt-free cloth, nsert new batteres 3 under contact sprng 4 wth the plus (+) sde facng up. Return battery compartment 2 nto housng untl t locks nto place. Slde mechancal key 1 back nto the SmartKey. Check the operaton of the SmartKey. 1 Mechancal key 2 Battery compartment 3 Battery 4 Contact sprng 389

392 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Safe vehcle operaton depends on proper exteror lghtng and sgnalng. It s therefore essental that all bulbs and lamp assembles are n good workng order at all tmes. Correct headlamp adjustment s extremely mportant. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular ntervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment. If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the nsde as a result of hgh humdty, drvng the vehcle a dstance wth the lghts on should clear up the foggng. Substtute bulbs wll be brought nto use when lamps malfuncton. Observe the messages n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 371). Bulbs 390

393 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Front lamps Lamp 1 Addtonal turn sgnal lamp 2 Halogen headlamp: Turn sgnal lamp B-Xenon* headlamp: Turn sgnal lamp 3 Halogen headlamp: Low beam B-Xenon* headlamp: Low and hgh beam 1 Type LED 1156 A 2357 A H7 (55 W) D2S-35 W 1 Vehcles wth B-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam and hgh beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do not replace the Xenon bulbs yourself. See an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Lamp Type 4 Halogen headlamp: Hgh beam/hgh beam flasher H7 (55 W) B-Xenon* headlamp: Hgh beam flasher H7 (55 W) Parkng and standng W5W lamp 5 Front fog lamp HB4 (51 W) Front fog lamp wth H7 (55 W) cornerng fog lamp* 6 Sde marker lamp W5W Rear lamps Lamp Type 7 Hgh mounted brake LED lamp 8 Brake lamp P21W 9 Turn sgnal lamp PY 21 W a Parkng and sde P 21/5 W marker lamp b Backup lamp P21W c Lcense plate lamps C5W d Rear fog lamp (drver s P 21/4 W sde only), tal and standng lamp 391

394 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Warnng! Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changng a bulb. Keep bulbs out of reach of chldren. Halogen lamps contan pressurzed gas. A bulb can explode f you G touch or move t when hot drop the bulb scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protecton. Because of hgh voltage n Xenon lamps, t s dangerous to replace the bulb or repar the lamp and ts components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualfed techncan. Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and wth the specfed watt ratng. Swtch lghts off before changng a bulb to prevent short crcuts. Always use a clean lnt-free cloth when handlng bulbs. Your hands should be dry and free of ol and grease. If the newly nstalled bulb does not come on, vst an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Have the LEDs and bulbs for the followng lamps replaced by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center: Addtonal turn sgnals n the exteror rear vew mrrors Hgh mounted brake lamp Xenon* lamps Front fog lamps Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly. 392

395 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Replacng bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the followng frst: Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston M ( page 117). Open the hood ( page 296) (except for sde marker lamps). Halogen headlamp 3 Bulb socket for turn sgnal lamp bulb 4 Bulb socket for low beam bulb 5 Bulb socket for hgh beam bulb 6 Bulb socket for parkng and standng lamp bulb Low beam bulb Press the clamp on housng cover 1 and remove t. Pull the electrcal connector off. Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwse and take out the bulb. Insert the new bulb so that ts socket locates n the recess of the lamp housng. Turn bulb socket 4 clockwse untl t engages. Plug the electrcal connector onto the bulb. Algn housng cover 1 and press untl t engages. 1 Housng cover for low beam headlamp 2 Housng cover for hgh beam headlamp, parkng and standng lamp 393

396 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Hgh beam bulb Press the clamp on housng cover 2 and remove t. Pull the electrcal connector off. Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwse and take out the bulb. Insert the new bulb so that ts socket locates n the recess of the lamp housng. Turn bulb socket 5 clockwse untl t engages. Plug the electrcal connector onto the bulb. Algn housng cover 2 and press untl t engages. Front turn sgnal lamp bulb Turn bulb socket 3 wth the bulb counterclockwse and remove t. Press gently onto the bulb and turn t counterclockwse out of bulb socket 3. Press new bulb gently nto bulb socket 3 and turn clockwse untl t engages. Place bulb socket 3 back nto the lamp and turn t clockwse. Parkng and standng lamp bulb Press the clamp on housng cover 2 and remove t. Pull out bulb socket 6 wth the bulb. Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6. Press the new bulb nto bulb socket 6. Press bulb socket 6 back nto the lamp. Algn housng cover 2 and press untl t engages. 394

397 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs B-Xenon* headlamp Warnng! G Do not remove the cover 1 for the B-Xenon headlamp. Because of hgh voltage n B-Xenon lamps, t s dangerous to replace the bulb or repar the lamp and ts components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualfed techncan. 3 Bulb socket for turn sgnal lamp bulb 4 Bulb socket for hgh beam flasher bulb 5 Bulb socket for parkng and standng lamp bulb Hgh beam flasher bulb Press the clamp on housng cover 2 and remove t. Pull the electrcal connector off. Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwse and take out the bulb. Insert the new bulb so that ts socket locates n the recess of the lamp housng. Turn bulb socket 4 clockwse untl t engages. Plug the electrcal connector onto the bulb. Algn housng cover 2 and press untl t engages. 1 Housng cover for B-Xenon headlamp 2 Housng cover for hgh beam flasher, parkng and standng lamp 395

398 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Front turn sgnal lamp bulb 396 Turn bulb socket 3 wth the bulb counterclockwse and remove t. Press gently onto the bulb and turn t counterclockwse out of bulb socket 3. Press new bulb gently nto bulb socket 3 and turn clockwse untl t engages. Place bulb socket 3 back nto the lamp and turn t clockwse. Parkng and standng lamp bulb Press the clamp on housng cover 2 and remove t. Pull out bulb socket 5 wth the bulb. Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5. Press the new bulb nto bulb socket 5. Press bulb socket 5 back nto the lamp. Algn housng cover 2 and press untl t engages. Sde marker lamp Carefully slde the lamp towards the rear n drecton of arrows. Remove the front end frst. Turn the bulb socket wth the bulb counterclockwse and remove t. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket. Insert the new bulb nto the bulb socket. Place the bulb socket back nto the lamp and turn t clockwse. To renstall the lamp, set the rear end n the bumper and let the front end engage.

399 Practcal hnts Replacng bulbs Replacng bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp, do the followng frst: Turn the exteror lamp swtch to poston M ( page 117). Open the trunk ld ( page 99). Tal lamp unt 1 Latch Fold the correspondng trm panel to the sde. Turn latch 1 to vertcal poston and remove the bulb carrer. Bulb carrer 2 Brake lamp bulb 3 Backup lamp bulb 4 Rear fog lamp (drver s sde only), tal and standng lamp bulb 5 Parkng and sde marker lamp bulb 6 Turn sgnal lamp bulb Press gently onto the respectve bulb and turn counterclockwse out of ts bulb socket. Press the new bulb gently nto ts bulb socket and turn clockwse untl t engages. Renstall the bulb carrer and lock t agan wth latch 1. Renstall the trm panel. Lcense plate lamp 1 Screw Loosen both screws 1. Remove the lcense plate lamp. Replace the bulb. Renstall the lcense plate lamp. Retghten screws

400 Practcal hnts Replacng wper blades Removng wper blades Warnng! Remove SmartKey from starter swtch. Fold wper arm forward. G For safety reasons, swtch off wpers and remove SmartKey from starter swtch before replacng a wper blade. Otherwse, the wper motor could suddenly turn on and cause njury. Pull the tab n drecton of arrow 1 and remove wper blade. Installng wper blades Slde the wper blade nto the cutout on the wper arm (see arrows). Slde the tab back n the drecton of arrow 2 untl t audbly engages. Fold the wper arm backward to rest on the wndsheld. Make sure you hold on to the wper when foldng the wper arm back.! Never open the hood when the wper arms are folded forward. Hold on to the wper when foldng the wper arm back. If released, the force of the mpact from the tensonng sprng could crack the wndsheld. Do not allow the wper arms to contact the wndsheld glass wthout a wper blade nserted. Make certan that the wper blades are properly nstalled. Improperly nstalled wper blades may cause wndsheld damage. For your convenence, we recommend that you have ths work carred out by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Unlock 2 Lock 398

401 Flat tre Warnng! G The dmensons of the Mnspare wheel are dfferent from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehcle handlng characterstcs change when drvng wth a Mnspare wheel mounted. Adapt your drvng style accordngly. The Mnspare wheel s for temporary use only. When drvng wth Mnspare wheel mounted, ensure proper tre nflaton pressure and do not exceed a vehcle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Drve to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possble to have the Mnspare wheel replaced wth a regular road wheel. Never operate the vehcle wth more than one Mnspare wheel mounted. Preparng the vehcle Park the vehcle as far as possble from movng traffc on a hard surface. Turn on the hazard warnng flasher ( page 123). Turn the steerng wheel so that the front wheels are n a straght ahead poston. Set the parkng brake ( page 54). Move the gear selector lever to P (manual transmsson: to frst or reverse gear). Turn off the engne ( page 56). Remove the SmartKey from the starter swtch. Have any passenger ext the vehcle at a safe dstance from the roadway. Open doors only when condtons are safe to do so. Practcal hnts Mountng the Mnspare wheel Preparng the vehcle Prepare the vehcle as descrbed ( page 399). Flat tre Take the wheel wrench, the wheel bolts, and the jack out of the trunk ( page 377). Take the Mnspare wheel out of the trunk ( page 380). 399

402 Practcal hnts Flat tre Lftng the vehcle Prevent the vehcle from rollng away by blockng wheels wth wheel chocks or other szable objects. One wheel chock s ncluded wth the vehcle tool kt ( page 377). When changng wheel on a level surface: Place the wheel chock n front of and another szable object behnd the wheel that s dagonally opposte to the wheel beng changed. When changng wheel on a hll: Place the wheel chock and another szable object on the downhll sde blockng both wheels of the other axle. Warnng! G The jack s desgned exclusvely for jackng up the vehcle at the jack take-up brackets bult nto both sdes of the vehcle. To help avod personal njury, use the jack only to lft the vehcle durng a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehcle whle t s supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lfted vehcle. Always frmly set parkng brake and block wheels before rasng vehcle wth jack. Do not dsengage parkng brake whle the vehcle s rased. Be certan that the jack s always vertcal (plumb lne) when n use, especally on hlls. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm s fully seated n the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehcle onto suffcent capacty jackstands before workng under the vehcle. On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approxmately one full turn wth wrench). 400

403 Practcal hnts Flat tre The jack take-up brackets are located drectly behnd the front wheel housngs and n front of the rear wheel housngs. Removng the wheel 1 Take-up bracket 2 Jack Place jack 2 on frm ground. Poston jack 2 under take-up bracket 1 so that t s always vertcal (plumb-lne) as seen from the sde, even f the vehcle s parked on an nclne. Jack up the vehcle untl the wheel s a maxmum of 1.2 n (3 cm) from the ground. Never start engne whle vehcle s rased. Warnng! G The jack s ntended only for lftng the vehcle brefly for wheel changes. It s not suted for performng mantenance work under the vehcle. Never start the engne when the vehcle s rased. Never le down under the rased vehcle. 1 Algnment bolt Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove. Replace ths wheel bolt wth algnment bolt 1 suppled n the tool kt. Remove the remanng bolts.! Do not place wheel bolts n sand or drt. Ths could result n damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads. Remove the wheel. 401

404 Practcal hnts Flat tre Mountng the spare wheel Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.! To avod pant damage, place wheel flat aganst hub and hold t there whle nstallng frst wheel bolt. 1 Wheel bolt for lght alloy rms 2 Wheel bolt for Mnspare wheel or other steel rms (located n trunk wth spare wheel)! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mountng the Mnspare wheel or other steel rms. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Mnspare wheel or other steel rms wll physcally damage the vehcle s brakes. Warnng! G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply ol or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repared mmedately. Do not contnue to drve under these crcumstances! Contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadsde Assstance. Incorrect wheel bolts or mproperly tghtened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. Ths could cause an accdent. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts. Gude spare wheel onto the algnment bolt and push t on. Insert wheel bolts and tghten them slghtly. 402

405 Practcal hnts Flat tre Lowerng the vehcle Lower vehcle by turnng crank counterclockwse untl vehcle s restng fully on ts own weght. Remove the jack. Warnng! G Have the tghtenng torque checked after changng a wheel. The wheels could come loose f they are not tghtened to a torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). Unscrew the algnment bolt, nstall last wheel bolt and tghten slghtly. Warnng! G Before storng the jack, t should be fully collapsed, wth handle folded n (storage poston) ( page 379). Store the jack and the other vehcle tools n the trunk. Only use genune equpment Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. Do not tghten the wheel bolts when the vehcle s rased. Otherwse the vehcle could fall off the jack. 1-5 Wheel bolts Tghten the fve wheel bolts evenly, followng the dagonal sequence llustrated (1 to 5), untl all bolts are tght. Observe a tghtenng torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). 403

406 Practcal hnts Battery The battery s located n the engne compartment on the rght hand sde. 1 Clamps Removng flter box: Release clamps 1. Remove flter box. Installng flter box: Insert flter box properly. Secure t wth clamps 1. Warnng! Falure to follow these nstructons can result n severe njury or death. Observe all safety nstructons and precautons when handlng automotve batteres ( page 302). G Never lean over batteres whle connectng, you mght get njured. Battery flud contans sulfurc acd. Do not allow ths flud to come n contact wth eyes, skn or clothng. In case t does, mmedately flush affected area wth water and seek medcal help f necessary. A battery wll also produce hydrogen gas, whch s flammable and explosve. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avod mproper connecton of jumper cables, smokng, etc.! Never loosen or detach battery termnal clamps whle the engne s runnng or the SmartKey s n the starter swtch. Otherwse the alternator and other electronc components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to Mantenance Booklet for mantenance ntervals or contact an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center for further nformaton. Warnng! G Do not place metal objects on the battery as ths could result n a short crcut. Use leak-proof battery only to avod the rsk of acd burns n the event of an accdent. 404

407 Practcal hnts Battery Warnng! Wth a dsconnected battery G you wll no longer be able to turn the SmartKey n the starter swtch the gear selector lever wll reman locked n poston P Dsconnectng the battery Turn off the engne ( page 56). Turn off all electrcal consumers. Remove SmartKey from starter swtch. Open the hood ( page 296). Remove the flter box ( page 404). Dsconnect the battery negatve lead from negatve termnal 1. Remove cover 2 from the postve termnal. Dsconnect the battery postve lead. Removng the battery Chargng and renstallng the battery Charge battery n accordance wth the nstructons of the battery charger manufacturer. Renstall the charged battery. Follow the prevously descrbed steps n reverse order. Warnng! G Never charge a battery whle stll nstalled n the vehcle. Gases may escape durng chargng and cause explosons that may result n pant damage, corroson or personal njury. 1 Negatve termnal 2 Postve termnal cover Remove the screw-nuts securng the battery. Remove the battery bracket. Take out the battery. 405

408 Practcal hnts Battery Reconnectng the battery Turn off all electrcal consumers. Remove SmartKey from starter swtch. Connect the battery postve lead and fasten ts cover 2. Connect the battery negatve lead.! NEVER nvert the termnal connectons! Renstall the flter box ( page 404).! The battery, ts fller caps and the vent tube must always be securely nstalled when the vehcle s n operaton. The followng procedures must be carred out followng any nterrupton of battery power (e.g. due to reconnecton): Set the clock ( page 145). Vehcles wth COMAND*: See COMAND operator s manual. Synchronze sde wndows ( page 244). Synchronze tlt/sldng sunroof* ( page 248). Batteres contan materals that can harm the envronment f dsposed of mproperly. Large 12 volt storage batteres contan lead. Recyclng of batteres s the preferred method of dsposal. Many states requre sellers of batteres to accept old batteres for recyclng. 406

409 Jump startng Warnng! G Falure to follow these drectons wll cause damage to the electronc components, and can lead to a battery exploson and severe njury or death. Never lean over batteres whle connectng or jump startng, you mght get njured. Battery flud contans sulfurc acd. Do not allow ths flud to come n contact wth eyes, skn or clothng. In case t does, mmedately flush affected area wth water, and seek medcal help f necessary. A battery wll also produce hydrogen gas, whch s flammable and very explosve. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avod mproper connecton of jumper cables, smokng, etc. Attemptng to jump start a frozen battery can result n t explodng, causng personal njury. Read all nstructons before proceedng. If the battery s dscharged, the engne can be started wth jumper cables and the battery of another vehcle. Observe the followng: Jump startng should only be performed when the engne and catalytc converter are cold. Do not start the engne f the battery s frozen. Let the battery thaw out frst. Only jump start from batteres wth the same voltage ratng (12 V). Jump startng wth a more powerful battery could damage the vehcle s electrcal system, whch wll not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Only use jumper cables wth suffcent cross-secton and nsulated termnal clamps. Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when an engne s started or runnng. Practcal hnts Jump startng! Avod repeated and lengthy startng attempts. Do not attempt to start the engne usng a battery quck charge unt. If engne does not run after several unsuccessful startng attempts, have t checked at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Excessve unburned fuel generated by repeated faled startng attempts may damage the catalytc converter and may present a fre rsk. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or mssng nsulaton. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part whle the other end s stll attached to a battery. 407

410 Practcal hnts Jump startng The battery s located n the engne compartment on the rght hand sde. The termnals for jump startng are located n front of the battery. Warnng! Make sure the two vehcles do not touch. Turn off all electrcal consumers. Apply parkng brake. G Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. Observe all safety nstructons and precautons when handlng automotve batteres ( page 302). Shft gear selector lever to poston P (manual transmsson: to Neutral). 1 Postve termnal of charged battery 2 Postve under hood termnal n front of dscharged battery 3 Negatve under hood termnal n front of dscharged battery 4 Negatve termnal of charged battery Connect postve termnal 1 of the charged battery wth postve under hood termnal 2 n front of the dscharged battery wth the jumper cables. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 frst. Start engne of the vehcle wth the charged battery and run at dle speed. Connect negatve termnal 4 of the charged battery wth negatve under hood termnal 3 n front of the dscharged battery wth the jumper cables. Clamp cable to charged battery 4 frst. Start the engne of the dsabled vehcle. You can now agan turn on the electrcal consumers. Do not turn on the lghts under any crcumstances. Remove the jumper cables frst from negatve termnals 3 and 4 and then from postve termnals 2 and 1. You can now turn on the lghts. Have the battery checked at the nearest authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center.! Vehcles wth automatc transmsson and/or 4MATIC: Do not tow-start the vehcle. 408

411 Towng the vehcle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehcle be transported wth all wheels off the ground usng flatbed or approprate wheel lft/dolly equpment. Ths method s preferable to other types of towng.! Use flatbed or wheel lft/dolly equpment wth the SmartKey n the starter swtch turned to poston 0. Do not tow wth slng-type equpment. Towng wth slng-type equpment over bumpy roads wll damage radator and supports. To prevent damage durng transport, do not te down vehcle by ts chasss or suspenson parts. Swtch off the tow-away alarm* ( page 91) and deactvate the automatc central lockng ( page 153). When crcumstances do not permt the recommended towng methods, the vehcle may be towed wth all wheels on the ground or front wheels rased (except vehcles wth 4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the vehcle moved to a safe locaton where the recommended towng methods can be employed.! Vehcles wth automatc transmsson and/or 4MATIC: Do not tow-start the vehcle.! Vehcles wth 4MATIC: Do not tow wth one axle rased. Dong so could damage the transfer case, whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe nstructons for towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground. Practcal hnts Towng the vehcle! If the vehcle s towed wth the front axle rased (not permssble for vehcles wth 4MATIC), the engne must be shut off (SmartKey n starter swtch poston 0 or 1). Otherwse the ESP wll mmedately be engaged and wll apply the rear wheel brakes. When towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be n poston N (manual transmsson: gears dsengaged) and the SmartKey must be n starter swtch poston 2. When towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground or the front axle rased, the vehcle may be towed only for dstances up to 30 mles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). 409

412 Practcal hnts Towng the vehcle! To be certan to avod a possblty of damage to the drvetran, however, we recommend the drve shaft be dsconnected at the rear axle drve flange (vehcles wth 4MATIC: dsconnected at the front and rear axle drve flanges) for any towng beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Warnng! G If crcumstances requre towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground, always tow wth a tow bar f: the engne wll not run there s a malfuncton n the power supply or n the vehcle s electrcal system as that wll be necessary to adequately control the towed vehcle. Pror to towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey s n starter swtch poston 2. If the SmartKey s left n starter swtch poston 0 for an extended perod of tme, t can no longer be turned n the swtch. In ths case, the steerng s locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter swtch and rensert. To sgnal turns whle beng towed wth the hazard warnng flasher n use, swtch on gnton and actvate the combnaton swtch for the left or rght turn sgnal n the usual manner only the selected turn sgnal wll operate. Upon cancelng the turn sgnal, the hazard warnng flasher wll operate agan. 410

413 Practcal hnts Towng the vehcle Warnng! G Wth the engne not runnng, there s no power assstance for the brake and steerng systems. In ths case, t s mportant to keep n mnd that a consderably hgher degree of effort s necessary to brake and steer the vehcle. Adapt your drvng accordngly.! When towng the vehcle wth all wheels on the ground, please note the followng: Wth the automatc central lockng actvated and the SmartKey n starter swtch poston 2, the vehcle doors lock f the left front wheel as well as the rght rear wheel are turnng at vehcle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Swtch off the tow-away alarm* ( page 91). To prevent the vehcle doors from lockng, deactvate the automatc central lockng ( page 153). Towng of the vehcle should only be done usng the properly nstalled towng eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehcle chasss, frame or suspenson parts. If the battery s dsconnected or dscharged the SmartKey wll not turn n the starter swtch. For more nformaton, see Battery ( page 404) and Jump startng ( page 407). the gear selector lever wll reman locked n poston P. For nformaton on manually unlockng the transmsson gear selector lever see ( page 386). 411

414 Practcal hnts Towng the vehcle Installng towng eye bolt 1 Cover on rght sde of front bumper. 2 Cover on rght sde of rear bumper. Removng cover Press mark on cover 1 or 2 n drecton of arrows. Lft cover off to reveal threaded hole for towng eye bolt. The towng eye bolt s suppled wth the tool kt (located n the compartment underneath the trunk floor). Screw towng eye bolt n to ts stop and tghten wth lug wrench. Renstallng cover Ft cover 1 or 2 and snap nto place. 412

415 Fuses The electrcal fuses n your vehcle serve to stop the supply of electrcty to a devce that s malfunctonng. Ths helps to prevent damage to the other vehcle electroncs. The followng ads are avalable to help you change fuses ( page 413): Fuse chart Spare fuses Fuse extractor Warnng! G Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz wth the specfed amperage for the system n queston. Otherwse, a short crcut could result and cause a fre. The electrcal fuses are located n dfferent fuse boxes:! Only nstall fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and that have the specfed amperage ratng. Otherwse, electrcal parts or systems could be damaged. Never attempt to repar or brdge a blown fuse. Have the cause determned and remeded by an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center. Man fuse box n passenger compartment ( page 414) Fuse box n engne compartment ( page 414) Fuse box n trunk ( page 416) Ads for changng fuses Practcal hnts Fuses Fuse chart The fuse chart s found n the man fuse box n the passenger compartment ( page 414). The amperages of the fuses are also gven there. Spare fuses Spare fuses are found n the vehcle tool kt n the spare wheel well ( page 377). Fuse extractor The fuse extractor s found n the fuse box cover n the trunk ( page 416). 413

416 Practcal hnts Fuses Man fuse box n passenger compartment The man fuse box s located n the passenger compartment on the drver s sde of the cockpt. Openng fuse box Open the drver s door. Pull fuse box cover 1 open wth a screw drver or smlar tool (see arrow). Remove fuse box cover 1 rearward. Closng fuse box Attach fuse box cover 1 n the front. Fold fuse box cover 1 n untl t engages. Fuse box n engne compartment The fuse box s located n the engne compartment on the drver s sde. 1 Man fuse box cover 1 Cover 2 Screws 3 Retaner 414

417 Practcal hnts Fuses Removng cover Twst screws 2 90 counterclockwse. Lft the rear of cover 1. Slde out retaner 3 and remove cover 1 by pullng towards front. Openng fuse box 4 Fuse box cover 5 Clamps Wth a dry cloth, remove any mosture from the fuse box. Release clamps 5. Remove fuse box cover 4. Closng fuse box Make sure that the sealng rubber s properly postoned. Press fuse box cover 4 down and secure wth clamps 5. Installng cover Insert cover 1 sdeways nto retaner 3. Twst screws 2 90 clockwse. 415

418 Practcal hnts Fuses Fuse box n trunk The fuse box s located n the trunk behnd the left-hand trm panel. Openng fuse box Pull away trm panel 1. Remove fuse box cover 3. Closng fuse box Insert fuse box cover 3 untl t engages. Insert trm panel 1. 1 Trm panel 2 Fuse extractor 3 Fuse box cover 416

419 Techncal data Parts servce Warranty coverage Identfcaton labels Layout of poly-v-belt drve Engne Rms and Tres Electrcal system Man dmensons Weghts Fuels, coolants, lubrcants, etc. 417

420 Techncal data Parts servce The Techncal data secton provdes the necessary techncal data for your vehcle. All authorzed Mercedes-Benz Centers mantan a stock of genune Mercedes-Benz parts requred for mantenance and repar work. In addton, strategcally located parts dstrbuton centers provde quck and relable parts servce. More than dfferent parts for Mercedes-Benz models are avalable. Genune Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strngent qualty nspectons. Each part has been specfcally developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehcles. Therefore, genune Mercedes-Benz parts should be nstalled.! The use of non-genune Mercedes-Benz parts and accessores not authorzed by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehcle, whch s not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty, or could compromse the vehcle s durablty or safety. 418

421 Warranty coverage Your vehcle s covered under the terms of the warrantes prnted n the Servce and Warranty Informaton booklet. Your authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center wll exchange or repar any defectve parts orgnally nstalled n the vehcle n accordance wth the terms of the followng warrantes: New Vehcle Lmted Warranty Emsson System Warranty Emsson Performance Warranty Calforna, Mane, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emsson Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessores are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessores warrantes, copes of whch are avalable at any Mercedes-Benz Center. Techncal data Warranty coverage Loss of Servce and Warranty Informaton Booklet Should you lose your Servce and Warranty Informaton booklet, have an authorzed Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It wll be maled to you. 419

422 Techncal data Identfcaton labels 1 Certfcaton label (ncludes Pantwork code) 2 Vehcle Identfcaton Number (VIN) 3 Emsson control nformaton label, ncludes both federal and Calforna certfcaton exhaust emsson standards 4 Engne number (engraved on engne) 5 VIN, vsble (lower edge of wndsheld) 6 Vacuum lne routng dagram label When orderng parts, please specfy vehcle dentfcaton and engne numbers. 420

423 Layout of poly-v-belt drve C 230 Kompressor (all models) C 240 (all models)/c 320 (all models) Techncal data Layout of poly-v-belt drve 1 Power steerng pump 2 Idler pulley 3 Supercharger 4 Automatc belt tensoner 5 Ar condtonng compressor 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump 8 Generator (alternator) 1 Automatc belt tensoner 2 Power steerng pump 3 Ar condtonng compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 421